0% found this document useful (0 votes)
2K views788 pages

Machine of Design PDF

Uploaded by

Patel Pritesh
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
2K views788 pages

Machine of Design PDF

Uploaded by

Patel Pritesh
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 788
THIRD EDITION Tata McGraw-Hill Published by Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 7 West Patel Nagar, New Delhi 110 008 Design of Machine Elements, 3e ‘Copyright © 2010, 2007, 1994 by Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited First eprint 2010 DZXQCRBZRYRRY No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise or stored in a database or retrieval system without the prior written permission of the publishers. The program listing (if any) may be entered, stored and executed in a computer system, but they may not be reproduced for publication. ‘This edition can be exported from India only by the publishers, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited ISBN-13: 978-0.07-068179-8 ISBN-10: 0-07-068179-1 Managing Director: Ajay Shukla Head—Higher Education Publishing: Vibha Mahajan ‘Manager: Sponsoring—SEM & Tech Ed: Shali ‘Assoc. Sponsoring Editor: Suman Sen Development Editor: Devshree Lohchab Executive—Editorial Services: Sohini Mukherjee Sr Production Manager: P L Pandita General Manager: Marketing —Higher Education: Michael J Cruz Dy Marketing Manager—SEM & Tech Ed: Biju Ganesan General Manager—Production: Rajender P Ghansela Asst General Manager—Production: 8 L Dogra Information contained in this work has been obtained by Tata McGraw-Hill, from sources believed to be reliable. However, neither Tata McGraw-Hill nor its authors guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information Published herein, and neither Tata McGraw-Hill nor its authors shall be responsible for any errors, omissions, or damages arising out of use of this information. This work is published with the understanding that Tata McGraw-Hill and its authors are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services. If such services are required, the assistance of an appropriate professional should be sought. ‘Typeset at Bukprint India, B-180A, Guru Nanak Pura, Laxmi Nagar, Delhi 110 092 and printed at Magic International Private Limited, Greater Noida 201 306 Cover Printer: Magic International Cea { pu! _ Contents ” $ . 4 2) Preface xvii Visual Walkthrough xxi 1,_Introduction i, 1.1 Machine Design J 1.2 Basic Procedure of Machine Design 2 1.3. Basic Requirements of Machine Elements 3 1.4 Design of Machine Elements 4 1.5 Traditional Design Methods 8 1.6 Design Synthesis 8 1.7_Use of Standards in Design 9 8 Selection of Preferred Sizes 11 1.9 Aesthetic Considerations in Design 14 1.10 Ergonomic Considerations in Design _15 1.11 Concurrent Engineering 1/7 Short Answer Questions _19 Problems for Practice _19 2.__Engineering Materials 20 2.1 Stress-Strain Diagrams _ 20 2.2 Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials 23 23 Cast Iron 26. 2.4 BIS System of Designation of Stecls 29 2.5 Plain-carbon Steels 30 2.6 Free-cutting Steels 32 2.7 Alloy Steels 32 2.8 Overseas Standards 34 2.9 Heat Treatment of Stesls 36 2.10 Case Hardening of Steels _37 211 Cast Steel 38 This one l 6FF3-8P5-RS1Y vi_Contenis 2.12 Aluminium Alloys 39 2.13 Copper Alloys 47 2.14 Die-casting Alloys 43 2.15 Ceramics 44 die aes 4s en 2.18 Natural and Synthetic Rubbers 49 2.19 Creep 50 i 2.20 Selection of Material 51 2.21 Weighted Point Method 51 ‘Short Answer Questions 53 3._Manufacturing Considerations in Design 55 3.1. Selection of Manufacturing Method 55 3.2 Design Considerations of Castings 57 3.3__Design Considerations of Forgings 59 3.4 Design Considerations of Machined Parts 6/ 35, Hot and Cold Working of Metals 62 3.6 Design Considerations of Welded Assemblies 62 3.7 Design for Manufacture and Assembly (DFMA) 64 3.8 Tolerances 65 3.9 ‘Types of Fits 66 3.10 BIS System of Fits and Tolerances _67 3.12 Tolerances end Manufacturing Methods 69 3.13 ‘Selective Assembly 70 3.14 “Tolerances For Bolt Spacing 72 3.15 Surface Roughness 73 Short Answer Questions _13 Problems for Practice 74 4. Design Against Static Load 76 4.1 Modes of Failure 76 42 Factor of Safety 77 43 Stress-strain Relationship 79 44 Shear Stress and Shear Strain 80 4.5. Stresses Due To Bending Moment _8/ Sneed 47 Fecentric Axial Loading 83 4.8 Design of Simple Machine Pars 84 49 Cotter Joint 85 4.10 Design Procedure for Cotter Joint 90 cee! 4.12_Design Procedure for Knuckle Joint 99 4.13 Principal Stresses 704 | r “of Elastic F a I 4.15 Maximum Principal Stress Theory _/07 4.16 Maximum Shear Sess Theory 108 4.17 Distortion-Energy Theory 1/0 4 i i : 419 Levers 117 4.20 Design of Levers 1/8 4.21 Fracture Mecha 2 4.22 Curved Beams 130 4.23 Thermal Stresses 125 4.24 Residual Stresses 136 Short Answer Questions _137 Problems for Practice 138 5. _ Design Against Fluctuating Load 141 a eae a Stross Cy cee 5.3. Reduction of Stress Concentration 145 5.4 Fluctuating Stresses _/49 5.5_Fatigue Failure /5/ 5.6 Endurance Limit 152 5.7 Low-cycle and High-cycle Fatinue _/53 5.8 Notch Sensitivity 154 5.9 Endurance Limit—Approximate Estimation _/55 5.10 Reversed Stresses—Design for Finite and Infinite Life 159 5.11 Cumulative Damage in Fatigue 166 5.12 Soderberg and Goodman Lines _/67 5.13, Modified Goodman Diagrams 768 5.14 Gerber Equation 174 5.15 Fatigue Design under Combined Stresses 177 5.16 Impact Stresses /80 ‘Short Answer Questions 182 Problems for Practice 182 6._Power Screws ind 6.1 Power Screws 184 6.2 Forms of Theeads 185 6.3. Multiple Threaded Screws 187 6.4 Terminology of Power Screw _/87 6.5 ‘Torque Requirement—Lifting Load 189 "6.6 Torque Requiremeni—Lowering Load 189 6.7 Self-locking Screw 90 6.8 Efficiency of Square Threaded Screw 190 6.9 Efficiency of Self-locking Screw _/92 6.10 “Trapezoidal and Acme Threads 192 6.11 Collar Friction Torque _/93 : 6.12 Overall Efficiency 194 nted material viti_ Contents 6.14 Design of Screw and Nut__194 6.15 Design of Screw Jack 206 6.16 Differential and Compound Screws 2/4 6.17 Recirculating Ball Screw 2/5 ‘Short-Answer Questions 216 Problems for Practice 217 7._Threaded Joint 219 7.2 Basic Types of Screw Fastening 220 Cap Screws 222 4 Setscrews 223 7.5 Bolt of Uniform Strength 224 76 Locking Devices 225 7.7 Terminology of Screw Threads 227 78 ISO Metric Screw Threads 228 7.10 Bolted Joint-Simple Analysis _ 237 ‘cally Loaded Bolted Joints in Shear 233 2 Eccentric Load Perpendicular toAxis of Bolt 235 @ Eerie Lagi oa Ci 7.14 Torque Requirement for Bolt Tightening 248 7.16 Design of Tumbuckle 25) 7.17 Elastic Analysis of Bolted Joints 254 7.18 Bolted Joint under Fluctuating Load 257 ‘Short-Answer Questions 269 Problems for Practice 269 — 8.3 Stress Relieving of Welded Joints 274 84 Butt Joints 274 8.5 Fillet Joints 275 8.6 Strength of Butt Welds 276 | 8.7 Strength of Parallel Fillet Welds 277 | 8.7 Strength of Perallel Fillet Welds_277 8.8 Strength of Transverse Fillet Welds 278 8.9 Maximum Shear St in i Ve Be Metin Steer sheer io Pallet Hiller Wd —2et nko 2 eats 8.1 Axially Loaded Unsymmetrical Welded Joints 284 §.12 Eccentric Load in the Plane of Welds 285 8.13 Welded Joint Subjected to Bending Moment 290 8.14 Welded Joint Subjected to Torsional Moment 294 &.15 Strength of Welded Joints 295 8.16 Welded Joints Subjected to Fluctuating Forces 296 8.17 Welding Symbols _297 R18 Weld Inspection 298 8.20 Types of Rivet Heads 30/ 8.21 Types of Riveted Joints 303 822 Rivet Materials 305 8.23 Types of Failure 306 8.24 Strength Equations 306 8.25 Efficiency of Joint 307 8.26 Caulking and Fullering 307 8.27 Longitudinal Butt Joint for Boiler Shell 317 8.28 Circumferential Lap Joint for Boiler Shells 318 8.29 Eccentrically Loaded Riveted Joint 32/ Short-Answer Questions 325 Problems for Practice 325 9._ Shafts, Keys and Couplings 9.1 Transmission Shafts 220 9.2 Shaft Design on Strength Basis 331 9,3. Shaft Design on Torsional Rigidity Basis 333 94 ASME Code for Shaft Design 334 9.5 Design of Hollow Shaft on Strength Basis 342 9.6 Design of Hollow Shaft on Torsional Rigidity Basis 344 9.7 Flexible Shafis 346 9.8 Keys 346 9.9 SaddleKeys 347 9.10 Sunk Keys 348 9.11 Feather Key 349 9.12 WoodruffKey 350 9.13 Design of Square and Flat Keys 350 9.14 Design of Kennedy Key 352 9.15 Splines 354 9.16 Couplings 356 9.17 Muff Coupling 357 9.18 Design Procedure for Muff Coupling 357 9.19 Clamp Coupling 359 9.20 Design Procedure for Clamp Coupling 360 9.21 Rigid Flange Couplings 362 9.22 Design Procedure for Rigid Flange Coupling 364 9.23 Bushed-pin Flexible Coupling 368 9.24 Design Procedure for Flexible Coupling 371 9.25 Design for Lateral Rigidity 376 9.26 Castigliano’s Theorem 380 jhori-Answer Questions 388 Problems for Practice 389 10. Springs 393 10.1 Springs _393 10.2. Types of Springs 393 10.3 Terminology of Helical Springs 395 104 Styles of End 396 10.5 Stress and Deflection Equations 397 10.7 Spring Materials 401 10.8 Design of Helical Springs 403 10.9 Spring Design—Trial-and-Error Method _ 405 10.10 Design against Flucwwating Load 405 10.11 Concentric Springs 425 10.12 Optimum Design of Helical Spring 430 10.13 Surge in Spring 432 10.14 Helical Torsion Springs 433 10.15 Spiral Springs 435 10.16 Multi-Leaf Spring 437 10.17 Nipping of LeafSprings 439 10.18 Belleville Spring 44/7 10.19 Shot Peening 443 ‘Shori-Answer Questions 443 Problems for Practice 444 LI. Friction Clutches 448 ULL Clutches 448 11.2, Torque Transmining Capacity 450 3. Multisdisk Clutches 456 Friction Materials 459 Eeiaee 11.6 Centrifugal Clutches 465 11.7 Energy Equation 467 11.8 Thermal Considerations 469 Short-Answer Questions 470 Problems for Practice 471 12. Brakes | 47 12.1 Brakes 472 12.2 Bnergy Equations _472 12.3 Block Brake with Short Shoe 475 12.4 Block Brake with LongShoe 480 Contents xi 12.5 Pivoted Block Brake with Long Shoe 482 z 12.6 Internal Expanding Brake 485 12.7 Band Brakes 490 12.8 Disk Brakes 493 12.9 Thermal Considerations 496 Short-Answer Questions 496 Problems for Practice 497 13._Belt Drives 499 3.1 Belt Drives 499 13.2 Belt Constructions 501 13.3 Geometrical Relationships 503 13.4 Analysis of Belt Tensions 504 13.5 Condition for Maximum Power 507 13.6 Condition for Maximum Power (Alternative Approach) 507 : : 13.8 Selection of Flat-belts from Manufacturer's Catalogue 5/4 13.9 Pulleys for Flat Belts 517 13.10 Arms of Castiron Pulley 520 13.11_V-belts 522 13.12 Selection of V-belts 534 13.13 V-grooved Pulley 535 13.14 Belt-Tensioning Methods 540 13.15 Ribbed V-belts 540 ‘Short-Answer Questions 542 Problems for Practice 542 14, Chain Drives. 4 14.1 Chain Drives 544 14.2 RollerChains 546 14.3 Geometric Relationships 542 14.4 Polygonal Effect 549 14.5 Power Rating of Roller Chains 549 14.6 Sprocket Wheels 55/ 14.7 Design of Chain Drive 553 14.8 Chain Lubrication $555 149 Silent Chain 562 Short-Answer Questions 562 Problems for Practice 563 15. Rolling Contact Bearings 564 15.1 Bearings 564 15.2 Types of Rolling-contact Bearings 565 15.3 Principle of Self-aligning Bearing 568 15.4 Selection of Bearing-type 569 15.5 Static Load Carrying Capacity 569 15.6 Stribeck’s Equation 569 15.7 Dynamic Load Carrying Capacity _57/ 15.8 Equivalent Bearing Load _57/ 15.9 Load-Life Relationship 572 15.10 Selection of Bearing Life 572 15.11 Load Factor 573 15.12. Selection of Bearing from Manufacturer's Catalogue $73 15.13. Selection of Taper Roller Bearings 580 15.14 Design for Cyclic Loads and Speeds 588 15.15 Bearing with Probability of Survival other than 90 Per Cent 592 15.16 Needle Bearings 595 15.17 Bearing Failure—Causes and Remedies 595 15.18 Lubrication of Rolling Contact Bearings 596 15.19 Mounting of Bearing 597 Short-Answer Questions 598 Problems for Practice 599 16. Sliding Contact Bearings 601 6. Basic Modes nt Lubeication 60: 16.2 Viscosity 604 16.3 Measurement of Viscosity 605 16.4 Viscosity Index 605 16.5 Petroff’s Equation 606 16.6 McKee’s Investigation 607 16.7 Viscous Flow through Rectangular Slot 608 16.8 Hydrostatic Step Bearing 609 16.9 Energy Losses in Hydrostatic Bearing 617 16.10 Reynold’s Equation 6/9 16.11 Raimondi and Boyd Method 622 16.12 Temperature Rise 624 16.13 Bearing Design—Selection of Parameters 625 16.14 Bearing Constructions 634 16.15 Bearing Materials 635 16.16 Sintered Metal Bearings 637 16.17 Lubricating Oils 637 6.18 Additives for Mineral Oils 429 16.19 Selection of Lubricants 640 16.20 Greases 641 16.21 Bearing Failure—Causes and Remedies _647 16.22 Comparison of Rolling and Sliding Contact Bearings 642 Short-Answer Questions 643 Problems for Practice 644 17. Spur Gears 646 1 hanical Drives 446 12.2_Gear Drives 47 Contents xiii 123 Classification of Gears 647 17.4 Selection of Type of Gears 648 17.5 LawofGearing 649 17.6 Terminology of Spur Gears 650 17.7 Standard Systems of Gear Tooth 653 128 Gear Trains 656 17.9 Interference and Undercutting 657 12.10 Backlash 658 17.11 Force Analysis 658 17.12 Gear Tooth Failures 665 17.13 Selection of Material 666 17.14 Gear Blank Design 667 12.15 Number of Teeth 70 12.16 Eace Width 671 17.17 Beam Strength of Gear Tooth _672 17.18 Permissible Bending Stress _ 673 17,19 Effective Load on Gear Tooth 674 17.20 Estimation of Module Based on Beam Strength 677 17.21 Wear Strength of Gear Tooth 678 17.22. Estimation of Module Based on Wear Strength 680 17.23 Intemal Gears 688 17.24 Gear Lubrication 690 Short-Answer Questions 690 Problems for Practice 690 18, Helical Gears 18.1 Helical Gears 694 18.2 ‘Terminology of Helical Gears 694 ae 18.4 ‘Tooth Proportions 696 185 Force Analysis 697 18.6 Beam Strength of Helical Gears 702 18.7 Effective Load on Gear Tooth 702 18.8 Wear Strength of Helical Gears 703 18.9 Herringbone Gears 706 18.10 Crossed Helical Gears 708 Short-Answer Questions 709 Problems for Practice 710 19. Bevel Gears 19.1 Bevel Gears 7// 19.2 Terminology of Bevel Gears 7/3 193 Force Analysis 715 19.4 Beam Strength of Bevel Gears 720 19.5 Wear Strength of Bevel Gears 722 19.6 Effective Load on Gear Tooth 722 694 m1 xiv Contents 197 Spiral Bevel Gears 727 Short-Answer Questions 728 Problems for Practice 728 20._Warm Gears 730, 20.1 Worm Gears 720 20.2 Terminology of Worm Gears 731 20.3 Proportions of Worm Gears 733 204 Force Analysis 735 20.5 Friction in Worm Gears 737 20.6 Selection of Materials 741 20.7. Strength Rating of Worm Gears 742 20.8 Wear Rating of Worm Gears 744 20.9 Thermal Considerations 745 Short-Answer Questions 747 Problems for Practice 747 21, Flywheel 149 21.1 Flywheel 749 21.2 Flywheel and Governor 750 21.3 Flywheel Materials 750 214 Torque Analysis 757 21.5 Coefficient of Fluctuation of Energy 752 216 Solid Disk Flywheel 753 21.7 Rimmed Flywheel 755 21.8 Stresses in Rimmed Flywheel 756 Short-Answer Questions 767 Problems for Practice 767 22, Cylinders and Pressure Vessels 168 22.1 Thin Cylinders 768 22.2 Thin Spherical Vessels 759 22.3_ Thick Cylinders—Principal Stresses 770 22.4 Lame'’s Equation 77/ 22.5. Clavarino’s and Bimie’s Equations 772 22.6 Cylinders with External Pressure 774 227 Autofrettage 775 228 Compound Cylinder 775 22.9 Gaskets 779 22.10 Gasketed Joint 780 22.11 Unfired Pressure Vessels 783 22.12 Thickness of Cylindrical and Spherical Shells 785 22.13 EndClosures 785 22.14 Openings in Pressure Vessel 791 Short-Answer Questions 794 Problems for Practice 794 Contents _xv 23, Miscellaneous Machine Elements 91 23.1 Oil Seals 796 23.2 Wire Ropes 797 23.3 Stresses in Wire Ropes 800 23.4 Rope Sheaves and Drums 804 23.5 Buckling of Columns 806 Short-Answer Questions 812 Problems for Practice 812 24, Statistical Considerations in Design 24.1 Frequency Distribution 4/4 24.2 Characteristics of Frequency Curves 8/6 24.3, Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion 877 24.4 Probability 8/9 24.5 Probability Distribution 8/9 24.6 Normal Curve 821 24.7 Population Combinations 823 24.8 Design and Natural Tolerances 825 24.9 Reliability 829 24.10 Probabilistic Approach to Design 830 Short-Answer Questions 840 Problems for Practice 841 25. Design of IC Engine Components 25.1 Internal Combustion Engine 843 25.2 Cylinder and Cylinder Liner 844 25.3 Bore and Length of Cylinder 845 25.4 Thickness of Cylinder Wall 845 25.5. Stresses in Cylinder Wall_ 846 25.6 CylinderHead 847 25.7 Design of Studs for Cylinder Head 847 25.8 Piston 853 25.0 Piston Materials 254 28.10 Thickness of Piston Head 854 25.11 Piston Ribs and Cup 855 25.12 Piston Rings 856 25.13 Piston Barre] 857 25.14 Piston Skirt 858 28.15 Piston Pin 858 25.16 Connecting Red 867 25.17 Buckling of ConnectingRod 868 25.18 Cross-section for Connecting Rod 869 25.19 Big and Small End Bearings 87] 814 843 xvi_Contents 25.20 Big End Cap and Bolts 873 2521 Whipping Stress 875 25.22 Crankshaft 880 25.23 Design of Centre Crankshaft 88/ 25.24 Centre Crankshaft at Top-Dead Centre Position _88/ 25.25 Centre Crankshaft at Angle of Maximum Torque 883 25.26 Side Crankshaft at Top-Dead Centre Position 892 25.27 Side Crankshaft at Angle of Maximum Torque 895 25.28 Valve-Gear Mechanism 903 25.29 Design of Valves 904 25.30 DesignofRockerArm 906 2531 Design of Valve Spring 9/0 2532 Design of Push Rod 9/1 Short-Answer Questions 922 Problems for Practice 923 References 927 Index 939 Preface It was really a pleasure to receive an overwhelming response to the textbook Design of Machine Elements since it was published first in 1994, In fact, whenever I visit an engineering college in any part of the country, students and staff members of the Mechanical Engineering Department know me as the ‘Machine Design author’ and the book has become my identity. Machine design occupies a prominent position in the curriculum of Mechanical Engineering. It consists of applications of scientific principles, technical information and innovative ideas for the development of a new or improved machine. The task of a machine designer has never been easy, since he has to consider a number of factors, which are not always compatible with the present-day technology. In the context of today’s techni- cal and social climate, the designer’s task has become increasingly difficult. Today's designer is required to account for many factors and considerations that are almost impossible for one individual to be thoroughly conversant with. At the same time, he cannot afford to play a role of something like that of a music director. He must have a special competence of his own and a reasonable knowledge of other ‘instruments.’ New to this Edition After the publication of the second edition in 2007, it was observed that there was a need to incorporate a broader coverage of topics in the textbook to suit the content of ‘Machine Design’ syllabi of various uni- versities in our country. One complete chapter on ‘Design of Engine Components? (Chapter 25) and half a chapter on ‘Design of Riveted Joints’ (Chapter 8) are added to fulfill this requirement. Design of Engine Components includes cylinders, pistons, connecting rods, crankshafis and valve-gear mechanism. Design of Riveted Joints includes strength equations, eccentrically loaded joints and riveted joints in boiler shells. Another important feature of the current edition is changing the style of solutions to numerical examples. ‘A ‘step-by-step’ approach is incorporated in all solved examples of the book. This will further simplify and clarify the understanding of the examples. Target Audience This book is intended to serve as a textbook for all the courses in Machine Design. It covers the syllabi of all universities, technical boards and professional examining bodies such as Institute of Engineers in the country. It isalso useful for the preparation of competitive examinations like UPSC and GATE. This textbook is particularly written for the students of the Indian subcontinent, who find it difficult to adopt the textbooks written by foreign authors. Salient Features The main features of the book are the following: (i) SI system of units used throughout the book (ii) Indian standards used throughout the book for materials, tolerances, screw threads, springs, gears, wire ropes and pressure vessels xvili_ Preface (iii) The basic procedure for selection of a machine component from the manufacturer's catalogue discussed with a particular reference to Indian products (iv) Step by step approach of problem solving Organization The book is divided into 25 chapters. Chapter 1 is an introductory chapter on machine design and discusses the various procedures, requirements, design methods and ergonomic considerations for design. Chapter 2 is on engineering materials and describes the different kinds of irons, steels and alloys used in engineering design. Chapter 3 cxplains in dotail the manufacturing considerations in design. Chapters 4 and 5 discuss the various procedures for design against static load and fluctuating load correspondingly. Chapter 6 describes power screws in detail while chapters 7 and 8 specify the features and varieties of threaded joints, and welded and riveted joints in that order. Similarly, chapters 9 to 22 are each devoted to 4 particular design element, that is, shafts, keys and couplings; springs; friction clutches; brakes; belt drives; chain drives; rolling contact bearings; sliding contact bearings; spur gears; helical gears; bevel gears; worm gears; flywheel; cylinders and pressure vessels respectively. Chapter 23 describes miscellaneous machine elements like oil seals, wire ropes. rope sheaves and drums. Chapter 24 deiails the various statistical considerations in design. Finally, Chapter 25 explains the design of IC engine components. Web Resources The readers should note that there is a website of this textbook which can be accessed at http://www.mbhe.com/bhandari/dme3e that contains the following. For Instructors: () Solution Manual Gi) Power Point Lecture Slides For Students: (i) Interactive 643 Objective Type Questions Gi) 803 Short Answer Questions (iii) Glossary Gy) Bibliography The above additional information will be useful for students in preparing for competitive examinations. Acknowledgements For this textbook, information has been collected from various sources such as textbooks, handbooks, cata- Jogues and journals. I would like to express my gratitude to the authors, publishers and firms who have per- mitted me to use their valuable material in this textbook. The following firms and individuals need special ‘mention: 1. A A Raimondi of Westinghouse Electric Corporation, USA for the data on ‘Dimensionless Performance Parameters of Hydrodynamic Bearings” 2. George Sines, University of California, USA for the ‘Notch Sensitivity Charts’ in Fatigue Design 3. BK Sollars, President, Diamond Chain Company, USA, forhis valuable suggestions and design data related to the selection of roller chains 4, McGraw-Hill Education, USA, for their permission to include the table of ‘Reliability Factors’ from their publication Mechanical Engineering Design by J E Shigley and ‘Surface Finish Factors’ in Fatigue Design from Engineering Considerations of Stress, Strain and Strength by RC Juvinall 5, Associated Bearing Company Limited, Mumbai, for their permission to include different tables for the selection of SKF bearings Preface _xix 6. The Dunlop Rubber Co. (India) Ltd., Kolkata, for their permission to include data for the “Selection of Dunlop belts’ 7. The Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi, for its permission to include extracts from standards- IS-4218, IS-7008, IS-919, IS-1570, 1S-2644, IS- 733, IS-2403, IS-3681, IS-2266, IS-3973, IS-5129, 18-4454, IS-4694, IS-210, IS-1030, IS-617, IS-813, IS-25, IS-2825, IS-2365, IS-2494 and IS-7443 I acknowledge with a deep sense of gratitude, the encouragement and inspiration received from my stu- dents, readers and teachers. | would also like to thank the following reviewers of this edition whose names are given below. A Bhattacharya AD Bhatt Pratesh Jayaswal Shivabrata Mojumdar Shashidhar K Kudari PM Bapat AD Diwate R Sesharajan Vela Murali KS Seetharama K Mallikarjuna Rao ACS Kumar Institute of Technology, Banaras Hindu University Banaras, Uttar Pradesh Motilal Nehru National Institute of Technology, Allahabad Allahabad, Uttar Pradesh Madhav Institute of Technology and Science Gwalior, Madhya Pradesh Dr B C Roy Engineering College Durgapur, West Bengal D Y Patil College of Engineering and Technology Kolhapur, Maharashtra Manohar Lal Patel Institute of Engineering and Technology Nagpur, Maharashtra Sinhagad Institute of Technology Pune, Maharashtra Bharat Heary Electricals Limited College of Engineering, Guindy Guindy, Tamil Nadu Adichunchanagiri Institute of technology Chikmagalur, Karnataka Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University College of Engineering Kakinada, Andhra Pradesh Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University College of Engineering Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh ‘A special thanks to the Editorial and Production teams of Tata McGraw-Hill headed by Vibha Mahajan and her cathusiastic team members—Shalini Jha, Suman Sen, Devshree Lohchab, Sohini Mukherjee and PL Pandita. wx Preface Feedback ‘Suggestions and comments for improvement of the book will be appreciated. They can be sent either to the publisher or to me at bhandariprof@gmail.com . V BBHANDARI Publisher’s Note Do you have a feature request? A suggestion? We are always open to new ideas (the best ideas come from you'). You may send your comments io imh.mechfeedback(@ gmail.com (kindly mention the title and author name in the subject line). Piracy-related issues may also be reported. Visual Walkthrough Introduction Each chapter begins with an Introduction of the Machine Element designed in the chapter and its functions. This helps the reader in gaining an overview of the machine element. vanes) eereu roo) tesstmmeimatyerey cae own Be rete Os Friction Clnichess ‘Theoretical Considerations Basic equations for design are derived from first principle, with a step-by- ‘step approach. sexi Visual Walkthrough Properties of Materials Exhaustive tables are provided from Indian Standards for Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials, tommy eee82 sre Be tueeeya | eaeusune “ren i et pt ‘ipa eter Fe 3 sh 1 eof pone at pametrenreanntensee) ‘pate py pene Bad Serine wero bree Indian Standards srotstee ton) Indian Standards are used for Machine Elements like screw threats, belts springs, gears, wire ropes and pressure vessels. a | een SE eons ) od On) oda nies eon pe " pecerchertiend Viewal Walkthrough sedi Selection Procedure When a machine component is to be selected from manufacturer's catalogue, the selection processes are discussed with a particular reference to Indian products. Ste Leo eicttereers ea ee SEER pane “ae wn nee © >\ 7 ae ww wae” TNS Sone... a s+ er sirtenbean aoe REE eee are rt eee eee a arson on se Tchr pnt oie Free-Body Diagram of Forces Whenever required, _free-body diagrams are constructed to help the | reader understand the forces acting on individual components. F8 tmamter mece e scan Fatigue Diagrams Fatigue diagrams are constructed for design of machine components subjected to fluctuating loads. ham oe TeR see Step) Dame tr oti easy soso} ~ Ne ERI ce = Taw eit acer win f= 038 SSE anon, voy Visual Walkthrough ren yn te 488 Ont i Statistical Considerations, ¢ in Design” caper DA Siete imcesiatacae Numerics] Examples ‘Numerical Examples solved by step by step approach are provided in sufficient number in cach chapter to help the reader understand the design procedures. Isometric Views When it is difficult to understand the forces in three dimensions, isometric views are given for clear understanding. Statistical Considerations in Design A. separate chapier_ on Statistical Considerations in Design is included and examples are solved on the basis of reliability. oe Sopra eae “ross eswiay~aanie! faeces EECeieans me ae Fmt se, Siamreemvenes oo Soreness i. te RRO rep i me ae Ricinemgeaeeme oom Denice Front 08 NC Se aN SSoec ariee Problems for Practice At the end of each chapter, a set of examples with answers is given as > exercise to students. It is also helpful to teachers in setting classwork and homework assignments. ‘etree nae ne ot pet Samer (Ate Poppet neice, "Cealnttel eso in momen, Sch Sok oid © ml sot eke hedoreg amy TE xa m2 Spates opener eepentnet a fhe Bip octane ines Visual Walkthrough xv Short-Answer Questions At the end of each chapter, Short. Answer Questions are provided for the students for preparation of oral and theory examinations. Eeasset References The list of textbooks, journals and company catalogues is provided at the end of respective pages for quick reference. Chapter If the point of contact between the product and people becomes a point of friction, then the industrial designer has failed. On the other hand, if people are made safer, more efficient, more comfortable—or just plain happier—by contact with the product, then the designer has succeeded. 1.1 MACHINE DESIGN Machine design is defined as the use of scientific principles, technical information and imagination in the description of a machine or a mechanical system to perform specific functions with maximum economy and efficiency. This definition of machine design contains the following important features: (@ A designer uses principles of basic and engineering sciences such as physics, mathematics, statics and dynamics, thermodynamics and heat transfer, vibrations and fluid mechanics. Some of the examples of these principles are (a) Newton's laws of motion, () D’ Alembert’s principle, (©) Boyle’s and Charles" laws of gases, (@ Carnot cycle, and (©) Bernoulli’s principle. (ii) The designer has technical information of the basic elements of a machine. These elements include fastening devices, chain, ii) (iv) w) Henry Dreyfuss" belt and gear drives, bearings, oil seals and gaskets, springs, shafts, keys, couplings, and so on. A machine is a combination of these basic elements. The designer knows the relative advantages and disadvantages of these basic elements and their suitability in different applications. The designer uses his skill and imagination to produce a configuration, which is a combination of these basic elements. However, this combination is unique and different in different situations. The intellectual part of constructing a proper configuration is creative in nature. The final outcome of the design process consists of the description of the machine. The description is in the form of drawings of assembly and individual components. A design is created to satisfy a recognised need of customer. The need may be to perform a specific function with maximum economy and efficiency. ¥ Henry Dreyfuss—The Profile of Industrial Designer—Machine Design, July 22, 1967. 2_Design of Machine Elements Machine design is the creation of plans for a machine to perform the desired functions. The machine may be entirely new in concept, performing a new type of work, or it may more economically perform the work that can be done by an existing machine. It may be an improvement or enlargement of an existing machine for better economy and capability. 1.2. BASIC PROCEDURE OF MACHINE DESIGN The basic procedure of machine design consists of a step-by-step approach from given specifications about the functional requirements of a product to the complete description in the form of drawings of the final product. A logical sequence of steps, usually common to all design projects, is illustrated in Fig. 1.1. These steps are interrelated and interdependent, each refiecting and affecting all Define Specifications of Product ‘Study Alternative Mechanisms for Product and Select Proper Mechanism Prepare General Layout of Configuration ‘and Select Joining Methods between Individual Components of Product, Design individual Components Prepare Assembly and Detail Drawings and Modify Drawings after Testing Prototype Model Fig. 11 The Design Process other steps. The following steps are involved in the process of machine design. Step 1; Product Specifications ‘The first step consists of preparing a complete list of the requirements of the product. The requirements include the output capacity of the machine, and its service life, cost and reliability. In some cases, the overall dimensions and weight of the product are specified. For example, while designing a scooter, the list of specifications will be as follows: (i) Fuel consumption = 40 kmv/l (ii) Maximum speed = 85 km/hr Carrying capacity = two persons with 10 kg luggage (iv) Overall dimensions Width Length Height = 1000 mm (v) Weight = 95 kg (vi) Cost = Rs 40000 to Rs 45000 In consumer products, external appearance, noiseless performance and simplicity in operation of controls are important requirements. Depending upon the type of product, various requirements are given weightages and a priority list of specifications is prepared. Step 2: Selection of Mechanism After careful study of the requirements, the designer prepares rough «sketches of different possible mechanisms for the product. For example, while designing blanking or piercing press, the following mechanisms are possible: (i) a mechanism involving the crank and connecting rod, converting the rotary motion of the electric motor into the reciprocating motion of the punch; (ii) a mechanism involving nut and screw, which is a simple and cheap configuration but having poor efficiency; and (iii) a mechanism consisting of a hydraulic cylinder, piston and valves which is a costly configuration but highly efficient. The alternative mechanisms are compared with each other and also with the mechanism of the products that are available in the market. An approximate estimation of the cost of each alternative configuration is made and compared with the cost of existing products, This will reveal the competitiveness of the product. While selecting the final configuration, the designer should Introduction 3 consider whether the raw materials and standard parts required for making the product are available in the market. He should also consider whether the manufacturing processes required to fabricate the non-standard components are available in the factory. Depending upon the cost-competitiveness, availability of raw materials and manufacturing facility, the best possible mechanism is selected for the product. Step 3: Layout of Configuration The next step in a design procedure is to prepare a block diagram showing the general layout of the selected configuration. For example, the layout of an Electrically-operated Overhead Travelling (EOT) crane will consist of the following components: (i) electric motor for power supply; (ii) flexible coupling to connect the motor shaft to the clutch shaft, (ii) clutch to connect or disconnect the electric motor at the will of the operator; (iv) gear box to reduce the speed from 1440 rpm. to about 15 rpm; (v) rope drum to convert the rotary motion of the shaft to the linear motion of the wire rope; (vi) wire rope and pulley with the crane hook to attach the load; and (vii) brake to stop the motion. In this step, the designer specifies the joining methods, such as riveting, bolting or welding to connect the individual components. Rough sketches of shapes of the individual parts are prepared. Step 4: Design of Individual Components The design of individual components or machine elements is an important step in a design process. It consists of the following stages: (i) Determine the forces component. (ii) Select proper material for the component depending upon the functional requirements such as strength, rigidity, hardness and wear resistance. (iii) Determine the likely mode of failure for the component and depending upon it, sclect the criterion of failure, such as yield strength, acting on the ultimate tensile strength, endurance limit or permissible deflection. (iv) Determine the geometric dimensions of the component using 2 suitable factor of safety and modify the dimensions from assembly and manufécturing considerations. This stage involves detailed stress and deflection analysis, The subjects ‘Machine Design’ or ‘Elements of Machine Design’ cover mainly the design of machine elements or individual components of the machine, Section 1.4 on Design of Machine Elements, elaborates the details of this important step in design procedure. Step 5: Preparation of Drawings The last stage in a design process is to prepare drawings of the assembly and the individual components. On these drawings, the material of the component, its dimensions, tolerances, surface finish grades and machining symbols are specified. The designer prepares two separate lists of components—standard components to be purchased directly from the market and special components to be machined in the factory. In many cases, a prototype model is prepared for the product and thoroughly tested before finalising the assembly drawings. It is seen that the process of machine design involves systematic epproach from known specifications to unknown solutions. Quite often, problems arise on the shop floor during the production stage and design may require modifications. In such circumstances, the designer has to consult the manufacturing engineer and find out the suitable modification. 1.3 BASIC REQUIREMENTS OF MACHINE ELEMENTS A machine consists of machine elements. Each part ofa machine, which has motion with respect to some other part, is called a machine element. It is important to note that each machine element may consist of several parts, which are manufactured separately. For example, a rolling contact bearing is a machine element and it consists of an inner race, outer race, 4 _Design of Machine Elements cage and rolling elements like balls. Machine elements can be classified into two groups—general-purpose and special-purpose machine elements. General- purpose machine elements include shafts, couplings, cclutches, bearings, springs, gears and machine frames Special-purpose machine elements include pistons, valves or spindles, Special-purpose machine elements are used only in certain types of applications. On the contrary, general-purpose machine elements are used in a large number of machines. The broad objective of designing a machine element is to ensure that it preserves its operating capacity during the stipulated service life with minimum manufacturing and operating costs. In order to achieve this objective, the machine element should satisfy the following basic requirements: (i) Strength: A machine part should not fail under the effect of the forces that act on it. It should have sufficient strength to avoid failure either due to fracture or due to general yielding. (ii) Rigidity: A machine component should be rigid, that is, it should not deflect or bend too much due to forces or moments that act on it. A transmission shaft in many times designed on the basis of lateral and torsional rigidities. In these cases, maximum permissible deflection and permissible angle of ‘twist are the criteria for design. (iii) Wear Resistance: Wear is the main reason for putting the machine part out of order. It reduces useful life of the component. Wear also leads to the loss of accuracy of machine tools. There are different types of wear such as abrasive wear, corrosive weer and pitting. Surface hardening can increase the wear resistance of the machine components, such’as gears and cams. (0) Minimum Dimensions and Weight: A machine part should be sufficiently strong, rigid and wear- resistant and at the same time, with minimum possible dimensions and weight. This will result in minimum material cost, (0) Manufacturability: Manufacturability is the ease of fabrication and assembly. The shape and material of the machine part should be selected in ‘such a way that it can be produced with minimum labour cost. (vi) Safety: The shape and dimensions of the machine parts should ensure safety to the operator of the machine. The designer should assume the worst possible conditions and apply ‘fail-safe’ or redundancy’ principles in such cases. (vii) Conformance to Standards: A machine part should confonn to the national or international standard covering its profile, dimensions, grade and material. (viii) Reliability: Reliability is the probability that a machine part will perform its intended functions under desired operating conditions over a specific't period of time. A machine part should be reliable, that is, it should perform its function satisfactorily over its lifetime. (ix) Maintainability: A machine part should be maintainable. Maintainability is the ease with which a machine part can be serviced or repaired. (2) Minimum: Life-cycle Cost: Life-cycle cost of the machine part is the total cost to be paid by the purchaser for purchasing the part and operating and maintaining it over its life span. It will be observed that the above mentioned requirements serve as the basis for design projects in many cases. 1.4 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS Design of machine elements is the most important step in the complete procedure of machine design. In order to ensure the basic requirements of machine elements, calculations are carried out to find out the ‘dimensions of the machine elements, These calculations form an integral part of the design of machine elements. The basic procedure of the design of machine elements is illustrated in Fig. 1.2. It consists of the following steps: Introduction 5 a Modify Dimensions for Assembly and Manufacture and Check Design at Critical Cross-sections Prepare Working Drawing of Element Fig. 1.2 Basic Procedure of Design of Machine Element Step 1: Specification of Function ‘The design of machine elements begins with the specification of the functions of the element. The functions of some machine elements are as follows: (i) Bearing To support the rotating shaft and confine its motion (ii) Key To transmit the torque between the shaft and the adjoining machine part like ‘gear, pulley or sprocket (iii) Spring in Clock To store and release the energy (iv) Spring in Spring Balance To measure the force (v) Serew Fastening To hold two or more machine parts together (vi) Power Screw To produce uniform and slow motion and to transmit the force Step 2: Determination of Forces In many cases, a free-body diagram of forces is constructed to determine the forces acting on different parts of the machine. The external and internal forces that act on a machine element are as follows: (i) The external force due to energy, power or torque transmitted by the machine part, often, called ‘useful’ load (ii) Static force due to deadweight of the machine part (iii) Force due to frictional resistance (iv) Inertia force due to change in linear or angular velocity (v) Centrifugal force due to change in direction of velocity (vi) Force due to thermal gradient or variation in temperature (vii) Force set up during manufacturing the part resulting in residual stresses (viii) Force due to particular shape of the part such as stress concentration due to abrupt change in cross-section For every machine element, all forces in this list may not be applicable. They vary depending on the application. There is one more important consideration. The force acting on the machine part is either assumed to be concentrated at some point in the machine part or distributed over a particular area. Experience is essential to make such assumptions in the analysis of forces. Step 3: Selection of Material Four basic factors, which are considered in selecting the material, are availability, cost, mechanical properties and manufacturing considerations. For example, flywheel, housing of gearbox or engine block have complex shapes. These components are made of cast iron because the casting process produces complicated shapes without involving machining operations, Transmission shafts are made of plain carbon steels, because they are available in the form of rods, besides their higher strength. The automobile body and hood are made of low carbon steels because their cold formability is essential to press the parts. Free cutting steels have excellent machinability due to addition of sulphur. ‘They are ideally suitable for bolts and studs because of the ease with which the thread profiles can be machined. The crankshaft and connecting rod are subjected to fluctuating forces and nickel-chromium steel is used for these components due to its higher fatigue strength. 6 Design of Machine Elements Step 4: Failure Criterion Before finding out the dimensions of the component, it is necessary to know the type of failure that the component may fail when put into service. The machine component is said to have ‘failed’ when it is unable to perform its functions satisfactorily. The three basic types of failure are as follows: (i) failure by elastic deflection; ii) failure by general yielding; and (iii) failure by fracture. Tn applications like transmission shaft, which is used to support gears, the maximum force acting on the shaft is limited by the permissible deflection, When this deflection exceeds a particular valuc (usually, 0.001 to 0.003 times of span length between two bearings), the meshing between teeth of gears is affected and the shaft cannot perform its function properly. In this case, the shaft is said to have ‘failed’ due to elastic deflection. Components made of ductile materials like steel lose their engineering usefulness due to large amount of plestic deformation. This type of failure is called failure by yielding. Components made of brittle materials like cast iron fail because of sudden fracture without any plastic deformation. There are two basic modes of gear-tooth failure— breakage of tooth due to static and dynamic load and surface pitting. The surface of the gear tooth is covered with small ‘pits’ resulting in rapid wear. Pitting is a surface fatigue failure. The components of ball bearings such as rolling elements, inner and outer races fail due to fatigue cracks after certain number of revolutions. Sliding contact bearings fail due to corrosion and abrasive wear by foreign particles. Step 5: Determination of Dimensions The shape of the machine element depends on two factors, viz., the operating conditions and the shape of the adjoining machine element. For example, involute profile is used for gear tecth because it satisfies the fundamental law of gearing. A V-belt hhas a trapezoidal cross-section because it resulis in wedge action and increases the force of friction between the surfaces of the belt and the pulley. On the other hand, the pulley of a V-belt should have a shape which will match with the adjoining belt, The profile of the teeth of sprocket wheel should match the roller, bushing, inner and outer link plates of the roller chain. Depending on the operating conditions and shape of the adjoining element, the shape of the machine element is decided and a rough sketch is prepared. The geometric dimensions of the component are determined on the basis of failure criterion. In simple cases, the dimensions are determined on the basis of allowable stress or deflection. For example, a tension ro¢, illustrated in Fig, 1.3, is subjected to a force of 5 KN. The rod is made of plain carbon Fig 13° Tension Rod steel and the permissible tensile stress is 80 N/mm’. The diameter of the rod is determined on the basis of allowable stress using the following expression: Introduction 7 ; stress = {02g gg = X10) area a? 4 Therefore, d=8.92 or 10mm As a second example, consider a transmission shaft, shown in Fig. 1.4, which is used to support a gear, The shaft is made of steel and the modulus Dd Fig. 14 Transmission Shaft of elasticity is 207 000 N/mm?. For proper meshing between gear teeth, the permissible deflection at the gear is limited to 0.05 mm. The deflection of the shaft at the centre is given by, 2 sone PP 6 9.95 = 9X10°1.200) 48ET ad 48(207000)| =~ 64 Therefore, d= 35.19 or 40mm ‘The following observations are made from the above two examples: (i) Failure mode for the tension rod is general yielding while elastic deflection is the failure Criterion for the transmission shaft. (ii) The permissible tensile stress for tension rod is obtained by dividing the yield strength by the factor of safety. Therefore, yield strength is the criterion of design. In case of a transmission shaft, lateral deflection or rigidity is the criterion of design. Therefore, modulus of elasticity is an important property for finding out the dimensions of the shat. Determination of geometric dimensions is an important step while designing machine elements, Various criteria such as yield strength, ultimate tensile strength, torsional or lateral deflection and permissible bearing pressure are used to find out these dimensions. Step 6: Design Modifications The geometric dimensions of the machine element are modified from assembly and manufacturing considerations. For example, the transmission shaft illustrated in Fig, 1.4 is provided with steps and shoulders for proper mounting of gear and bearings. Revised calculations are carried out for operating capacity, margin of safety at critical cross-sections and resultant stresses taking into consideration the effect of stress concentration. When these values differ from desired values, the dimensions of the component are modified. The process is continued till the desired values of operating capacity, factor of safety and stresses at critical cross-sections are obtained. Step 7: Working Drawing The last step in the design of machine elements is to prepare a working drawing of the machine clement showing dimensions, tolerances, surface finish grades, geometric tolerances and special production requirements like heat treatment. The working drawing must be clear, concise and complete, It must have enough views and cross- sections to show all details. The main view of the machine element should show it in a position, it is required to occupy in service. Every dimension must be given. There should not be scope for guesswork and a necessity for scaling the drawing. All dimensions that are important for proper assembly and interchangeability must be provided with tolerances. 8 Design of Machine Elements 15 TRADITIONAL DESIGN METHODS There are two traditional methods of design— design by craft evolution and design by drawing. Bullock cart, rowing boat, plow and musical instruments are some of the products, which are produced by the craft-evolution process. The salient features of this age-old technique are as follows: (i) The craftsmen do not prepare dimensioned crawings of their products, They cannot offer adequate justification for the designs they make. ii) These products are developed by trial and error over many centuries. Any modification in the product is costly, because the crafisman has to experiment with the product itself, Moreover, only one change at a time can be attempted and complete reorganization of the product is difficult. (iii) The essential information of the product such as materials, dimensions of parts, manufacturing methods and assembly techniques is transmitted from place to place and time to time by two ways. First, the product, which basically remains unchanged, is the main source of information. The exact memory of the sequence of operations required to make the product is second source of information. There is no symbolic medium to record the design information of the product. With all these weaknesses, the craftevolution process has successfully developed some of the complex structures. The craft-evolution method has become obsolete due to two reasons. This method cannot adapt to sudden changes in requirement, Secondly, the product cannot be manufactured on a mass scale. The essential features of design by drawing method are as follows: (i) The dimensions of the product are specified in advance of its manufacture. (i) The complete manufacturing of the product can be subdivided into separate pieces, which can be made by different people. This division ‘of work is not possible with craft-evolution. (iii) When the product is to be developed by trial and error, the process is carried out on a drawing board instead of shop floor. The drawings of the product are modified and developed prior to manufacture. In this method, much of the intellectual activity is ken away from the shop floor and assigned to design engineers 1.6 DESIGN SYNTHESIS Design synthesis is defined as the process of creating or selecting configurations, materials, shapes and dimensions for a product. It is a decision making process with the main objective of optimisation. There is a basic difference between design analysis and design synthesis. In design analysis, the designer assumes a particular mechanism, a particular material and mode of failure for the component. With the help of this information, he determines the dimensions of the product. However, design synthesis does not permit such assumptions. Here, the designer selects the optimum configuration fiom a number of altemative solutions. He decides the material for the component from a number of altemative materials. He determines the optimum shepe and dimensions of the component on the basis of mathematical analysis. In design synthesis, the designer has to fix the objective. The objective can be minimum cost, minimum weight or volume, maximum reliability or maximum life. The second step is mathematical formulation of these objectives and requirements. The final step is mathematical analysis for optimisation and interpretation of the results. In order to illustrate the process of design synthesis, let us consider a problem of designing cylindrical cans. The requirements are as follows: (i) The cylindrical can is completely enclosed and the cost of its material should be minimum. (ii) The cans are to be stored on a shelf and the dimensions of the shelf are such that the radius of the can should not excced Raa: Introduction 9 ‘The following notations are used in the analysis: r = radius of can A = height of can A = surface area of can V = volume of can ‘Therefore, A= 2m 2nrh (@) V= mh (b) Substituting Eq. (b) in Eq. (a), A= m+ © re For minimum cost of material of the can, Let us call this radius as r, giving the condition of minimum material. Therefore, “ee In order to satisfy the second requirement, O Ronax The optimum radius will be, r= Rows, @ Case (b) HS Reus, The optimum radius will be ren i) It is seen from the above example, that design synthesis begins with the statement of requirements, which are then converted into mathematical expressions and finally, equations are solved for optimisation. Optimum design Can radius | i | n Rear (a) 11> Revax. Optimum design Can radius Rex (b) 4 < Rinax. Fig.15 Optimum Solution to Can Radius 1.7 USE OF STANDARDS IN DESIGN Standardization is defined as obligatory norms, to which various characteristics of a product should conjorm. The characteristics include materials, dimensions and shape of the component, method of testing and method of marking, packing and storing of the product. The following standards are used in mechanical engineering design: (@ Standards for Materials, their Chemical Compositions, Mechanical Properties and Heat Treatment For example, Indian standard IS 210 specifies seven grades of grey cast iron designated as FG 150, FG 200, FG 220, FG 260, FG 300, FG 350 and FG 400. The number indicates ultimate tensile strength in N/mm?. IS 1570 (Part 4) specifies chemical composition of various grades of alloy steel. For example, alloy steel designated by 55Cr3 has 0.5-0.6% carbon, 0.10-0.35% silicon, 0.6-0.8% manganese and 0.6-0.8% chromium. 10 _Design of Machine Elentents (ii) Standards for Shapes and Dimensions of Commonly used Machine Elements The machine elements include bolts, screws and nuts, rivets, belts and chains, ball and roller bearings, wire ropes, keys and splines, etc. For example, IS 2494 (Part 1) specifies dimensions and shape of the cross- section of endless V-belts for power transmission. The dimensions of the trapezoidal cross-section of the belt, viz. width, height and included angle are specified in this standard. The dimensions of rotary shaft oil seal units are given in [S 5129 (Part 1). These dimensions include inner and outer diameters and width of oil seal units. (tii) Standards for Fits, Tolerances and Surface Finish of Component For example, selection of the type of fit for different applications is illustrated in IS. 2709 on ‘Guide for selection of fits’. The tolerances or upper and lower limits for various sizes of holes and shafis are specified in IS 919 on ‘Recommendations for limits and fits for engineering’. IS 10719 explains method for indicating surface texture on technical drawings. The method of showing geometrical tolerances is explained in IS 8000 on ‘Geometrical tolerancing on technical drawings". iv) Standards for Testing of Products These standards, sometimes called ‘codes’, give procedures to test the products such as pressure vessel, boiler. crane and wire rope, where safety of the operator is an important consideration. For example, IS 807 is a code of practice for design, manufacture, erection and testing of cranes and hoists. The method of testing of pressure vessels is explained in IS 2825 on *Code for unfired pressure vessels’ (®) Standards for Engineering Drawing of Components For example, there is a special publication SP46 prepared by Bureau of Indian Standards on ‘Engineering Drawing Practice for Schools and Colleges’ which covers all standards related to engineering drawing. There are two words—standard and code— which are often used in standards. 4 standard is defined as a set of specifications for pars, materials or processes. The objective of a standard is to reduce the variety and limit the number of items to a reasonable level. On the other hand, a code is defined as a set of specifications for the analysis, design, manufacture, testing and erection of the product. The purpose of a code is to achieve a specified level of safety. ‘There are three types of standards used in design office, They are as follows: ) Company standards They are used in a particular company of a group of sister concerns. ii) National stondards These are the IS (Bureau of Indian Standards), DIN (German), AISI or SAE (USA) or BS (UK) standards. (iii) International standards These are prepared by the Intemational Standards Organization (ISO). Standardization offers the following advantages: (a) The reduction in types and dimensions of identical components to a rational number makes it possible to manufacture the standard component on mass scale in a centralised process. For example, a specialised factory like Associated Bearing Company (SKF) manufactures bell and roller bearings, which are required by all engineering industries. Manufacture of a standard component on mass production basis reduces the cost. (b) Since the standard component is manufactured by a specialised factory, it relieves the machine-building plant of the laborious work of manufacturing that part. Availability of standard components like bearings, seals, knobs, wheels, roller chains, belts, hydraulic cylinders and valves has considerably reduced the manufacturing facilities required by the individual organisation. (©) Standard ports are easy to replace when worn out due to interchangeability. This facilitates servicing and maintenance of machines. Availability of standard spare parts is always assured, The work of servicing and maintenance can be carried out even at an ordinary service station. ‘These factors reduce the maintenance cost of machines. (4) The application of standard machine elements and especially the standard units Introduction 1 (e.g. couplings, cocks, pumps, pressure reducing valves and electric motors) reduce the time and effort needed to design a new machine. It is no longer necessary to design, manufacture and test these elements and units, and all that the designer has to do is to select them from the manufacturer's catalogues. On the other hand, enormous amount of work would be required to design a machine if all the screws, bolts, nuts, bearings, etc., had to be designed anew each time, Standardization results in substantial saving in the designer’s effort. (€) The standards of specifications and testing procedures of machine elements improve their quality and reliability, Standard components like SKF bearings, Dunlop belts or Diamond chains have a long-standing reputation for their reliability in engineering industries. Use of standard components improves the quality and reliability of the machine to be designed. In design, the aim is to use as many standard components as possible for a given machine. The selection of standard parts in no way restricts the creative initiative of the designer and does not prevent him from finding better and more rational solutions. 1.8 SELECTION OF PREFERRED SIZES In engineering design, many a times, the designer hhas to specify the size of the product. The ‘size’ of the product is a general term, which includes different parameters like power transmitting capacity, load carrying capacity, speed, dimensions of the component such as height, length and width, and volume or weight of the product. ‘These parameters are expressed numerically, e.g., 5 kW, 10 KN or 1000 rpm. Often, the product is manufactured in different sizes or models; for instance, a company may be manufacturing seven different models of electric motors ranging from 0.5 to 50 KW to cater to the need of different customers. Preferred numbers are used to specify the ‘sizes’ of the product in these cases. 2 JS 1076-1985: Preferred Numbers (in three parts). French balloonist and engineer Charles Renard first introduced preferred numbers in the 19th century. The system is based on the use of geometric progression to develop a set of numbers. There are five basic series’, denoted as R5, R10, R20, R40 and R80 series, which increase in steps of 58%, 26%, 12%, 6%, and 3%, respectively. Each series has its own series factor. The series factors are given in Table 1.1. Table 11 Series factors = EM The series is established by taking the first number and multiplying it by a series factor to get the second number. The second number is again multiplied by a series factor to get the third number. This procedure is continued until the complete seriesiis built up. The resultant numbers are rounded and shown in Table 1.2. As an example, consider a manufacturer of lifting tackles who wants to imroduce nine different models of capacities ranging from about 15 to 100 KN. Referring to the R10 series, the capacities of different models of the lifting tackle will be 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100 KN. Table 1.2 Preferred numbers RS RIO R20 R40. 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.06 112 1.12 Lis 125 125 125 1.32 140 1.40 1.50 (Conta) 12_Design of Machine Elements Table 1.2. Contd RIO 20 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.00 | 204 | 22 | | | 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.80 3.15 3.15 3.55 3.75 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.28 450 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.30 5.60 5.60 6.00 630 6.30 630 6.30 6.70 | 710 7.10 7.50 8.00 800 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.00 9.50 10,00 10.00 10,00 10.00 It is observed from Table 1.2 that small sizes differ from each other by small amounts, while large sizes by large amounts. In the initial stages, the product is manufactured in a limited quantity and use is made of the RS series. As the scale of production is increased, a change over is made from RS to R10 series, introducing new sizes of intermediate values of RIO series. Preferred numbers minimise unnecessary variation in sizes. They assist the designer in avoiding selection of sizes in an arbitrary manner. The complete range is covered by minimum number of sizes, which is advantageous to the producer and consumer. There are two terms, namely, ‘basic series’ and “derived series’, which are frequently used in relation to preferred numbers. RS, R10, R20, R40 and R80 are called basic series. Any series that is formed on the basis of these five basic series is called derived series. In other words, derived series are derived from basic series. There are two methods of forming derived series, namely, reducing the numbers of a particular basic series or increasing the numbers. In the first method, a derived series is obtained by taking every second, third, fourth or pth term of a given basic series. Such a derived series is designated by the symbol of the basic series followed by the number 2, 3, 4 or p and separated by ‘/' sign. If the series is limited, the designation also includes the limits inside the bracket. If the series is unlimited, at least one of the numbers of that series is mentioned inside the bracket. Let us consider the meaning of these designations. (i) Series R 10/3 (1, ... ,1000) indicates a derived series comprising of every third term of the R10 series and having the lower limit as 1 and higher limit as 1000. (ii) Series R 20/4 (..., 8, ...) indicates a derived series comprising of every fourth term of the R20 series, unlimited in both sides and having the number 8 inside the series. (iii) Series R 20/3 (200, ...) indicates « derived series comprising of every third term of the R20 series and having the lower limit as 200 and without any higher limit, (iv) Series R 20/3 (...200) indicates 2 derived series comprising of every third term of the R20 series and having the higher limit as 200 and without any lower limit, In the second method, the derived series is obtained by increasing the numbers of a particular basic series. Let us consider an example of a derived series of numbers ranging from 1 to 1000 based on the RS series. From Table 1.2, the Introduction 13 numbers belonging to the RS series from 1 to 10 are as follows: 1, 1.6, 2.5,4, 6.3, 10 The next numbers are obtained by multiplying the above numbers by 10. They are as follows: 16, 25, 40, 63, 100 The same procedure is repeated and the next numbers are obtained by multiplying the above numbers by 10. 160, 250, 400, 630, 1000 ‘Therefore, the complete derived series on the basis of RS series is 2s follows: 1, 1.6, 2.5, 4, 6.3, 10, 16, 25, 40, 63, 100, 160, 250, 400, 630, 1000 The advantage of derived series is that one can obtain geometric series for any range of numbers, that is, with any value of the first and the last numbers. Also, one can have any intermediate numbers between these two limits. Example11 Find out the numbers of the RS basic series from 1 to 10. Solution Step Calculation of series factor The series factor for the R5 series is given by M0 = 1.5849 Step U Calculation of numbers The series RS is established by taking the first number and multiplying it by a series factor to get the second number. The second number is again multiplied by a series factor to get the third number. This procedure is continued until the complete series is built up. The numbers thus obtained are rounded. First number = 1 Second number = | (1.5849) = 1.5849 = (1.6) Third number = (1.5849\(1.5849) =(1.5849? 51 = (2.5) Fourth number = (1.5849)?(1.5849) = (1.5849)° =3.98 =(4) Fifth number = (1.5849)'(1.5849) = (1.5849)* (6.3) Sixth number = (1.5849)*(1.5849) = (1.5849) =(10) In above calculations, the rounded numbers are shown in brackets. Example1.2 Find out the numbers of R20/4(100, 1090) derived series. Solution Step 1 Calculation of series factor The series factor for the R20 series is given by IO = 1.122 Step II Calculation of ratio factor Since every fourth term of the R20 series is selected, the ratio factor (9) is given by, @ = (1.122) = 1.5848 Step IIE Calculation of numbers First number = 100 Second number = 100(1.5848)= 158.48 = (160) Third number = 100(1.5848)(1.5848) = 100(1.5848) 251.16 = (250) Fourth number = 100(1.5848)°(1.5848) = 100(1.5848)> = 398.04 = (400) Fifth number = 100(1.5848)'(1.5848) = 100(1.5848)* = 630.81= (630) 00(1.5848)*(1.5848) 100(1.5848)° = 999.71 = (1000) In the above calculations, the rounded numbers are shown in brackets. The complete series is given Sixth number by 100, 160, 250, 400, 630 and 1000 Example13 4 manufacturer is interested in starting a business with five different models of tractors ranging from 7.5 to 75 kW capacities. Specify power capacities of the models. There is an expansion plan to further increase the number of models from five to nine to fulfill the requirement of farmers, Specify the power capacities of the additional models. Solution Part Starting Plan Step I Calculation of ratio factor Let us denote the ratio factor as (9). The derived series is based on geometric progression. The power rating of five models will as follows, 7.5(G)', 7.5(9)!, 7.5(9), 7.5(6)° and 7.5(9)* 14_Design of Machine Elements The maximum power rating is 75 kW. Therefore, 4 75(¢=75 or 9= (z } = (10)!’4 = $10 = 1.7783 Step II Power rating of models Rating of first model = (7.5) kW Rating of second model = 7.5(1.7783) = 13.34 = (13) kW Rating of third model = 7.5(1.7783)? = 23.72 (24) kW Rating of fourth model = 7.5( 1.7783)? = 42.18 (42) kW Rating of fifth model = 7.5(1.7783)* = 75.0 = (75) kW. Part IT Expansion Plan Step II Calculation of ratio factor When the number of models is increased to nine, the power rating of nine models will be as follo 75(H°, 7.5(0)!, 75(67, 7.500), 7.500), 7.508 The maximum power Therefore, us 75(O)=75 or o-(2) = (10)! = 1.3335 StepIV Power rating of models The power rating of the nine models will be as follows: rating is 75 kW. First model = 7.5 (1.3335)° = (7.5) kW Second model = 7.5 (1.3335)! = 10.00 ~ (10) kW. Third model = 7.5 (1.3335)? = 13.34 = (13) kW. 5 (1.3335) 7.78 = (18) kW Sixth model = 7.5 (1.3335) = Seventh model = 7.5 (1.3335)* Ninth model = 7.5 (1 3335)*= 74.99 = (75) kW Part UT Power capacities of additional models It is observed that there are four additional models having power ratings as 10, 18, 32 and 56 kW. Example 1.4 jf is required to standardize eleven Shafis from 100 to 1000 mm diameter. Specify their diameters. Solution StepI Calculation of ratio factor The diameters of shafts will be as follows: 100(¢)°, 100(4)!, 100(4)?, 100(¢)°, ..., 100(9)'° The maximum diameter is 1000 mm. Therefore, 1 way no 100(¢)' = 1000 or o=( = 010!" = "910 Therefore the diameters belong to the RIO series. Step IT Calculation of shaft diameters Since the minimum diameter is 100 mm, the values of the RIO series given in Table 1.2 are multiplied by 100. The diameter series is written as follows: 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800 and 1000 mm 1.9” AESTHETIC CONSIDERATIONS. IN DESIGN Each product has a definite purpose. It has to perform specific functions to the satisfaction of customer, The contact between the product and the people arises due to the sheer necessity of this functional requirement. The functional requifement of an automobile car is to carry four passengers at a speed of 60 km/hr. There are people in cities who want to go to their office at a distance of 15 km in 15 minutes. So they purchase a car. The specific function of a domestic refrigerator is to preserve vegetables and fruits for a week. There is 2 housewife in the city who cannot go to the market daily and purchase fresh vegetables. Therefore, she purchases the refrigerator. It is seen that such functional requirements bring producis and people together. However, when there are a number of products in the market having the same qualities of efficiency, durability and cost, the customer is attracted towards the most appealing product. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 18 _Desiga of Machine Elements production department suggests changes in design from manufacturing considerations and the drawings are sent back to the design department. This process of sending the drawings by the design department to the production department and from the production department back to the design department continues till the design is finalised and in between valuable time is lost. Engineers who design new products and manufacturing personnel who have to figure out how to make the product are often at odds because of their different backgrounds and points of view. Many times, designers are creative artists who overlook the capabilities of the plant’s machinery. Manufacturing engineers on the other hand, are realistic. They prefer standard materials, simple manufacturing methods, standard components and as few of them as possible, Due to this difference in background, many a times the designer comes up with a new product and throws it ‘over the wall’ to the manufacturing personnel, who says “We can’t make this”. Then there is a lot of finger pointing. In the sequential design process, the production department suggests a number of design modifications, after the design is finalised. In past, this has resulted in time consuming re- designs and missed time schedules in a number of projects. Personality conflicts and departmental barriers often create more problems. Due to these reasons, sequential design is often called ‘over the wall’ design. Sales and Marketing service Jdepariment| Fig.1.8 Sequential Design Process In recent years, there is a fundamental shi the way the designs are prepared. The sequential design process is being replaced by simultaneous or concurrent engineering, where various activities are carried out in parallel, instead of in series. The trend is to bring the design and manufacturing activities together as a single engineering discipline. Concurrent engineering is defired as the design process that brings both design and manufacturing engineers together during the early phases of design process. In this process, a team of specialists examines the design from different angles as shown in Fig. 1.9. The specialists include a manufacturing engineer, tool engineer, field _personnel, reliability engineer and safety engineer. They consider various aspects of the product such as feasibility, manufacturability, assembly, testability, performance, reliability, maintainability, safety and cost. All these aspects are simultaneously considered early in the design stage. For example, manufacturing and assembly is simultaneously considered with stress analysis. This results in smaller number of modifications in the design at a later stage and reduces the ‘time interval’ from the conceptual siage to the marketing stage. Customer requirements Sales and servicing Manufacturability and testability Rel maintainability and safety Cost, Ergonomics jand appearance Fig.1.9 Simultaneous Design Process An example of a company making measuring instruments is interesting’. Keithley Instruments, Solon, USA applied the concept of concurrent engineering in development of a digital multi- meter. The number of parts in the new instrument were reduced from 131 10 76, the number of assembly screws were reduced from 30 to 8 and assembly time was reduced by 35% requiring only ‘one screwdriver instead of multiple assembly tools. $ “Design for Manufacture: key to suecess'—Machine Design—Vol. 64, No. 10—May, 1992. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 22 _Design of Machine Elements 4 permanent set of 0.2% of gauge length. In such cases, the yield strength is determined by the offset method. A distance OA equal to 0.002 mm/mm strain (corresponding to 0.2% of gauge length) is marked on the X-axis. A line is constructed from the point 4 parallel to the straight line portion OP of the stress-strain curve. The point of intersection of this line and the stress-strain curve is called ¥ or the yield point and the corresponding stress is called 0.2% yield strength. Stress. = offset Fig. 2.3. Yield Stress by Offiet Method ‘Strain The terms proof load or proof strength are frequently used in the design of fasteners. Proof strength is similar to yield strength. It is determined by the offset method; however the offset in this case is 0.001 mm/mm corresponding to a permanent set of 0.1% of gauge length. 0.1% Proof strength, denoted by symbol Rp0.1, is defined as the stress which will produce a permanent extension of 0.1% in the gauge length of the test specimen. The proof load is the force corresponding to proof stress. (0) Ultimate Tensile Strength We will refer back to the stress-strain diagram of ductile materials illustrated in Fig. 2.2. After the yield point ¥>, plastic deformation of the specimen increases. The ‘material becomes stronger due to strain hardening, and higher and higher load is required to deform the material. Finally, the load and corresponding sitess reach a maximum value, as given by the point U. The stress corresponding to the point U is called the ultimate strength. The ultimate tensile strength is the maximum stress that can be reached in the tension test. For ductile materials, the diameter of the specimen begins to decrease rapidly beyond the maximum load point U. There is a localised reduction in the cross-sectional area, called necking. As the test progresses, the cross-sectional area at the neck decreases rapidly and fracture takes place at the narrowest cross-section of the neck. This fracture is shown by the point F on the diagram. The stress at the time of fracture is called breaking strength. It is observed from the stress-strain diagram that there is a downward trend after the maximum stress has been reached. The breaking strength is slightly lower than the ultimate tensile strength. The stress-strain diagram for brittle materials like cast iron is shown in Fig. 2.4. It is observed that such materials do not exhibit the yield point. The deviation of the stress-strain curve from straight line begins very early and fracture occurs suddenly at the point U with very small plastic deformation and without necking. Therefore, ultimate tensile strength is considered as failure criterion in brittle materials. Stress v o Stain Fig. 24 Stress-Strain Diagram of Brittle Materials (vi) Percentage Elongation After the fracture, the two halves of the broken test specimen are fitted together as shown in Fig. 2.5(b) and the extended gauge length / is measured. The percentage elongation is defined as the ratio of the increase in the length of the gauge section of the specimen to original gauge length, expressed in per cent. Therefore, percentage elongation = (<4) 100 ly Ductility is measured by percentage elongation, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 26 _Designt of Machine Elements (ii) Steels, copper and aluminium are ductile materials, waile cast iron is brittle. (iii) The energy absorbed by a ductile specimen before fracture in a tension test is more, while brittle fracture is accompanied by negligible energy absorption. (iv) In ductile materials, failure tekes place by yielding which is gradual. Brittle materials fail by sudden fracture. Hardness is defined as the resistance of the material to penetration or permanent deformation It usually indicates resisiance to abrasion, scratching, cutting or shaping. Hardness is an important property in the selection of material for parts which rub on one another such as pinion and gear, cam and follower, rail and wheel and parts of ball bearing. Wear resistance of these parts is improved by increasing surface hardness by case hardening. There are four primary methods of measuring hardness—Brinell hardness test, Rockwell hardness test, Vicker hardness test and Shore scleroscope. In the first three methods, an indenter is pressed onto the surface under a specific force. The shape of the indenter is either a ball, pyramid or cone. The indenters are made of diamond, carbide or hardened steel, which are much more harder than the surface being tested. Depending upon the cross-sectional area and depth of indentation, hardness is expressed in the form of an empirical number like Brinell hardness number. In a Shore scleroscope, the height of rebound from the surface being tested indicates the hardness. Hardness test is simpler than tension test. It is non- destructive because a small indentation may not be detrimental to the performance of the product. Hardness of the material depends upon the resistance to plastic deformation. Therefore, as the hardness increases, the strength also increases. For certain metals like steels, empirical relationships between strength and hardness are established. For steels, S,,= 3.45 (BHN) where S,, is ultimate tensile strength in Nim 2.3 CAST IRON Cast iron is a generic term, which refers to a family of materials that differ widely in their mechanical properties. By definition, cast iron is an alloy of iron and carbon, containing more than 2% of carbon, In addition to carbon, cast iron contains other elements like silicon, manganese, sulphur and phosphorus. There is a basic difference between steels and cast iron. Steels usually contain less than 1% carbon while cast iron normally contains 2 to 4% carbon. Typical composition of ordinary cast iron is as follows: carbon = 3.0-4.0% silicon 1.0-3.0% manganese = 0.5 ~ 1.0% sulphur = up to 0.1% phosphorus = up to 0.1% iron = remainder ‘The mechanical properties of cast iron components are inferior to the parts, which are machined from rolled stecls. However, even with this drawback, cast iron offers the only choice under certain conditions. From design considerations, cast iron offers the following advantages: (i Tis available in large quantities and is producedona mass scale. The tooling required for the casting process is relatively simple and inexpensive. This reduces the cost of cast iron products, (ii) Cast iron components can be given any complex shape without involving costly machining operations. (iil) Cast iron has a higher compressive strength. The compressive strength of cast iron is three to five times that of steel. This is an advantage in certain applications. (iv) Cast iron has an excellent ability to damp vibrations, which makes it an ideal choice for machine tool guides and frames. (v) Cast iron hasmore resistance to wear even under the conditions of boundary lubrication. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 30_Design of Machine Elements ‘The average percentage of carbon is 0.15%, which is denoted by the number (0.15 x 100) or 15. The percentage content of silicon and manganese is, negligible and, as such, they are deleted from the designation. The significant element is chromium and its average percentage is 0,65. The multiplying factor for chromium is 4 and (0.65 x 4) is 2.6, which is rounded to 3. Therefore, the complete designation of steel is 15Cr3. As a second example, consider a steel with the following chemical composition: carbon = 0,12-0.20% silicon 0.15-0.35% manganese = 0.60-1.00% nickel = 0.60-1.00% chromium = 0.40-0.80% The average percentage of carbon is 0.16% and multiplying this value by 100, the first figure in the designation of steel is 16. The average percentage of silicon and manganese is very small and, as such, the symbols Si and Mn are deleted. Average percentages of nickel and chromium are 0.8 and 0.6, respectively, and the multiplying factor for both elements is 4. Therefore, nickel: 0.8 x 4 = 3.2 rounded to 3 or Ni3 chromium: 0.6 x 4 = 2.4 rounded to 2 or Cr2. The complete designation of steel is 16Ni3C12. ‘The term “high alloy steels’ is used for alloy steels containing more than 10% of alloying clements. The designation of high alloy steels consists of the following quantities: (i) aletter “x”: (ii) a figure indicating 100 times the average percentage of carbon; (iii) chemical symbol for alloying elements each followed by the figure for its average percentage content rounded off to the nearest integer; and (iv) chemical symbol to indicate a specially added clement to attain desired properties, if any. As an example, XISCr2SNil2 is a high alloy ste! with 0.15% carbon, 25% chromium and 12% nickel. As a second example, consider a steel with the following chemical composition: carbon 0.15-0.25% silicon 0.10-0.50% manganese = 0.30-0.50% nickel = 15-25% chromium = 16-20% The average content of carbon is 0.20%, which is denoted by a number (0.20 x 100) or 20. The major alloying elements are chromium (average 18%) and nickel (average 2%). Hence, the designation of steel is X20Cr18Ni2. 2.5 PLAIN CARBON STEELS Depending upon the percentage of carbon, plain carbon steels are classified into the following three groups: Low Carbon Stee! Low carbon steel contains ess than 0.3% carbon. It is popular as ‘mild steel’. Low carbon steels are soft and very ductile, They can be easily machined and easily welded. However, due to low carbon content, they are unresponsive to heat treatment. di) Medium Carbon Steel Medium carbon steel has a carbon content in the range of 0.3% to 0.5%. It is popular as machinery sieel. Medium carbon steel is easily hardened by heat treatment. Medium carbon steels are stronger and tougher as compared with low carbon steels. They can be machined well and they respond readily to heat treatment. (iii) High Carbon Steel High carbon steel contains more than 0.5% carbon. They are called hard steels or tool steels. High carbon steels respond readily to heat treatments. When heat treated, high carbon steels have very high strength combined with hardness. They do not have much ductility as compared with low and medium carbon steels High carbon steels are difficult to weld. Excessive hardness is often accompanied by excessive brittleness. Plain carbon stcels are available in the form of bar, tube, plate, sheet and wire. The mechanical properties of plain carbon steels’ are given in Table 22. 7 JS 1870 (Part 2/Secl)-1979: Schedules for wrought steels carbon steels (unalloyed steels), aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 34_Design of Machine Elements ductility. Therefore, nickel steel such as 40NiL4 is used for these severely stressed components, (iii) In applications like gears, surface hardness, wear resistance and response to heat treatment are important considerations. In these components, the surface is heavily stressed, while the stresses in the core are of comparatively small magnitude. These components require a soft core and a hard surface. Chromium increases hardness and wear resistance. Also, chromium steels are readily hardened in heavy sections. Therefore, chromium steels, such as 40Cr4 is selected for all types of gears. (iv) Ina number of components like gears, cams, camshafis, and transmission shafts, combined properties such as hardness and toughness, strength and ductility are required. This is achieved by using nickel and chromium as alloying elements and selecting proper heat treatment, Nickel-chromium steels, like 16Ni3Cr2 or 30Ni16Cr5, which combines hardness and toughness, are selected for these parts. Some of the important applications of alloy steels are as follows: 59Si7 Leaf and coil springs 37C15._ Axle, shaft and crankshaft 35Mn6Mo3 Bolt, stud, axle, lever and general engineering components 16Mn5Cr4. Gears and shaft 40Cr4 Gears, axle and steering arm 50Cr4 Coil, laminated and volute springs 40Cr4Mo2 Shaft, axle, high tensile bolt, stud and popeller shaft 40Cr13Mol0V2 Components subjected to high tensile stresses 40Nil4 Severely stressed screw, nut and bolt J6Ni3Cr2_ Gears, transmission components, cam and camshaft 30Ni16Cr5 Heavy duty gears 35Ni5Cr2 Gear shafi, cranksheft, chain parts, camshaft and planetary gears 40NibCr4Mo2 General machine parts, nuts and bolts, gears, axles, shafts and connecting rod 40Ni10Cr3Mo6 High strength machine compo- nents, bolts and studs, axles and shafts, gears and crankshafts Mechanical properties of alloy steels® are given in Table 2.4 on next page. 28 OVERSEAS STANDARDS Cast iron and steel are the essential ingredients in any product. A large variety of steel and cast iron is developed for a number of applications. In our country, collaborations with foreign industries have resulted in use of different overseas standards and designations. Some important designations for ferrous materials are as follows,!0-1!-!2 (i) The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) has classified grey cast iron by means of a number. This class number gives minimum tensile strength in kpsi. For example, ASTM Class No. 20 has minimum ultimate tensile strength of 20000 psi. Similarly, a east iron with minimum ultimate tensile strength of 50000 psi is designated as ASTM Class No. 50. Commonly used ASTM classes of cast iron are 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50 and 60. °IS 1570 (Part 4)-1988: Schedules for wrought steels—Alloy steels with specified chemical composition and ‘mechanical properties '© SAE 3402: 1984-SAE Numbering system for wrought or rolled steel (SAE standard). I “SAE Handbook” ” “Metals. Handbook’—Vol. Society of Metals inc., 1990. ‘Vol. ‘Materials’ —Society of Automotive Engineers Ine., 1987. Properties and selection: Iron, steels and high performance alloys’—American aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 38 Desig of Machine Elements Case hardening can be achieved by the following two ways: ()) by altering the structure at the surface by local hardening, e.g., flame or induction hardening. (ii) by altering the structure as well as the composition at the surface, eg., case carburising, nitriding, eyaniding and carbo- nitriding. Flame hardening consists of heating the surface above the transformation range by means of a flame, followed by quenching. The distortion of the component is low because the bulk of the work piece is not heated. Flame hardening can be done in stages, such as hardening of tooth by tooth of a gear blank. The minimum case depth obtained by this process is | mm, although ease depths up to 6 mm are quite common. Flame hardening is recommended under the following situations: (i) where the component is large; ii) where a small area of the work piece is to be hardened; and (iii) where dimensional accuracy is desirable. Carbon steels containing more than 0.4% carbon are generally employed for flame hardening, The induction-hardening process consists of heating the surface by induction in the field of an alternating current. The amount of heat generated depends upon the resistivity of the material. Induction hardening produces case depths as small as 0.1 mm. There is not much difference between flame and induction hardening, except for the mode of heating and minimum case depth. Case carburising consists of introducing carbon at the surface layer. Such a component has -carbon surface layer and a low-carbon core with a gradual transformation from one zone to the other. Different methods are used to introduce carbon, but all involve heating from 880 to 980°C. The carburising medium can be solid, liquid or gas. Case carburising is recommended for case depths up to2 mm. Carbo-nitriding consists of introducing carbon and nitrogen simultaneously at the surface layer. The component is heated from 650 to 920°C in the atmosphere of anhydrous ammonia and then quenched in a suitable medium. Nitrogen is concentrated at the surface and backed up by a carburised case. Medium carbon steels are carbo- nitrided with case depths up to 0.6 mm. The process gives a higher wear resistance compared to the case-carburising process. Cyaniding is similar to carbo nitriding except that the medium is liquid. Nitriding consists of exposing the component to the action of nascent nitrogen in a gaseous ot liquid medium from 490 to 590°C. This process does not involve any subsequent quenching. The gaseous medium consists of dry ammonia. The liquid medium can be of cyanides and cyanates. The nitrided case consists of two zones—a brittle white zone next to the surface, consisting of nitrides, followed by a tougher diffusion zone, where nitrides are precipitated in the matrix. Case depths up to 0.1 mm are obtained by this process. Nitrided components are used for applications requiring high resistance to abrasion, high endurance limit and freedom from distortion. The disadvantages of this process are as follows: (@ The components cannot be used for concentrated loads and shocks; (ii) The case depth is limited to 0.5 mm; and (iii) Considerable time is required for the process due to long cycle time. The applications of the nitrided component are indexing worms, high-speed spindles and crankshafts. 241 CAST STEEL Pouring molten steel of desired chemical composition into a mould and allowing the steel to solidify produces cast steel components. Steel castings can be made from any type of carbon and low alloy steels. Cast steel components and wrought steel components of equivalent chemical composition respond similarly to heat weatment, have the same weldability and have similar physical and mechanical properties. However, cast steel components do not exhibit the effects of directionality on mechanical properties that are typical of wrought steels. This non- directional characteristic of cast steel components is advantageous where «pplication involves mutti-directional forces. Compared with cast aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 42 Design of Machine Elements Table 211 Mechanical properties of wrought aluminium aud alumina alloys 0.2 per cent Tensile srength Elongation Alloy Condition Diarmeter(mm) proofstress ‘inne (Min) (Ninm) 0) over pio Min Mac Min Mav. 24MS 0M - - 90 - 150 - 2 ° - - - 175 240 12 w 10 2s - 375 - 10 10 15 235 - 385 - 10 8 150 235 - 385 - 8 150 200 25 - 375 - 8 we - 10 375 - 430 - 6 10 25 400 - 460 - 6 25 15 20 - 480 6 15 150 405 - 460 - 6 150 200 380 - 430 - 6 245340 M - - 90 - 150 - R ° - - 175 - 240 2 w 10 20 - 378 - 10 10 18 235 - 385 - 10 75 150 25 - 385 - 8 150 200 2s - 375 8 54300 M - 150 130 - 265 - u ° - 150 is - - 350 13 64300 M - - 80 - 110 12 ° - 150 16 w 150 120 185 4 150 200 100 - 170 7 2 we * 5 2s 205 = 1 5 15 270 = 310 = 1 5 150 270 - 205 - 1 150 200 240 - 280 6 74530 Wi - 6 20 - 255 - 9 6 8 230 - 215 9 75 150 20 - 265 9 we - 6 245 - 285 1 6 15 260 - 310 - 1 78 150 245 = 290 = 1 +" Naturally aged for 30 days (M = as manufactured: O = annealed; W = solution treated and naturally aged; WP = solution and precipitation treated), aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 46 Design of Machine Elements ® ® ® OOW WOO ® © ® Methane (gas) Ethane (gas) Pentane (liquid) Fig. 28 Monomer Chains (iv) If the process of adding (CH,) units to the pentane chain is continued, paraffin wax is obtained. It is in a semi-solid stage with (Cig Hy) composition. (9) If the process is further continued, a solid plastic called low-density polyethylene is obtained at approximately (Cio) Hyo2) composition. (vi) In the next stage, high-density polyethylene is obtained. It contains about half-million (CH, units in a single chain. It is a very tough solid plastic. ‘Adding a terminal link called terminator, which satisfies the bonds at each end of the chain, stops the linking of monomer units. Knowing the construction of a monomer and polymer, we can define the term plastic at this stage. 4 plastic can be defined as a solid material consisting of an organie polymer of a long molecular chain and high molecular weight. It may also contain some additives like fillers, plasticisers, flame retardants and pigments. A filler is an inert foreign substance added to a polymer to improve certain properties such as tensile and compressive strengths, abrasion resistance, toughness and dimensional and thermal stability. Filler materials include finely powdered sawdust, silica floor and sand, clay, limestone and talc. A plasticiser is low- molecular weight polymer additive that improves flexibility, ductility and toughness and reduces brittleness and stiffness. They include polyvinyl chloride and acetate copolymers. A flame retardant is an additive which increases flammability resistance. Most polymers are flammable in their pure form. A flame retardant interferes with the combustion process and prevents burning. A pigment or colourant imparts a specific colour to the plastic material. Plastics are divided into two basic groups depending on their behaviour at elevated temperatures, viz., thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics. A thermoplastic is a polymeric material which softens when heated and hardens upon cooling. A thermosetting plastic is a polymeric material, which once having cured or hardened by a chemical reaction does not soften or melt upon subsequent heating. In short, a thermoplastic softens with heat while a thermosetting plastic does not. A thermoplastic material can be moulded and temoulded repeatedly. This difference in properties of thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic materials is due to molecular structures of their polymer chains. A thermoplastic material has 4 linear polymer chain while a thermosetting plastic material consists of a cross-linked polymer chain as (a) Linear chain (Thermopiastics) (b) Cross-linked chi (Thermosetting plastics) Fig. 9 Linear and Cross-linked Polymer Chains shown in Fig. 2.9. The difference between the two categories of plastic is as follows: () A thermoplastic material has a linear polymer chain. A thermosetting plastic material has cross-linked polymer chain. (ii) A thermoplastic material can be softened, hardened or resofiened repeatedly by the application of heat. Altemate heating and aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 80 Design of Machine Elements natural rubber. A few applications of synthetic rubber are as follows: (i) Chloraprene (Neoprene) Conveyors and V belts, brake diaphragms and gaskets (ii) Nitrile Butadiene (NBR) Bushes for flexible coupling and rubber rollers (ii) Polysulfide (Thikol) diaphragms Gaskets, washers and (iv) Chlorosulfonyl Polyethylene (Hypalon) Tank lining. high temperature conveyor belts, seals and gaskets (iv) Silicone Seals, gaskets and O-rings 219 CREEP ‘When a component is under a constant load, it may undergo progressive plastic deformation over a period of time. This time-dependent strain is called creep. Creep is defined as slow and progressive deformation of the material with time under a constant siress. Creep deformation is a function of stress level and temperature. Therefore, creep deformation is higher at higher temperature and creep becomes important for components operating at elevated temperatures. Creep of bolts and pipes is a serious problem in thermal power stations. The material of steam or gas turbine blades should have a low creep rate, so that blades can remain in service for a long period of time before having to be replaced due to their reaching the maximum allowable strain. These blades operate with very close clearances and permissible deformation is an important consideration in their design. Design of components working at clovated temperature is based on two criteria. Deformation due to creep must remain within permissible limit and rupture must not occur during the service life, Based on these two criteria, there are two terms—creep strength and creep rupture strength. Creep strength of the material is defined as the maximum stress that the material can withstand for o specified length of time without excessive deformation. Creep rupture strength of the material is the ‘matimum stress that the material can withstand for a specified length of time without rupture. An idealised creep curve is shown in Fig. 2.10. When the load is applied at the beginning of the creep test, the instantaneous elastic deformation OA occurs. This elastic deformation is followed Fracture point Strain Fig.2.10 Creep Curve by the creep curve ABCD, Creep occurs in three stages. The first stage called primary creep is shown by 4B on the curve. During this stage, the creep rate, i.e., the slope of the creep curve from A to B progressively decreases with time. The metal strain hardens to support the external load. ‘The creep rate decreases because further strain hardening becomes more and more difficult, The second stage called secondary creep is shown by BC on the curve. During this stage, the creep rate is constant. This stage occupies a major portion of the life of the component. The designer is mainly concerned with this stage. During secondary creep, recovery processes involving highly mobile dislocations counteract the strain hardening so that the metal continues to elongate at a constant rate. The third stage called tertiary creep is shown by CD on the creep curve. During this stage, the creep rate is accelerated due to necking and also due to formation of voids along the grain boundaries. Therefore, creep rate rapidly increases and finally results in fracture at the point D. Creep properties are determined by experiments and these experiments involve very long periods stretching into months. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 54_Design of Machine Elements 219 2.20 221 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 231 2.32 2.33 234 What is mild steel? What is the percentage of carbon in mild steel? Deline alloy steel. Name the various alloying elements in ‘alloy’ steels. What are the advantages of alloy steel? What are the important components made of alloy steels? Compare cast iron and cast steel components. Compare steel and cast steel components. Name the components made of carbon steel castings? Name the components made of high tensile steel castings? What are the advantages of aluminum alloy for mechanical components? Name the components made of aluminum alloy castings? Name the components made of wrought aluminum alloy. What are the advantages of copper alloys from design considerations? What are the disadvantages of copper alloys from design considerations? ‘What are ceramics? 235 2.36 237 238 2.39 2.40 241 2.42 2.43 2.44 2.45 2.46 2.47 2.48 2.49 2.50 ‘What are the advantages and drawbacks of ceramics? What are the applications of ceramics in engineering industries? What is plastic? ‘What is a monomer? Give its examples. What is a polymer? Give its examples. What are the types of plastics? ‘What is a thermoplastic? Give its examples. What is a thermosetting plastic? Give its examples. ‘What is Teflon? Where do you use it? ‘What is fibre reinforced plastic (FRP)? What are the advantages of fibre reinforced plastics? What are the disadvantages reinforced plastics? What is creep? Explain the situations where creep is a serious problem. What are the factors to be considered for selection of material for a machine component? Explain the principle of weighted point method for selection of material for a machine component. of fibre aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 58 Design of Machine Elements Appropriate fillet radius, as illustrated in Fig. 3.3 reduces the stress concentration. The values of the corner radii for different section thickness are given in Table 3.1. concentration of metal. Even after the metal on the surface solidifies, the central portion still remains in the molten stage, with the result that a shrinkege cavity or blowhole may appear at the centre. There are two ways to avoid the concentration of metal. One is to provide a cored opening in webs and ribs, as illustrated in Fig. 3.6. Alternatively, one can stagger the ribs and webs, as shown in Fig. 3.7. ‘Shrinkage cavity Table 3.1 Wall thickness (mm) Inside corner radius (mm) (inienum) 0-30 10 30-50 1s 50-80 20 80-120 30. A ZA ZA Incorrect Correct Fig. 3.3. Provision of Fillet Radius Wherever Possible, the Section Thickness throughout should be Held as Uniform as Compatible with Overall Design Considera- tions Abrupt changes in the cross-section result in high stress concentration. If the thickness is to be varied at all, the change should be gradual as illustrated in Fig. 3.4. Da i YP. {(@) Poor (b) Good {c) Better (¢) Best Fig. 34 Change in Section-thickness Avoid Concentration of Metal at the Junctions At the junction as shown in Fig. 3.5, there is a Fig. 3.6 Cored Holes Fig.3.7 Staggered Ribs Avoid Very Thin Sections In general, if the thickness of a cast iron component is calculated from strength considerations, it is often too small, In such cases, the thickness should be increased to certain practical proportions. The minimum section thickness depends upon the process of casting, such as sand casting, permanent mould casting or die aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 62__Design of Machine Elements requirement of the component, the designer should specify the most liberal dimensional and geometric tolerances. Closer the tolerance, higher is the cost. (iii) Avoid Sharp Corners Sharp corners result in stress concentration. Therefore, the designer should avoid shapes that require sharp corners. (iv) Use Stock Dimensions Raw material like bars are available in standard sizes. Using stock dimensions eliminates machining operations. For example, a hexagonal bar can be used fora bolt, and. only the threaded portion can be machined. This will eliminate machining of hexagonal surfaces. (&) Design Rigid Parts Any machining operation such asturning or shaping induces cutting forces onthe components, The component should be rigid enough to withstand these forces. In this respect, components with thin walls or webs should be avoided. (vi) Avoid Shoulders and Undercuts Shoulders and undercuts usually involve separate operations and separate tools, which increase the cost of machining. (vii) Avoid Hard Materials Hard materials are difficult to machine. They should be avoided unless such properties are essential for the functional requirement of the product. 3.5 HOT AND COLD WORKING OF METALS The temperature at which new stress-free grains are formed in the metal is called the recrystatlizaiion temperature. There are two types of metal deformation methods, namely, hot working and cold working, Metal deformation processes that are carried out above the recrystallization temperature are called hot working proces rolling, hot forging, hot spinning, hot extrusion, and hot drawing are hot working processes. Metal deformation processes that are carried out below the recrysiallization temperature are called cold working processes. Cold rolling, cold forging, cold spinning, cold extrusion, and cold drawing are cold working processes. Hot working processes have the following advantages: (i) Hot working reduces strain hardening. (ii) Hotrolledcomponentshave highertoughness and ductility. They have better resistance to shocks and vibrations. (iii) Hot working increases the strength of metal by refining the grain structure and aligning the grain of the metal with the final counters of the part. This is particularly true of forged parts. iv) Hot working reduces residual stresses in the ‘component. Hot working processes have the following disadvantages: (i) Hot working results in rapid oxidation of the surface due to high temperature. (ii) Hot rolled components have poor surface finish than cold rolled pars. (ii) Hot working requires expensive tools. Cold working processes have the following advantages: (i) Cold rolled components heve higher hardness and strength {ii) Cold worked components have bettersurface finish than hot rolled parts. (ii) The dimensions of cold rolled parts are very accurate. (iv) The tooling required for cold working is comparatively inexpensive. Cold working processes have the following disadvantages: (i) Cold working reduces toughness and ductility. Such components have poor, resistance to shocks and vibrations. (ii) Cold working induces residual stresses in the component. Proper heat treatment is required to relieve these stresses. 3.6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS OF WELDED ASSEMBLIES Welding is the most important method of joining the parts into a complex assembly. Design of welded joints is explained in a separate chapter on welded joints. In this article, general principles in design of ‘welded assemblies are discussed, The guidelines are as follows: aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 66 _Design of Machine Elements There are two systems of specification for tolerances, namely, unilateral and bilateral. In the unilateral system, one tolerance is zero, while the other takes care of all permissible variation in basic size. For example, 004 4000 100° or 100°" In case of bilateral tolerances, the variations are given in both directions from normal size. The upper limit in this case is the basic size plus non-zero positive tolerance, and the lower limit is the basic size plus non-zero negative tolerance. For example, os or 25°? asi In bilateral tolerances, the two tolerances are often equal, but this is not a necessary condition. Unilateral tolerances are used for shafis and holes. 3.9 TYPES OF FITS ‘There are two basic systems for giving tolerances to the shafi and the hole, namely, the hole-basis system and the shaft-basis, system. In the hole-basis| system, the different clearances and interferences are obtained by associating various shafts with a single hole, whose lower deviation is zero. The system is illustrated in Fig. 3.22. In this case, the size of the hole is the basic size, and the clearance or interference is applied to the shaft dimension, The system is denoted by the symbol “H’. This system has an advantage over the shaft-basis system, because holes are machined by standard drills or reamers having fixed dimensions, while the shafts can be tumed or ground to any given dimension. Due to this reason, the hole-basis system is widely used. When two parts are o be assembled, the relationship resulting from the difference between their sizes before assembly’ is called a fit. Depending upon the limits of the shaft and the hole, fits are broadly classified into three groups—clearance fit, transition fit and interference fit. Clearance fit is a fit which always provides a positive clearance between the hole and the shaft over the entire range of tolerances. \n this case, the tolerance zone of the hole is entirely above that of the shaft. Jnerference fit is a fit which always provides a positive interference over the whole range of tolerances. In this case, the tolerance zone of the hole is completely below that of the shaft. Transition fit is a fit which may provide either a clearance or imerference, depending upon the actual values of the individual tolerances of the mating components. In this case, the tolerance zones of the hole and the shaft overlap. These definitions are illustrated in Fig. 3.21 Shaft TLL), a ~ Line” Ae Coo Hole Hole (b) (ce) Fig. 3.21 Types of Fits: (a) Clearance Fit (©) Transition Fit (c) Interference Fit Shatt Hole Hole ; - VW Zao a@W ow Hole “Lhe Shatt Shaft Fig.3.22 Hole Basis Susten: (a) Clearance Fit (0) Transition Fit (c) Interference Fit In the shaft-basis system, the different clearances. or interferences are obiained by associating various holes with a single shaft, whose upper deviation is zero, This principle is illustrated in Fig. 3.23. In this system, the size of the shaft is the basic size, while the clearance or interference is applied to the dimensions of the hole. The system is denoted by the symbol *h’. The shaft-basis system is popular in industries using semi-finished or finished shafting, such as bright bars, as raw material, Hole Hee Z Shaft Zero ON Line (a)Shat Shaft © Zo Hole Fig.3.23 Shaft Basis System: (a) Clearance Fit () Transition Fit (c) Interference Fit aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 70 Design of Machine Elements grades of tolerances reduce the cost of production The designer should always take into consideration the available manufacturing facilities and their cost competitiveness before specifying the grade of tolerances. Example 3.1. The main bearing of an engine is shown in Fig. 3.25. Calculate (i) the maximum and minimum diameters of the bush and crank pin; and (i) the maximum and minimum clearances between the crank pin and bush. Suggest suitable machining methods for both. Fig. 3.25. Engine Bearing Solution Step 1 Maximum and minimum diameters of the bush and crank pin The tolerances for the bush and crank pin from Tables 3.2 and 3.3a are as follows: Bush: apo 20.000 Crankpin: ‘oe 19.960 39-006 i 19.939" ® Step Maximum and mininum clearances Maximum clearance = 20.013 — 19.93! 074 mm Minimum clearance = 20,000 ~ 19.960 = 0.040 mm (i) Step I Machining methods ‘The bush (H6) is usually machined by precision boring, honing or hand reaming methods. The crank pin (e7) is machined by high precision turning or broaching. Example 3.2. The valve seat fitted inside the housing of a pump is shown in Fig. 3.26. Calculate (i) the maximum and minimum diameters of the housing and valve seat: and (ii) the magnitude of the maximum and minimum interferences between the seat and housing. 20H7-s6 Fig. 3.26 Valve Seat Solution Step 1 Maximunt and minimum diameters of the housing and valve seat From Tables 3.2 and 3.3b, the tolerances for valve seat and housing are as follows: Housing: sii0o0 4, 20.021 20.000 Valve seat (outer diameter): 20' mm 088 9978035 20.048 @ 20.03: Step Maxim and minimum interferences Minimum interference = 20.035 ~ 20,02 014 mm Maximum interference = 20,048 — 20,000 = 0,048 mm (ii) 3.13. SELECTIVE ASSEMBLY The selective assembly is a process of sorting the manufactured components into different groups according 0 their sizes, and then assembling the components of one group to the corresponding components of a matching group. \n this method, larger shafts are assembled with larger holes and aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 74_Design of Machine Elements 3.6 What are the advantages of the forging process? 3.7 What are the disadvantages of the forging process? 3.8. Whatare theadvantages of the cutting process as a manufacturing method? 3.9 What are the disadvantages of the cutting process as a manufacturing method? 3.10. What are the principles of designing cast iron components? 3.11 Compare grain structure of a crankshaft manvfactured by casting, forging and machining processes, 3.12 How will you select direction of fibre lines in forged components’ 3.13 Where do you use machined components? Give practical examples. 3.14 What are the principles for the design of machined components? 3.15 What are the advantages of the hot working process? 3.16 Whatare the disadvantages of the hot working process? 3.17 What are the advantages of the cold working process? 3.18 What are the disadvantages of the cold working process’ 3.19 What are the assemblies? 3.20. What is DFM? What is DFMA? 3.21 What are the principles of Design for Manufacture and Assemblies (DFMA)? 3.22, What is tolerance? 3.23 What are unilateral and bilateral tolerances? 3.24 What is fit? 3.25. What is a clearance fit? Give examples. 3.26 What is a transition fit? Give examples. 3.27, What is an interference fit? Give examples. 3.28 What is the shaft-basis system for giving tolerances? 3.29 What is the hole-basis system for giving tolerances? 3.30 What are the advantages of the hole-basis system over the shaft-basis system? 3.31 What is fundamental deviation? 3.32, How will you designate fundamental deviation? iples for design of welded 3.33 How will you designate magnitude of tolerance? 3.34 What are the guidelines for selection of clearance fits? Give examples. 3.33 What ate the guidelines for selection of transition fits? Give examples. 3.36 What are the guidelines for selection of interference fits? Give examples. 3.37 What is selective assembly? 3.38 Distinguish between interchangeable and selective assemblies. 3.39 What are the advantages of selective assembly? 3.40 What are the disadvantages of selective assembly? 3.41 Explain the symbol for surface roughness. Problems for Practice 3.4. The bush of the small end of a connecting od is shown in Fig. 3.30. Calculate (@) the maximum and minimam diameters of the bush and connecting rod; and Gil). the maximum and minimum interference between them. 1SH6415 | Fig. 3.30 ) 15.031 15.011 oy p31 and Te amy (ii) 0.031 and 0.012 mm) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 78_Design of Machine Elements reliability of components is expected. The factor of safety increases with increasing reliability. (vi) Cost of Component As the factor of safety increases, dimensions of the component, material requirement and cost increase. The factor of safety is low for cheap machine parts. (eli) Testing of Machine Element A low factor of safety can be chosen when the machine component can be tested under actual conditions of service and operation. A higher factor of safety is necessary, when it is not possible to test the machine part or where there is deviation between test conditions and actual service conditions. (viii) Service Conditions When the machine element is likely to operate in corrosive atmosphere or high temperature environment, a higher factor of safety is necessary. (ix) Quality of Manufacture When the quality of manufacture is high, variations in dimensions of the machine component are less and a low factor of safety can be selected. Conversely, a higher factor of safety is required to compensate for poor manufacturing quality. ‘The selection of magnitude of the factor of safety is one of the difficult tasks faced by the designer. The guidelines for selection of quantitative values of the factor of safety are as follows: (i) For cast iron components, ultimate tensile strength is considered to be the failure criterion, Failure occurs when the maximum stress in the component due to extemal force exceeds the ultimate tensile strength even once. Cast iron components have a non-homogeneous structure. Many times, there are residual stresses in the component. To account for these factors, a large factor of safety, usually 3 to 5, based on ultimate tensile strength, is used in the design of cast iron components, (ii) For components made of ductile materials like steel and which are subjected to external static forces, yield strength is considered to be the criterion of failure. When such components ate overloaded and the stress (ii) co) w) due to extemal force exceeds the yield strength of the material, there is-a small amount of plastic deformation, which usually does not put the component out of service. Ductile components have a homogeneous structure and the residual stresses can be relieved by proper heat treatment. The stress analysis is more precise in case of static forces. Due to these reasons, the factor of safety is usually small in such cases. The recommended factor of safety is 1.5 to 2, based on the yield strength of the material. For components made of ductile materials and those subjected to external fluctuating forces, endurance limit is considered to be the criterion of failure. Such components fail on account of fatigue. Fatigue failure depends upon the amplitude of fluctuating stresses and the number of stress cycles. The nature of fatigue failure is discussed in Section 5.5. The number of factors affect endurance limit, such as stress concentration, notch sensitivity, surface finish and even the size of the component. Therefore, the endurance limit of the component is reduced to account for these factors. The recommended factor of safety based on this endurance limit of ‘component is usually 1.3 to 1.5. The design of certain components such as cams and followers, gears, rolling contact bearings or rail and wheel is based on the calculation of contact stresses by the Hertz’ theory. Failure of such components is usually in the form of small pits on the surface of the component. Pitting is surface fatigue failure, which occurs when contact stress exceeds the surface endurance limit. ‘The damage due to pitting is local and does not put the component out of operation. The surface endurance limit can be improved by increasing the surface hardness. The recommended factor of safety for such components is 1.8 to 2.5 based on surface endurance limit, Certain components, such as piston rods, power screws or studs, are designed on the aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 82_Design of Machine Elements Equation (4.12) is based on the following assumptions: () The beam is straight with uniform cross- section. (ii) The forces acting on the beam lie in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the beam. (iii) The material is homogeneous, isotropic and obeys Hooke’s law. ) Plane cross-sections bending. ‘The moment of inertia in Eq. (4.12) is the area moment of inertia. For a rectangular cross-section, remain plane after 3 eet (4.13) where, 12 b= distance parallel to the neutral axis (mm) d= distance perpendicular to the neutral axis (mm) For a circular cross-section, i (4.14) at ; where d is the diameter of the cross-section. When the cross-section is iregular, as shown in Fig. 4.6, the moment of inertia about the centroidal axis X, is given by, Ig=SyP dA (4.15) rL_”* Positive bending Ms| Xo n d=" Fig. 4.6 Parallel-axis Theorem The parallel-axis theorem for this area is given by the expression, 1, 4.19 Ing + AY, where, Jq, = moment of inertia of the area about X, axis, which is parallel to the axis X,, and located at a distance y; from X, J4g~ moment of inertia of the area about its own centroidal axis, A= area of the cross-section. In design of machine elements like transmission shaft, axle or lever, it is required to find out the maximum bending moment by constructing the bending moment diagram. There is a particular sign convention for bending moment diagram, which is illustrated in Fig, 4.7. For positive bending, the Negative bending Msi Fig. 4.7 Sign Convention jor Bending Moment bending moment diagram is constructed on the positive side of the Y-axis. For negative bending, the diagram is on the negative side of the ¥- axis. There is a simple way to remember positive bending. Imagine the crescent shaped moon—it is positive bending, 46 STRESSES DUE TO TORSIONAL MOMENT A transmission shaft, subjected to an external torque, is shown in Fig. 4.8 (a). The internal stresses, which are induced to resist the action aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 86 Design of Machine Elements (i) When the cotter is inserted in the slot through the socket and the spigot and pressed by means of bammer, it becomes tight due to wedge action. This ensures tightness of the joint in operating con loosening of the parts. (ii) Due to its taper shape, it is easy to remove the cotter and dismantle the joint. jon and prevents Socket eng Spigot end, Cotier| Cott Spigot _— Spigot Clearance Lee en ar +{ P. Rod-A + sockt—7 eel ‘Socket coll ie een Oe" |e Clearance a di Fig.4.11 Cotter Joint The taper of the cotter as well as slots is on one side. Machining a taper on two sides of a machine part is more difficult than making a taper on one side. Also, there is no specific advantage of a taper on two sides. A clearance of 1.5 to 3 mm is provided between the slots and the cotter. When the cotter is driven in the slots, the two rods are drawn together until the spigot collar rests on the socket collar, The amount by which the two rods are drawn together is called the draw of the cotter. The Cotter joint offers the following advantages: (i) The assembly and dismantling of parts of the cotter joint is quick and simple. The assembly consists of inserting the spigot end into the socket end and putting the cotter into their common slot. When the cotter is hammered, the rods are drawn together and tightened. Dismantling consists of removing the cotter from the slot by means of a hammer, (ii) The wedge action develops a very high tightening force, which prevents loosening of parts in service. (ii) The joint is simple manufacture. Free body diagram of forces acting on three components of cotter joint, viz., socket, cotter and spigot is shown in Fig, 4.12. This diagram is constructed by using the principle that actions and reactions are equal and opposite. The forces are determined in the following way, to design and aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 90 _Design of Machine Elements (viii) Crushing Failure of Socket End As shown in Fig. 4.14(c), the force P causes compressive stress on a narrow rectangular area of thickness ¢. The other dimension of rectangle, perpendicular to the plane of paper is (d, — d). Therefore, compressive stress in the socket end is given by, P 6, = Gay (4.25i) (ix) Bending Failure of Cotter When the cotter is tight in the socket and spigot, it is subjected to shear stresses. When it becomes loose, bending oceurs. The forces acting on the cotter are shown in Fig. 4.16(a). The force P between the cotter and spigot end is assumed as uniformly distributed over the length d,. The force between the socket end and cotter is assumed to be varying linearly from zero to maximum with triangular distribution, The cotter is treated as beam as shown in Fig. 4.16(b). For triangular distribution, aly il f daar rahy=i[ 2 Neutral ‘axis. Fig. 4.16 Cotter Treated as Beam (a) Actual Distribution of Forces (b) Simplified Diagrams of Forces The bending moment is maximum at the centre. At the central section, =o)? l* (4.25) - 4.25)) 2 The applications of strength equations from (4.25a) to (4.25)) in finding out the dimensions of the cotter joint are illustrated in the next example and the design project. In some cases, the dimensions of a cotter joint are calculated by using empirical relationships, without carrying out detail stress analysis, In such cases, following standard proportions can be used, @, = 12ld 24d Clearance ~ 1.5 to 3 mm. Taper for cotter= 1 in 32 4.10 DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR COTTER JOINT The basic procedure to calculate the dimensions of the cotter joint consists of the following steps: ( Calculate the diameter of each rod by Eq. (4.250), (ii) Calculate the thickness of the cotter by the empirical relationship given in Eq. (4.2S¢), 3d aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 94 Design of Machine Elements From Eq. (4.25)), Pid, 30 x 10° 50, (400 - $0) ] (51) 2 14 2 151) 2 t= 10.77 or 12mm and b= Example 4.4 fvo rods, made of plain carbon steel 40C8 (S,, = 380 Nimm?), are to be connected by means of a cotter joint. The diameter of each rod is 50 mm and the cotter is made from a steel plate of 15 mm thickness. Calculate the dimensions of the socket end making the following assumptions: 0mm (ii) () the yield strength in compression is twice of the tensile yield strength; and (ii) the yield strength in shear is 50% of the tensile yield strength, The factor of safety is 6. Solution Given 5,,=380Nimm* (%)=6 1=15mm d= 50mm Step 1 Permissible stresses Sy _ 2Sy _ 2(380) BH) (A) 6 05S, _ 0.5(380) (8) (4) 6 Sw _ 380 i 0, = = == = 63.33 Nimm (A) 6 Step H Load acting on rods @o, o P= $60? (63.33) = 124 348.16 N ‘Step I Inside diameter of socket (dy) From Eq. (4.256), Je r= [Fa x 4 124 348.16 [$4 - 44015} 6333) = 126.67 N/mm? 2 = 31.67 Nimm P= 4 or d?-19.1d, — 2500 =0 Solving the above quadratic equation, 4 = 60.45 or 65 mm @ Step IV Ouiside diameter of socket (dy) From Eq, (4.25d), P= [Fur -d3)-, ~4)¢] % 124 348.16 = [Eu — 65?) ~(d, — 65) es] (63.33) ord? 19.1 d, ~ 5483.59 =0 Solving the above quadratic equation, 1+ 19.7 g, ~ levis. 83.59) 4, =84.21 or 85 mm (i) Step V__ Diameter of socket collar (d,) From Eq. (4.25i), a 8G a)t 124 348.16 or 12667 = Ta 4,=13044 or 135mm (i) Step VI. Dimensions a and c From Eq. (4.250), __P_ __124348.16 O* Td ~ 2(65)GL67) From Eq. (4.258), ___P 124 348.16 ~ 2(d,-a,)t 2135 65)31.67) = 28.04 or 30mm (x) = 30.20 or 35 mm (iv) © 411 KNUCKLE JOINT Kauekle joint is used to connect two rods whose axes either coincide or intersect and lie in one plane, The knuckle joint is used to transmit axial tensile force. The construction of this joint permits limited angular movement between rods, about the axis of the pin. This type of joint is popular in aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 98 _Design of Machine Elements eee» () Fig.4.22 Pin Treated as Beam (a) Actual Distribution of Forces (b) Simplified Diagram of Forces x «| 4 Als, y= 24” ang a andy From Eq. (4.12), (4.268) (vi) Tensile Failure of Eye Section XX shown in Fig. 4.23(a) is the weakest section of the eye. The area of this section is given by, (dy- d) The tensile stress at section AX is given by, P P ose 8 OGTR HD (vii) Shear Failure of Eye The eye is subjected to double shear as shown in Fig. 4.23(b). The area of each of the two planes resisting the shear failure is Shear failure 0) = (dy — ay/2 approx. Fig 423 (a) Tensile Failure of Eye (o) Shear Failure of Eye aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 102 _Design of Machine Elements Trial I Suppose beam (ISLB 175) is suitable for the application. For this beam, Fog _ 1096.2 104 “y 7572) Since the required (/,, /v) is (151.51 x 103) mm?, beam (ISLB 175) is not suitable. Trial H_ Suppose beam (ISLB 200) is suitable for the application. For this beam, Toy _ 1696.6 x10* “y 20072) (Ug/¥) > (S151 * 103) mm? Therefore, the cantilever beams of standard cross-section ISLB 200 are suitable for this application. Example 4. 125.28 x10° mm? = 169.66 x10°mm* The frame of a hacksaw is shown , £26(a). The initial tension P in the blade should be 300 N. The frame is made of plain carbon steel 30C8 with a tensile yield strength of 400 Némn? and the factor of safety is 2.5. The cross- section of the frame is rectangular with a ratio of depth to width as 3, as shown in Fig. 4.26(b) Determine the dimensions of the cross-section. = Pee = aa | a Fig. 4.26 (a) Frame of Hacksaw (b) Section at XX Given (00 NS, = 400 N/mm? (depth/width) = 3 Step 1 Calcutation of permissible tensile stress Sy a 5 6, = = 2% =160Nimm? (A 235 Step IL Calculation of direct and bonding stresses The stresses at section XY consist of direct (= 25 compressive stress and bending stresses. The tensile stress is maximum at the lower fibre. At the lower fibre, P_ 300 _ 100 oe = a= DED N/mm? @ _ 300x200) (1.54 [5 © eo | f Step IIT Calculation of dimensions of cross-section Superimposing the two stresses and equating it to permissible stress, 40000 or 1607 + 100 r- 40000=0 Solving the above equation by trail and ewor method, 1263mm Example 4.8 An offiet link subjected to a force of 25 EN is shown in Fig. 4.27. It is made of grey cast iron FG300 and the factor of safety is 3. Determine the dimensions of the cross-section of the link. P. _t (OF 10H a Fig. 4.27. Offeet Link Solution Given 300N/imm? (fs)=3 Step I Calculation of permissible tensile stress for the link o, = Sw = 300 hy 3 Step I Calculation of direct tensile and bending stresses The cross-section is subjected to direct tensile stress and bending stresses. The stresses are maximum at the top fibre. At the top fibre, = 100 N/mm* {a) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 106 Design of Mackine Elements (ii) The shear stresses 1,, 1,, and the principal shear stress Tpax are plotted on the ordinate. A pair of shear stresses is considered as positive if they tend to rotate the element clockwise, and negative if they tend to rotate it anticlockwise. ‘The Mohr's circle in Fig. 4.30 (¢) is constructed by the following method: i) Plot the following points: Timo; 06 <0, AB Dat (ii) Join DB. The point of intersection of DB and OA is E. ii) Construct Mohr’s circle with £ as centre and DB asthe diameter. It can be proved that points F and G represent the maximum and minimum principal stresses 0, and @; respectively. The two principal shear stresses £Etyqx are denoted by points H and / respectively. 4.14 THEORIES OF ELASTIC FAILURE There are number of machine components, which are subjected to several types of loads simultaneously. For example, a power screw is subjected to torsional moment as well as axial force. Similarly, an overhang crank is subjected to combined bending and torsional moments. The bolts of the bracket are subjected to forces that cause tensile stress and shear stress. Crankshaft, propeller shaft and connecting rod are examples of components subjected to complex loads. When the component is subjected to several types of loads, combined stresses are induced. For example, torsional moment induces torsional shear stress, while bending moment causes bending stresses in the transmission shaft. The failures of such components are broadly classified into two groups—elastic failure and yielding and fracture. Elastic failure results in excessive elastic deformation, which makes the machine component unfit to perform its function satisfactorily. Yielding results in excessive plastic deformation after the yield point stress is reached, while fracture results in breaking the component into two or more pieces. Theories of failure discussed in this article are applicable to elastic failure of machine parts. The design of machine parts subjected to combined loads should be related to experimentally determined properties of material under ‘similar’ conditions. However, it is not possible to conduct such tests for different possible combinations of loads and obtain mechanical properties. In practice, the mechanical properties are obtained from simple tension test. They include yield strength, ultimate tensile strength and percentage elongation. In the tension test, the specimen is axially loaded in tension. It is not subjected to either bending moment or torsional moment or a combination of loads. Theories of elastic failure provide a relationship between the strength of machine component subjected to complex state of stresses with the mechanical properties obtained in tension test. With the help of these ‘theories, the data obtained in the tension test can be used to determine the dimensions of the component, irrespective of the nature of stresses induced in the component due to complex loads. Several theories have been proposed, each assum- ing a different hypothesis of failure. The principal theories of clastic failure are as follows: (i) Maximum principal stress theory (Rankine’s theory) Gi) Maximum. shear stress theory (Coulomb, Tresea and Guest's theory) Gi) Distortion energy theory (Huber von Mises and Hencky’s theory) (iv) Maximum strain theory (St. Venant’s theory) (v) Maximum total strain energy theory (Haigh’s theory) We will discuss the first three theories in this chapter. Let us assume o,, 6; and 0 as the principal stresses induced at a point on the machine part as a result of several types of loads. ‘We will apply the theories of failure to obtain the relationship between 0), d) and @ on one hand and the properties of material such as S,, or S,, on the other, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 100 _Design of Machine Elements Step 4: In the fourth quadrant, line FA is constructed such that, F-H= + Sy It is observed that the intercept of the above line on the X-axis (0; = 0) is (+ S,,) and intercept on the Yaxis (6, = 0) is (-S,). ‘The complete region of safety is the hexagon ABCDEFA. In case of bi-axial stress, if a point with coordinates (o,, o;) falls outside this hexagon region, then it indicates the failure condition. On the other hand, ifthe point falls inside the hexagon, the design is safe and the failure may not occur. Skear Diagonal Shear diagonal or line of pure shear is the locus of all points, corresponding 10 pure shear siress, It will be proved at a later stage (Fig. 4.35) that for pure shear stress, O=- = Te The above equation can be written as, tan (45°) Aline Gif is constructed in such a way that it passes through the origin O and makes an angle of -45° with the Y-axis. This line is called shear diagonal or line of pure shear. This line intersects the hexagon at two points Gand . The point of intersection of lines FA (6,-0,=+5,,) and GH [ ise. Solving two equations simultaneously, Since Since the point G is on the borderline, this is the limiting value for shear stress. or Sic + By ‘The maximum shear stress theory of failure is widely used by designers for predicting the failure of com- ponents, which are made of ductile materials, like transmission shaft. 417 DISTORTION-1 INERGY THEORY This theory was advanced by MT Huber in Poland (1904) and independently by R von Mises in Germany (1913) and H Hencky (1925). Itis known as the Huber von Mises and Hencky ’ theory. The theory states that the failure of the mechanical component subjected to bi-axial or tri-axial stresses occurs when the strain energy of distortion per unit volume at any point in the component, becomes equal to the strain energy of distortion per unit volume in the standard specimen of tension-test, when yielding starts. Aunitcube subjected to the three principal stresses 6}, 0; and ois shown in Fig. 4.34(a). The total strain energy U of the cube is given by, U = Zoe +h oer + 50% @ where &), & and &, are strains in respective direc- tions. 1 zl - Mo, +95)1 Abo, 4 = 1 & agin ~ HO, +5) ed Flos = Ho, +0,)] ) Substituting the above expressions in Eq. (a), 1 2 2 U = spllof +03 +03) BNE, 40,0;+00)1 ©) o on ® oN “anor oN Le (a) {b) () Fig. 434 (a) Element with Tri-axial Stresses (b) Stress ‘Components due to Distortion of Element (c) Stress Components due to Change of Volume The total strain energy U is resolved into two components—first U, corresponding to thé change of volume with no distortion of the element and the aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. ‘T14_Design of Machine Elements (Mj) p = 5000 x 500 = 2500 x 10? N-mm (Mura = 5000 x 500 + 5000 x 1500 = 10000 x 103 N-mm hj 1500 ——+~ 5004 = 4 H b @ Cla wal Fig. 4.39 Wall Bracket Solution q ) (©) 70000 x 10° Fig. 438 Step HI Calculation of dimensions of cross-section ‘The bending moment diagram isshown in Fig. 4.38(c). The cross-section at A is subjected to maximum bend- ing stress. For this cross-section, gow 12510) Qw'}=2 mnt 9) Cw) eet. oe 9 AIO E 2 ‘) w 3 Therefore, w=57.24mmor60mm = d=2w=120mm Example 4.12 4 wall bracket with a rectangular cross-section is shown in Fig. 4.39. The depth of the cross-section is twice of the width, The force P acting on the bracket at 60° to the vertical is 5 KN. The material of the bracket is grey cast iron FG 200 and the factor of safety is 3.5. Determine the dimensions of the cross-section of the bracket. Assume maximum normal stress theory of failure. Given P=S5kN Sq=200N/mm? (f)=3.5 diw=2 Step Calculation of permissible stress =Su 5714? =) (A) 35 Step 11 Calculation of direct and bending tensile stresses ‘The stress is maximum at the point A in the section XX. The point is subjected to combined bending and direct tensile stresses. The force P is resolved into two ‘components—horizontal component P,, and vertical component P,, P, sin 60° = 5000 sin 60° .. P,= P cos 60° = 5000 cos 60° = 2500 N The bending moment at the section XX is given by M,=P,X 150+, x 300 ~ 4330.13 x 150 +2500 x 300 = 1399.52 x 103 N-mm. Omax M, oan 3 ee Me) 099-28 410 Nmm? [oes] ' The direct tensile stress due to component P, is given by, B, _ 4330.13 _ 2165.07 pnt OS 4 2F P The vertical component P, induces shear stress.at the section XX. It is however small and neglected, N/mm? aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 118 _Design of Machine Elements in railway signal mechanisms and levers of hand pumps (ii) In the ‘second’ type of lever, the load is located between the fulcrum and the effort, as shown in Fig, 4.43(b). In this case, the effort arm is always more than the load arm and the mechanical advantage is more than 1. This type of lever is used in lever-loaded safety valves mounted on the boilers. (iii) In the ‘third? type of lever, the effort is located between the load and the fulcrum, as shown in Fig. 4.43(c). In this case, the load arm is always greater than the effort arm and the mechanical advantage is less than 1. This type of lever is not recommended in engineering applications. A picking fork is an example of this type of lever. Levers have wide applications, ranging from simple nutcrackers and paper punching machines to complex lever systems in scales and weighing machines. 4.20 DESIGN OF LEVERS Lever design is easy compared to design of other machine elements. The length of the lever is decided on the basis of leverage required to exert a given load F by means of an effort P. The cross-section of the lever is designed on the basis of bending stresses. The design of a lever consists of the following steps: Step 1: Force Analysis In any application, the load or the force F to be exerted by the lever is given. The effort required to produce this force is calculated by taking moments about the fulcrum. Therefore, FXh=Pxh or, (446) The free body diagram of forces acting on the “first” type of lever is shown in Fig. 4.44. R is the reaction at the fulcrum pin, Since the sum of vertical forces acting on the lever must be equal to zero, R=F+P (447) Fig. 4.44 Free body Diagram of Forces acting on First Lype of Lever The free body diagram of forces acting on the “second” type of lever is shown in Fig 4.45. In this case, the load and the effort act in opposite directions, Considering equilibrium of forces in a vertical direction, F=R+P on, Fig.4.45 Free body Diagram of Forces acting on Second type of Lever In the above two cases, the forces are assumed to be parallel. Sometimes, the forces F and P act along lines that are inclined to one another as shown in Fig. 446. In such cases, /, is the perpendicular distance from the fulcrum to the line of action of the force P. Similarly, is the Fig. 4.45 perpendicular distance from the fulcrum to the line of action of the force F. The following rules from statics apply to the reaction R at the fulcrum: aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 122_Desige of Machine Elements Taking moment of forces F and P about the ful- crum, FR=Pxl or 2945.24 100= Px 1000 A 29452N (b) The forces acting on the lever are shown in Fig. 4.51(a). Considering equilibrium of vertical forces, R+P or R=F-—P= 2945.24 ~ 294.52 = 2650.72 N (c) Fig.4.51 Bending Moment Diagram of Lever Step IH Diameter and length of pin From (a), (b)and (c), thepin at the point of application of the force F is subjected to maximum force and as such, itis to be designed from bearing consideration. Suppose, dj and J; are the diameter and the length of the pin ot F and assume, 4d, From Eq. (4.51), (d, x1) or 2945.24 =25 (d, Xd, ) 0.85 or 12 mm i=d,- 12mm @ The pin is subjected to double shear stress, which is given by, 5 Fp 252A 813.02 Nim? zp ® ay 22a ] 2[$ 0ay | 1< 40 Nimm? The force on the fulcrum pin (R) is comparatively less than the force acting on the spindle pin (F). Therefore, the dimensions d, and 1; of the pin at the fulcrum will be slightly less. However, we will assume both pins of the same diameter and length to facilitate interchangeability of parts and variety reduction. 4 Step IV Width and thickness oflever A gunmetal bush of 2-mm thickness is press fitted at both pinholes to reduce friction. Therefore, the inside diameter of the boss will be (d, +2 x 2) or (12 +2 2) or 16mm. The outside diameter of the boss is kept twice of the inside diameter, ie,, 32 mm. The bending moment diagram for the lever is shown in Fig. 4.51(b). The bending moment is maximum at the valve spindle axis. Itis given by, ‘M, = P (1000 ~ 100) = 294.52 (1000 - 100) = 265 068 N-mm For a lever, d= % 80= b=13.02 or 13mm d=3b=45mm The lever becomes weak due to the pinhole at the valve spindle axis and it is necessary to check bending stresses at this critical section. The cross- section of the lever at the valve spindle axis is shown in Fig. 4.52. In this case, the length of the k-1s—} Fig. 4.52. Cross-section of Lever pin is increased from 12 mm to 20 mm to get practical proportions for the boss. For this cross- section, 265 068 N-mm = y= 22.5 mm 1 5 3 3 Fp L!545)' +52" -2006)"] = 120 732.92 mm* aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 126 Design of Machine Elements Substituting, 7976 700.88)(5) 2 A [| b= 62.08 or 65 mm =2b= 130mm . 4.56(a), the axis of the tapped hole is parallel to dimension of the section. As shown in Fig, 4.56 (c), the solid rectangular section of the beam of thickness b can be split into two halves, cach having, a width (b/2) at the hole, so that the metallic area in a section through the hole is equal to the area of the solid section (/x 4). In this case, the factor of safety will remain unchanged. The diameter of the hole (d,) is the nominal diameter of the screw. Therefore, d,= 42mm bb 65, 65 dyad +2444 84 Se 107mm 22 2 Step V_ Diameter of pins As shown in Fig. 4.55(d), the pin is subjected to double shear. The force acting on all four pins at 4, B, Cand D is same and equal to (F/2). The shear stress in the pin is given by, (4) (& 2) eae A 2) 5 #] 4 d=25mm Step VI Diameter of links L, and Ly As shown in Fig. 4.55(e), the links are subjected to tensile stresses. or 25= 49087.39 2 50) =: 28a, 4 y= 25mm Step VII Dimensions of support The extensions or brackets on the vessel are part of, the casting of the cylinder. They act as cantilevers, As shown in Fig. 4.54, the maximum length of the cantilever can be taken as (325 - 250) or 75 mm, neglecting the thickness of the cylinder. Therefore, M, =15( £)=15( 22) 2 2 1840 777-13 N-mm Assuming h, = 20, bye _ 625) _ 2b! 1b4 12 3 Substituting, 1840 777.13(h,) [20] by = 41.02 or 45 mm hy=2b,=2x45=90mm. 40= Example 418 The mechanism of a bench- shearing machine is illustrated in Fig. 4.57. It is used to shear mild steel bars up to 6.25 mm diameter The ultimate shear strength of the material is 350 N/mm?. The link, lever and pins at B, C and D are made of steel FeE 250 (Sy, = 250 Nimn) and the factor of safety is 5. The pins at B, C and D are identical and their length to diameter ratio is 1.25. The permissible bearing pressure at the pins is 10 N/mm?. The link has circular cross-section. The cross-section of the lever is rectangular and the ratio of width to thickness is 2:1. Calculate (i) Diameter of pins at B, C and D; (ii) Diameter of the link (iit) Dimensions of the cross-section of the lever 400 Fig. 457 Bench Shearing Machine aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 130 _Design of Machine Elements 40 _ ue 0.5 3.0 A ¥ O7 2.0 10 eT 7 to ZEEE | i) 02 O4 06 08 {alb) ratio Fig. 4.62 _Y Factor for Plate with Central Crack There is a basic difference between stress intensity factor Ky and fracture toughness Kj, although they have the same units. The stress intensity factor Ky represents the stress level at the tip of the crack in the machine part. On the other hand, fracture toughness K, is the highest stress intensity that the part can withstand without fracture at the crack. ‘There are three basic modes of crack propagation as illustrated in Fig. 4.63. Mode-I is called the opening or tensile mode. \t is the most commonly observed mode of crack propagation. In this case, the crack faces separate symmetrically with respect to the crack plane. Mode-I! is called sliding or in- plane shearing mode. Mode-III is called tcaring mode. Mode-I and Mode-III are fundamentally shear modes of failures. oO Mode Node tl Mode til Fig. 4.63 Deformation Modes 22 CURVED BEAMS A curved beam is defined as a beam in which the neutral axis in unloaded condition is curved instead of straight. The following assumptions are made in the stress analysis of curved beam: ( Plane sections perpendicular to the axis of the beam remain plane after bending. (ii) The moduli of elasticity in tension and compression are equal, (iii) The material is homogeneous and obeys Hooke’s law. The distribution of stresses in a curved beam is shown in Fig. 4.64. There are two factors, which distinguish the analysis of straight and curved beams. They are as follows: () The neutral and centroidal axes of the straight beam are coincident. However, in a curved beam the neutral axis is shifted towards the centre of curvature. (ii) The bending stresses in a straight beam vary linearly with the distance from the neutral axis. This is illustrated in Fig. 4.5, However in curved beams, the stress distribution is hyperbolic. The following notations are used in Fig. 4.64: R,,= radius of outer fibre (mm) R, = radius of inner fibre (mm) radius of centroidal axis (mm) radius of neutral axis (mm) +h, = distance of inner fibre from neutral axis (mm) A, = distance of outer fibre from neutral axis (mm) M,,= bending moment with respect to centroidal axis (N-mm) A= area of the cross-section (mm?) The eccentricity e between centroidal and neutral axes is given by, e=R-Ry (454) The bending stress (o,) at a fibre, which is at a distance of y from the neutral axis is given by, 6, =— ey 4.58 Ae(Ry = y) G55) The equation indicates the hyperbolic distribution of (4) with respect to y. The maximum, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 134 Design of Machine Elements =1KN_ S,,= 400 Nimm? Step I Calculation of permissible tensile stress 5, ot 00 114.29 Nim? 6, me (BY 3.5 Step I Calculation of eccentricity (e) At the section XX, =3,9843D 4 e= R-Ry=4D- 3.9843 D=0.0157D Step I Calculation of bonding stress y- Ry = 3.9843) — 3.5D = 0.4843) D? =(0.7854D*) mm? M, = 1000 x 4D = (4000D) N-mm From Eq. (4.56), the bending stress at the inner fibre is given by, My (4000D)(0.4843D) © AeR, (0.7854D?0.0157D)3.5D) Z ( 44886.51 (ao Step IV Calculation of direct tensile stress _P___1000 ( 1273.24 “4 (0.788D) D* Ooi ) N/mm? @ ; ) wham (i) Step V- Calculation of dimensions of link Superimposing the bending and direct tensile stresses and cquating the resultant stress to permissible stress, we have Oi O= Srna (# 886.51 ) i ( 21324) eo D Dp D=20.10mm Example 4.21 The C-frame of a 100 kN capacity press is shown in Fig. 4.68(a). The material of the frame is grey cast iron FG 200 and the factor of safety is 3. Determine the dimensions of the frame. at 2t | 7st. Hl i | ist t 1), ste (b) Section at Xx Fig. 4.68 Soli Given P=100KN_ S,,=200 N/mm? ()=3 Step 1 Calculation of permissible tensile stress = Su. “(By Step IL Calculation of eccentricity (e) ns of Eq. (4.66) and Fig. [4.65(e)], Fras. From Eq. (4.66), Ry 5(b, D+th (6-nioa, (2 sna, (4) 1(3t - 0.751) + 0.751(3t) Gr-0.750) log, 24) +0.751 log, (2) By = 2.81340 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 138_ Design of Machine Elements 4.32 Where do you use distortion energy theory of failure? 4.33. What is fracture mechanics? 4.34 What is stress intensity factor in fracture mechanics? 435 What is fracture toughness in fracture mechanics? 4.36 What is a curved beam? Give practical examples of machine components made of curved beams. 4.37 Distinguish stress distribution in curved and straight beams. Problems for Practice 4.1 Two rods are connected by means of a knuckle joint es shown in Fig. 4.18. The axial force P acting on the rods is 25 KN. The rods and the pin are made of plain carbon steel 45C8 (S,, = 380 Nimm?) and the factor of safety is 2.5. The yield strength in shear is 57.7% of the yield strength in tension. Calculate: (i) the diameter of the rods, and (ii) the diameter of the pin. [14.47 mm (ii) 13.47 mm] 4.2 The force acting on a bolt consists of two components—an axial pull of 12 kN and a transverse shear force of 6 KN. The bolt is made of steel FeE 310 (S,, = 310 N/mm?) and the factor of safety is 2.5. Determine the diameter of the bolt using the maximum shear stress theory of failure. (13.2 mm) 43 The layout of a wall crane and the pin-joint connecting the tie-rod to the crane post is shown in Fig. 4.71(a) and (b) respectively. The tension in the tie-rod is meximum, when the load is at a distance of 2 m from the wall. The tie-rod and the pin are made of steel FeE 250 (S,,= 250 N/mm?) and the factor of safety is 3. Calculate the diameter of the tie- rod and the pin. (34.96 and 34 .96 mm) 44 A C-frame subjected to a force of 15 KN is shown in Fig. 4.72. It is made of grey cast iron FG 300 and the factor of safety is 2.5. Determine the dimensions of the cross- section of the frame. (t= 15.81 mm) ae Fig. 4.72 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 142 _Design of Machine Elements or G1) where g,and t, are stresses determined by elementary equations and Oya, 4Nd Taax ate localized stresses at the discontinuitics. The subscript ¢ denotes the ‘theoretical’ stress concentration factor. The magnitude of stress concentration factor depends upon the geometry of the component. The causes of stress concentration are as follows: @® Variation in Properties of Materials In design of machine components, it is assumed that the material is homogeneous throughout the component. In practice, there is variation in material properties from one end to another due to the following factors: (a) intemal cracks and flaws like blow holes; (b) cavities in welds; (©) airholes in ste! components; and (@) nonmetallic or foreign inclusions. These variations act as discontinuities in the component and cause stress concentration. i) Load Application Machine components are subjected to forces. These forces act either at a point or overasmall area on the component. Since the area is small, the pressure at these points is excessive. This results in stress concentration. The examples of these load applications are as follow: (a) Contact between the meshing teeth of the driving and the driven gear {b) Contact between the cam and the follower (©) Contact between the balls and the races of ball bearing (@) Contact between the rail and the wheel (©) Contact between the crane hook and the chain In all these cases, the concentrated load is applied over a very small area resulting in stress concentration. Gi) Abrupt Changes in Section In order to mount gears, sprockets, pulleys and ball bearings on a transmission shaft, steps are cut on the shaft and shoulders are provided from assembly considerations. Although these features are essential, they create change of the cross-section of the shaft. This results in stress concentration at these cross-sections. iv) Discontinuities in the Component Certain features of machine components such as oil holes or oil grooves, keyways and splines, and screw threads result in discontinuities in the cross-section of the component. There is stress concentration in the vicinity of these discontinuities. (&) Machining Scratches Machining scratches, stamp marks or inspection marks are surface irregularities, which cause stress concentration, 5.2 STRESS CONCENTRATION FACTORS The stress concentration factors are determined by two methods, viz., the mathematical method based on the theory of elasticity and experimental methods like photo-elasticity. For simple geometric shapes, the stress concentration factors are determined by photo- elasticity. The charts for stress concentration factors for different geometric shapes and conditions of loading were originally developed by RE Peterson’ At present, FEA packages are used to find out the stress concentration factor for any geometric shape. The chart for the stress concentration factor for a rectangular plate with a transverse hole loaded in tension or compression is shown in Fig. 5.2. The nominal stress ¢, in this case is given by, __* ~ (wd) where fis the plate thickness. ‘The values of stress concentration factor for a flat plate with a shoulder fillet subjected to tensile or compressive force are determined from Fig. 5.3. The nominal stress @, for this case is given by, P a ($3) (5.2) oo "RE Peterson — Siress concentration design factors, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 146 _Design of Machine Elements Q= Juda (a) ‘When the cross-section of the plate has the same dimensions throughout, the stresses are uniform and stress lines are equally spaced. The stress at any section is given by, P=foda () When the cross-section of the channel is suddenly reduced, the velocity increases in order tomaintainthe same flow and the streamlines become narrower and narrower and crowd together. A similar phenomenon is observed ina stressed plate. In order totransmit the same force, the stress lines come closer and closer as the cross-section is reduced. At the change of cross-section, the streamlines as well as stress lines bend. When there is sudden change in cross-section, bending of stress lines is very sharp and severe resulting in stress concentration. Therefore, stress concentration can be greatly reduced by reducing the bending by rounding the comers. Streamlined shapes are used in channels to reduce turbulence and resistance to flow. Streamlining, or rounding the counters of mechanical components, has similar beneficial effects in reducing siress concentration. ‘There are different methods to reduce the bending of the stress lines at the junction and reduce the stress concentration. In practice, reduction of stress concentration is achieved by the following methods: () Additional Notches and Holes in Tension Member A flat plate with a V-notch subjected to tensile force is shown in Fig. 5.9(a). It is observed that a single notch results in a high degree of stress concentration. The severity of stress concentration is reduced by three methods: (a) use of multiple notches; (b) drilling additional holes; and (c) removal of undesired material. These methods are illustrated in Fig. 5.9(b), (c) and (4) respectively. The method of removing undesired material is called the principle of minimization of the material. In these three methods, the sharp bending of a force flow line is reduced and it follows a smooth curve. (©) S Removal of @ material Fig. 5.9 Reduction of Stress Concentration due to V-notch: (a) Original Notch (b) Multiple Notches (©) Drilled Holes (d) Removal of Undesirable Material (ii) Fillet Radius, Undercutting and Notch for Member in Bending A bar of circular cross-section with ashoulder and subjected to bending moment is shown in Fig. 5.10(a). Ball bearings, gears or pulleys are seated against this shoulder, The shoulder creates a change in cross-section of the shaft, which results in stress concentration. There are three methods to reduce stress concentration at the base of this shoulder. Figure 5.10(b) shows the shoulder with a fillet radius r. This results in gradual transition from small diameter to a large diameter. The fillet radius should be as large as possible in order to reduce stress concentration, In practice, the fillet radius is limited by the design of mating components. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 150_ Design of Machine Elements In many applications, the components are subjected to forces, which are not static, but vary in magnitude with respect to time. The stresses induced due to such forces are called fluctuating stresses. It is observed that about 80% of failures of mechanical components are due to ‘fatigue failure’ resulting Jrom fluctuating stresses. In practice, the pattern of stress variation is irregular and unpredictable, as in case of stresses due to vibrations. For the purpose of design analysis, simple models for siress-time relationships are used. The most popular model for stress-time relationship is the sine curve. ‘There are three types of mathematical models for cyclic stresses—fluctuating or alternating stresses, repeated stresses and reversed stresses. Stress-time relationships for these models are illustrated in Fig. 5.15. The fluctuating or alternating stress varies ina sinusoidal manner with respect to time. It has some mean value as well as amplitude value. It fluctuates between two limits—maximum and minimum stress. The stress can be tensile or compressive or partly tensile and partly compressive. The repeated stress varies in a sinusoidal manner with respect Stress to time, but the variation is from zero to some maximum value. The minimum stress is zero in this case and therefore, amplitude stress and mean stress are equal. The reversed stress varies in a sinusoidal manner with respect to time, but it has zero mean stress. In this case, half portion of the cycle consists of tensile stress and the remaining half of compressive stress. There is a complete reversal from tension to compression between these two halves and therefore, the mean stress is zero. In Fig. $.15, Onax, and Gin, are maximum and minimum stresses, while 6,, and G,, are called mean stress and stress amplitude respectively. It can be proved that, 1 (69) Sm 2 (nas. + Fria) 5 On —Gryin.) (5.10) Inthe analysis of fluctuating stresses, tensile stress is considered as positive, while compressive stress as negative. It can be observed that repeated stress and reversed stress are special cases of fluctuating stress with (On, = 0) and (6,,= 0) respectively. (@) Fluctuating stresses Stress 4 (b) Repeated stresses. % 7 () Reversed stresses Fig. 5.15 Types of Cyclic Stresses aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 154_Devign of Machine Elements low-cyele fatigue. Any fatigue failure when the number of stress cycles are more than 1000, is called Aigh-cycle fatigue. Gi) Failure of studs on truck wheels, failure of setscrews for locating gears on shafts or failures of short-lived devices such as missiles are the examples of low-cycle fatigue. The failure of machine components such as springs, ball bearings or gears that are subjected to fluctuating stresses, are the examples of high-cycle fatigue. (ii) The low-cycle fatigue involves plastic yielding at localized areas of the components. logro Sr limit stress There are some theories of low-cycle fatigue. However, in many applications, the designers simply ignore the fatigue effect when the number of stress cycles are less than 1000. A greater factor of safety is used to account for this effect. Such components are designed on the basis of ultimate tensile strength or yield strength with a suitable factor of safety. Components subjected to high-cycle fatigue are designed on the besis of endurance limit stress. SV curves, Soderberg lines, Gerber lines or Goodman diagrams are used in the design of such components. The discussion in this chapter is restricted to high-cycle fatigue failure of machine elements. | ! ' poi : ' | ! i i ! ! i ' Fig. 5.21 Low and High Cycle Fatigue 5.8 NOTCH SENSITIVITY It is observed that the actual reduction in the endurance limit of a material due to stress concentration is less than the amount indicated by the theoretical stress concentration factor K,. Therefore, two separate notations, K, and Kare used for stress concentration factors. K, is the theoretical stress concentration factor, as defined in previous sections, which is applicable to ideal materials that are homogeneous, isotropic and elastic. K, is the fatigue stress concentration factor, which is defined 2s follows: Endurance limit of the notch free specimen Endurance limit of the notched specimen K, This factor K, is applicable to actual materials and depends upon the grain size of the material. It is observed that there is @ greater reduction in the endurance limit of fine-grained materials as compared to coarse-grained materials, due to stress concentration. Notch sensitivity is defined as the susceptibility ofa material 10 succumb (o the damaging effects of stress raising notches in fatigue loading, The notch sensitivity factor q is defined as _ Increase of actual stress over nominal stress Increase of theoretical stress over nominal stress Since ¢,, = nominal stress as obtained by elementary equations aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 1158 _Design of Machine Elements The above equation is also valid for a hollow rotating shaft, 0.98o%ax Aas (b) Area above 95% of maximum stress Fig. 5.25, The ‘effective’ diameter of any non-circular cross-section is then given by, (5.22) where, Ags = portion of cross-sectional area of the non- cylindrical part that is stressed between 95% and 100% of the maximum stress d, = effective diameter of the non-cylindrical part Formulae for areas that are stressed between 95% and 100% of maximum stress for commonly used cross-sections loaded in bending, are given in Fig. 5.26. For a non-rotating solid shafi, Ags = 0.0105d* From Eqs (5.22) and (5.23), 6.23) 105d? d, e 31d (5.24) 0.0766 The above effective diameter d, is used to find out the size factor for the non-rotating cylindrical component. Rotating ‘Ags = 0.0766 ? Nor-rotating ‘Ags = 0.0105 d? Nor-rotating |. Aes = 0.05 bh bo t ‘Non-rotating 10b¢ | ! ue Fig.5.26 Area above 95% of Maximum Stress For a rectangular cross-section having width 6 and depth h, Ags = 0.08 bh 6.28) From Eqs (5.22) and (5.25), 10.05bh d, ane 0.808Vbh (5.26) The above effective diameter d, is used to find out the size factor from Table 5.2 or Eqs (5.19) and (5.20). A similar procedure is followed for I-section beam. Reliability Factor The laboratory values of endurance limit are usually mean values. There is aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 162 _Design of Machine Elements (S.)q = 0.85, = 0.8(90.54) = 72.43 N/mm? 5, = Sada BA _ 96.99 Nim? (A) 2 Step TIT Plate thickness P Since = Gop P8010) 97 61am “30c, — 50(36.22) Finite-life Problems (Reversed Load) Example 5.6 A rotating bar made of steel 45C8 (Sy = 630 N/mm?) is subjected to a completely reversed bending stress. The corrected endurance limit of the bar is 315 N/mm’. Calculate the fatigue strength of the bar for a life of 90,000 cycles. Solution Given S,,=630 N/mm? N= 90000 cycles Step1 Construction of SN diagram 0.95,, = 0.9 (630) = 567 N/mm? logig (0.98,,) = logyo(567) = 2.7536 Logg (S,) = log,9(315) = 2.4983 Jogo (90 000) = 4.9542 Also, logig(10°)=3 and logy) (10)°=6 Figure 5.30 shows the S-N curve for the bar. oa s0S1 5, =315 Nimm? 2.7536 (25873) 2.4983 4.9542 Fig. 5.30 Step H Fatigue strength for 90000 cycles Referring to Fig. 5.30, (2.7536 — 2.4983) log!0 (S;) = 2.7536 — 8105) Cs) x (4.9542 — 3) = 2.5873 Sj= 386.63 Nimm Example 5.7 4 forged steel bar, 50 mm in diameter, is subjected to a reversed bending stress of 250 Nimm?. The bar is made of steel 40C8 (Sy = 600 N/mm’). Cateulaie the life of the bar jor a reliability of 90%. Solution Given $= 0,=250 Nimm? S,= 600 Niam? R= 90% Step Construction of SN diagram S’ = 0.55, = 0.5(600) = 300 N/mm? From Fig. 5.24, (S,,= 600 N/mm? and forged bar), K,=044 For 50 mm diameter, K, = 0.85 For 90% reliability, K, = 0.897 44(0.85) (0.897) (300) 0.98, = 0.9(600) = 540 N/mm? Login (0.95,,) = logio (540) = 2.7324 Also, logig (109)=3 and logy (10%) =6 The S-N curve for the bar is shown in Fig. 5.31 logiaSy og:0N Fig. 5.31 Step Fatigue life of bar From Fig. 5.31, ria DBx AE _ (6-3)2.7324- 2.3979) AD (2.7324 — 2.0028) = 1.3754 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 166 _Design of Machine Elements Therefore, 10g Sj= 2.6866 — AE = 2.6866 — 0.198 = 2.4886 $,= 308.03 Nimm? 32M, Sy o me ee ge = 32Mz, _ 321000150) mS, 70(308.03) d= 17.05 mm 5.11 CUMULATIVE DAMAGEIN, FATIGUE In certain applications, the mechanical component is subjected to different stress levels for different parts of the work cycle. The life of such a component is determined by Miners equation. Suppose that a component is subjected to completely reversed stresses (0}) for (m) eycles, (03) for (12) cycles, and so on. Let N, be the number of stress cycles before fatigue failure, if only the altemating stress (6,) is acting. One stress cycle will consume (1/N,) of the fatigue life and since there are n, such cycles at this stress level, the proportionate damage of fatigue life will be [(1/N,)m] or (74/M%). Similarly, the proportionate damage at stress level (,) will be (n/N). Adding these quantities, we get nm nm ye] Ni N2 Ny The above equation is known as Miner's equation. Sometimes, the number of cycles 1, 1, at stress levels 0}, G>,... are unknown, Suppose that %,, @,... are proportions of the total life that will be consumed by the stress levels 0), 03,... ete, Let V be the total life of the component. Then, m=a,N y= 0,N Substituting these values in Miner’s equation, % Shy Ny (533) (534) (5.35) ‘With the help of the above equations, the life of the component subjected to different stress levels can be determined. Example 5.11 The work cycle of @ mechanical component subjected to completely reversed bending stresses consists of the following three elements: (i) +350 Nimm? for 85% of time (ii) £400 N/mm? for 12% of time (iii) + 500 N/mm? for 3% of time The material for the component is 50C4 (S, 660 Nimm?) and the corrected endurance limit of the component is 280 N/mm’. Determine the life of the component. Solution Given 5,,-660N/mm’ 5,= 280 N/mm? StepI Consiruction of S~N diagram 0.9Sut = 0.9(660) = 594 N/mm? Jogl0 (0.95,,) = logjo (594) = 2.738 Jogo (S,) = logy (280) = 2.4472 YoRio (61) = logo (350) = 2.5441 Jogo (G2) = log; (400) = 2.6021 log ig (03) = logy (500) = 2.6990 The S-N curve for this problem is shown in Fig. 5.38. logioSr 2.738 E F logyoo {££ 2.4472 be a z L 1. 34 5 6 logo logioN Fig. 5.38 Step I Calculation of N,, Npand N3 From Fig. 5.38, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 170_Design of Machine Elements Step I Endurance limit stress for cantilever beam §%,=0.55,,= 0.5 (600) = 300 N/mm? From Fig. 5.24 (cold drawn steel and S,, = 600 Nimm), K,=0.17 Assuming 7.5=15 a d From Fig. 5.5, K,= 1.44 From Eq. (5.12), K= 1+ (K,-1)= 1409 (144-1) = 1.396 1 4 See 0716 Ke K, 1.396 S.= KK, K, Ky S. .77 (0.85) (0.897) (0.716) (300) 26.11 N/mm? Step 11 Construction of modified Goodman diagram At the fillet cross-section, 150 x 100 (Mi denas. Myra (Mp mn = FU ame + Me nin] = 1150005000] 000 N-mm [My )amax. ~My Yes.) O= 63.435° ‘The modified Goodman diagram for this example is shown in Fig. 5.43. Step I Permissible stress amplitude Refer to Fig. 5.43. The coordinates of the point Xare determined by solving the following two equations simultaneously. (8¢08) (380) (600) Fig.5.43, (i) Equation of line AB can = @ (ii) Equation of line OX Se = ano =2 ) Sm Solving the two equations, S,=114.12N/mm? and S,,= 57.06 Nimm? Step IV Diameter of beam Sa, 32(Mo a _ Sa (A) nd (A) 3210000) _ 114.12 nd (2 Since 0, = @=12.13 mm Example 5.13 4 transmission shafi of cold drawn steel 27Mn2 (S,, = 500 N/mm? and S,, = 300 N/mm) is subjected to a fluctuating torque which varies from -100 N-m to + 400 N-m. The factor of safety is 2 and the expected reliability is 90%. Neglecting the effect of stress concentration, determine the diameter of the shaft. Assume the distortion energy theory of failure. Solution Given M,=-100 N-m to + 400 N-m $,y= 500 Nimm? S,,=300 Nimm? R=90% (f)=2 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 174 _Design of Machine Elements log1os, A 3.0512 tog105), (2.6260) 2.4447 fogiol Fig. 5.49 Sl ADXEF _ (3.0512-2.41475-3) DB (6-3) 1.4243 Therefore, at 10° cycles the fatigue strength is 423.55 N/mm?. StepIV Construction of modified Goodman diagram Supose, Prax =P and Paig, = 0 a= 45° ‘The modified Goodman diagram for this example is shown in Fig. 5.50. Step V_ Permissible stress amplitude Refer to Fig. 5.50. The coordinates of point X are determined by solving the following two equations simultaneously. @_ Equation of line 4B S, 5S, +e 423.55 "1250 (a) (ii) Equation of line OX tan @ =1 () Solving the two equations, a= Sp, = 316.36 Nimm? (423.55)S; Sa! Sm Sut (1250) Fig, 5.50 Step VI Maximum force on bar . P/2 Since =[|— area ‘The minimum cross-section of the bar is shown in Fig. 5.51. 2 —s00 Fig. 5.51 or 316.36 ceo 230-4? 4oe hy P= 335 920.5 N or 336 KN 5.14 GERBER EQUATION The Soderberg line and Goodman line illustrated in Fig. 5.39 are straight lines, The theories using such straight lines for predicting fatigue failure are called ‘linear’ theories. There are some theories that use parabolic or elliptical curves instead of straight lines. ‘These theories are called ‘non-linear’ theories. One aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 178 Design of Machine Elements Example 5.19 A machine component is subjected to two-dimensional stresses. The tensile stress in the X direction varies from 40 to 100 Nhnm? while the tensile stress in the Y direction varies from 10 to 80 Nimm?. The frequency of variation of these siresses is equal. The corrected endurance limit of the component is 270 N/mm’. The ultimate tensile sirength of the material of the component is 660 Némm?. Determine the factor of safety used by the designer. Given (6,)mux. = 100 N/mm? (min, = 40 Némm? (0,)max, = 80 Nimm? (0, min, = 10 N/mm? S,,= 600 N/mm? S, = 270 Nimm? Step 1 Mean and amplitude stresses Ow = jtt00 +40) = 70 N/mm? (100-40) =30N/mm? Om = (80 +10) = 45 Nema? on = $60-10)=35 Ninn? 2 Om = Gin ~ FonFym + Fyn) = yI(70)° ~(70)(45) + (45)"] = 6144N/mm? (ia — FxaF ya + Fa) = G0)" - (3035) + 35)"] = 32.79 Nimm Step I Construction of modified Goodman diagram = 0.534 or 0= 28.09° ‘The modified Goodman diagram for this example is shown in Fig. 5.55. Step IT Permissible stress amplitude Refer to Fig. 5.55. The co-ordinates of the point are obtained by solving the following two equations simultaneously. oe (270) Se % x a Se on Sut (680) @) <2 = tan = 0.534 () 152.88 N/mm? Sy = 286.29 N/mm? Step IV Factor of safety S, 152.88 =24 = 4.66 Bao" 3279 Example 5.20 4 transmission shaft carries @ pulley midway between the two bearings. The bending moment at the pulley varies from 200 N-m to 600 N-m, as the torsional moment in the shaft varies from 70 N-m to 200 N-m. The “frequencies of variation of bending and torsional ‘moments are equal to the shaft speed. The shaft is made of steel FeE 400 (Sy, = 540 N/mm? and Sy, = 400 Nimm?). The corrected endurance limit of the shaft is 200 N/mm?. Determine the diameter of the shaft using a factor of safety of 2. Solution Given (M))qax = 200 N-m C4) min. = 70N-m (My)mnas, = 600 N-m_ (My)nxin, = 200 N-m_—S,,= 540 N/mm? S=400. N/mm? S, = 200 N/mm? (f) = 2 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 182 _Design of Machine Elements = 0.5363] 1+ b+ —22)_ (3.855107) = 193.68 N/émm? 6,<200 N/mm? Short-Answer Questions 5.1 5.2 53 5.4 55 5.6 $12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 S17 5.18 519 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 5.24 5.25 5.26 5.27 5.28 ‘Whaat is stress concentration? How will youaccount forstress concentration in design of machine parts? ‘What is stress concentration factor? ‘What are the causes of stress concentration? What are the methods of reducing stress concentration? ‘What is fluctuating stress? Draw a stress-time curve for fluctuating stress. What is repeated stress? Draw a stress-time curve for repeated stress. What is reversed stress? Draw a stress-time curve for reversed stress. What is fatigue failure? What are the machine components that fail by fatigue? What is the difference between failure due to static load and fatigue failure? What is endurance limit? What is fatigue life? What is S-N curve? What is low-cycle fatigue? Give practical examples of low-cycle fatigue failure. What is high-cycle fatigue? Give practical examples of high-cycle fatigue failure. ‘What is fatigue stress concentration factor? What is notch sensitivity? What is notch sensitivity factor? ‘What are the factors that affect endurance limit of a machine part? ‘What is surface finish factor? ‘Whaat is size factor? What is reliability factor? ‘What is modifying factor to account for stress concentration? What is Miner’s equation? Where do you use Miner's equation? 5.29 5.30 331 5.32 5.33 3.34 ‘What is the Goodman line? What is the Soderberg line? Explain the modified Goodman diagram for bending stresses. Explain the modified Goodman diagram for torsional shear stresses. What is the Gerber curve? What is the difference between the Gerber curve and Soderberg and Goodman lines? Problems for Practice 5.1 A rectangular plate, 15 mm thick, made 53 of a brittle material is shown in Fig. 5.58. Calculate the stresses at each of three holes, of 3, 5 and 10 mm diameter. [161.82, 167.33 and 200 N/mm?) ISS [20 mn 20Kn= Fig. 5.58 5.2 Around shafi made of a brittle material and subjected to a bending moment of 15 N-m is shown in Fig. 5.59. The stress concentration factorat the filletis 1.5 and the ultimate tensile strength of the shaft material is 200 N/mm?, Determine the diameter d, the magnitude of stress at the fillet and the factor of safety. [UL.76 mm, 140.91 N/mm’, and 1.42) A shaft carrying a load of $ kN midway between two bearings is shown in Fig. 5.60. Determine the maximum bending stress at aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 186 Design of Machine Elements Gil) The axial wear on the surface of trapezoidal threads can be compensated by means of a split-type of nut. The nut is cut into two parts along the diameter, When the threads get worn ‘out, the wo halves of the nut are tightened together. The split-type nut can be used only for trapezoidal threads. It is used in lead-screw of a lathe to compensate wear at periodic intervals by tightening the two halves, The disadvantages of trapezoidal threads are as follows: (i) The efficiency of trapezoidal threads is less than that of square threads. (ii) Trapezoidal threads result in side thrust or radial pressure on the nut. The radial pressure or bursting pressure on the nut affects its performance. There is a special type of trapezoidal thread called acme thread. \t is shown in Fig. 62. ‘Trapezoidal and acme threads are identical in all respects except the thread angle. In an acme thread, the thread angle is 29° instead of 30°. The relative advantages and disadvantages of acme threads are same as those of trapezoidal threads, Pit, 4 pi 7 Zi Fig. 6.2 Acme Threads There is another type of thread called buttress thread. \t is shown in Fig. 6.3. It combines the advantages of square and trapezoidal threads. Buttress threads are used where a heavy axial force acts along the screw axis in one direction only. The advantages of buttress threads are as follows: (i) lt has higher efficiency compared with trapezoidal threads. (ii) Tt can be economically manufactured on a thread milling machine. (iii) The axial wear at the thread surface can be compensated by means of a split-type nut. " 1S 4694~1968: Basic dimensions for square threads. (iv) A screw with buttress threads is stronger than an equivalent screw with either square threads or trapezoidal threads. This is because of greater thickness at the base of the thread. Fig.6.3 Buttress Threads The buttress threads have one disadvantage. It can transmit power and motion only in one direction. On the other hand, square and trapezoidal threads can transmit force and motion in both directions. Square threads are used for screw jacks, presses and clamping devices. Trapezoidal and acme threads are used for lead-screw and other power transmission devices in machine tools. Buttress threads are used in vices, where force is applied only in one direction. Buttress threads are ideally suited for connecting tubular components that must carry large forces such as connecting the barrel to the housing in anti-aircraft guns. The standard proportions of square and ISO metric trapezoidal threads are given in Tables 6.1 and 6.2 respectively. !:? Pitch, p | (nm) [ 3 30, 32, 36 6 | aos 7 48, 50, 52 8 55,50 9 65, 70,75, 80 10 85,90, 95, 100 R 15 7008-1988: ISO metric trapezoidal screw threads (in four parts). aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 190 Design of Machine Elements W(w- tana) (+p tana) Substituting =tan @ in Eq. (c), tc) W tang — tance) G+ tang an) or P=Wtan(@-a@) and M,= ae tan($- a} (6.7) (68) 6.7 SELF-LOCKING SCREW The torque required to lower the load can be obtained by Eq. (6.8). Rewriting the equation, Wd M,= ~ 5" tan ($- @) it can be seen that when; ¢ < othe torque required to lower the load is negative. It indicates a condition that no force is required to lower the load, The load itself will begin to turn the screw and deseend down, unless a restraining torque is applied. This condition is called overhauling of the screw. This condition is also called back driving of screw. This property is not useful in screw-jack applications. However, it is useful in some other applications like a Yankee screwdriver. In this type of screwdriver, there is a high-lead thread on the barrel and the handle isa nut, As the worker pushes the handle axially down, the barrel tums and drives the wood screw into place. When @ > @ a positive torque is required to lower the load. Under this condition, the load will not tum the screw and will not descend on its own unless an effort P is applied. In this case, the screw is said t0 be ‘selflocking’. A self-locking. screw will hold the load in place without a brake. This is a very useful property in screw-jack application. For example, the driver can jack up the car and leave the jack handle and carry out the work, The car will not descend on its own during the work and the river can do the work without any tension. Neglecting collar friction, the rule for a self locking screw is as follow: “A screw will be self-locking if the coefficient of friction is equal to or greater then the tangent of the helix angle”. For a self-locking screw, ora tan p> tan @ 1 war (69) The following conclusions are drawn by examination of Eq. (6.9). () Self-locking of screw is not possible when the coefficient of friction (1) is low, The coefficient of friction between the surfaces of the screw and the nut is reduced by lubrication. Excessive lubrication may cause the load to descend on its own. (ii) Self-locking property of the screw is lost when the lead is large. The lead increases with a number of starts. For a double-start thread, the lead is twice of the pitch and for a triple-threaded screw, it is three times of the pitch. Therefore, single-threaded screw is better than multiple-threaded screws from self-locking considerations. Self-locking condition is essential in applications like screw jacks. 68 EFFICIENCY OF SQUARE THREADED SCREW Let us refer to the force diagram for lifting the load, illustrated in Fig. 6.6. Suppose the load W moves from the lower end to the upper end of the inglined plane. The output consists of raising the load. Therefore, Work output = force x distance travelled in the direction of force = (W1) The input consists of rotating the screw by means of an effort P. Work input = force x distance traveled in the direction of force = P(r d,,) The efficiency 1 of the screw is given by, work output WW work input Prd, PUN® (@) Substituting Eq. (6.5) in the above equation, tana. tan (6+ 0) 6.10) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 194 Design of Machine Elements the normal force on the collar surface is, the frictional force over the collar surface is y.W. It is assumed that frictional force is concentrated at the mean collar diameter D,, as shown in Fig. 6.10(b). This force acts opposite to the rotation of the collar surface, The collar friction torque is given by, (Qa nt () @ where Dy (222) () Substituting Eq. (b) in Eq (a), we get, (64). = 2 (Dy +0) In certain applications, the collar between the cup and the screw is replaced by thrust ball bearing to reduce friction. The advantage of using thrust ball bearing at the collar is that the sliding friction is replaced by rolling friction. The collar friction torque becomes almost negligible in these cases. Eqs (6.17) and (6.18) should not be used where rolling contact bearings are employed to take the thrust reaction. 2. OVERALL EFFICIENCY The total external torque required to raise the load consists of two factors—the torque required to overcome friction at the thread surface and the collar friction torque. Therefore, (M), = M, + (AM). (6.19) where (M)),= extemal torque required to raise the load (N-mm), M,= torque required to overcome friction at the thread surface (N-mm); and (M),.= collar friction torque (N-mm) Let us again refer to the force diagram for lifting the load shown in Fig. 6.6. Suppose the load W moves from the lower end to the upper end of the inclined plane. The output consists of raising the load. Work output = force x distance traveled in the direction of force = (7) The input consists of torque applied to the screw (Mp ‘Work input ~ torque x angle tumed through =[04),2n)) The overall efficiency 1p of the power screw is given by, _ work output WI Mo “Work input (M,), x27 on 6.20 or, tan: (6.20) 6.13 COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION It has been found that the coefficient of iriction (w) at the thread surface depends upon the workmanship in cutting the threads and on the type of the lubricant. It is practically independent of the load, rubbing velocity or materials. An average value of 0.15 can be taken for the coefficient of friction at the thread surface, when the screw is lubricated with mineral oil. The values of the coefficient of friction (u.) for the thrust collar with sliding contact are given in Table 6.3, When thrust ball bearing is used at the collar surface, its coefficient of friction is about 1/10th of plain sliding surface. It varies from 0.01 to 0.02. Table 6.3 Coefficient of friction for thrust collars ‘Material combination ie Starting < Running Soft-stee! — cast iron O47 O1e Hardened stecl—castiron 0.15 0.09 Soft stee! — bronze 0.10 8.08 Hardened stezl—bronze 0.08 0.06 6.14 DESIGN OF SCREW AND NUT There are three basic components of a power screw, viz., screw, nut and frame. The desirable properties of screw material are as follows: (i) It should have sufficient strength to withstand stresses due to external load and applied torque. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 198 Design of Machine Elements From Eq. (6.18), Ww (.= B= (Do +D) O17IW (55 + 4! = (4.25 W)N-mm (b) Step 11 Clamping force developed between jaws (W) The total external torque applied to the handle is (125 x 150) N-mm. Therefore, (4), = M, + (M). or 125 150 = 2.286 W+4.25 W W= 2868.73 N @ Step IIT Overall efficiency of clamp From Eq. (6.20), WI _ (2868.73)(5) _ 0.1218 No” 35(M,), 2x (125x150) or 12.18% @ Example 6.4 The construction of a gate Valve used in high-pressure pipeline is shown in Fig. 6.13. The screw is rotated in its place by means of the handle. The nut is fixed to the gat. When the screw rotates, the nut along with the gate moves downward or upward depending upon — es | Handle Thrust washer wy | Gate Fig. 6.13 Gate Vatoe the direction of rotation of the screw. The screw has single-start square threads of 40 mm outer diameter and 7 mm pitch. The weight of the gate is 5 KN. The water pressure in the pipeline induces frictional resistance between the gate and its seat. The resuliant frictional resistance in the axial direction is 2 KN. The inner and outer diameters of thrust washer are 40 and 80 mm respectively. The values of coeficient of friction at the threads and at the washer are 0.15 and 0.12 respectively. The handle is rotated by the two arms, each exerting equal force at a radius of 500 mm from the axis of the screw: Calculate (V) the maximum force exerted by each arm when the gate is being raised: (ii) the maximum force exerted by each arm when the gate is being lowered: (iii) the efficiency of the gate mechanism; and (iv) the length of the nut, if the permissible bearing pressure is 5 N/mm’. Solution Given For screw, H=0.15 Forcollar, D,=80mm D,=40 mm w= 0.12 Forhandle, radius = $00 mm Fornut 5,=5 Nimm? For gate,weight = 5 kN frictional resistant = 2 KN =40mm /=p=7mm Step 1 Force exerted by each arm to raise the gate From Eq. (6.2), dy, =d-0.5 p= 40-0.5(7) =36.5 mm ana! 7 nO Gd, B63) 0.061 or @=3,493° =H=0.15 or 531°, Frictional resistance acts opposite to the motion. When the gate is being raised the frictional force acts in downward direction. Therefore, axial force on the screw consists of addition of the weight of the gate plus the frictional resistance. Or, W = 5000 + 2000 = 7000 N From Eq. (6.6), M, = “he tan (@ + 2) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 204 Design of Machine Elements Forcollar, r= 15mm =0.15 For handle, Operator fore Step 1 Torque required to tighten the clamp to full capacity From Eq. (6.2), =0.5p =22-0.5 (5) = 19.5 mm 1 5 fna~ a, (93) 0816 or a= 4.666° tan g=p=0.15 or 9=8.531° From Eq. (6.6), y= Me tan (0+ a) _ 7500095) “2 = 1714.73 N-mm From Eq, (6.18), tan (8.531 + 4.666) (= 9 (D,+D,)= Hig or (Me= Hey = 0.15(750)(15) = 1687.5 N-mm. The torque required to tighten the clamp to full capacity is given by, (M,),= M, + (M), = 1714.73 + 1687.5 = 3402.23 N-mm @ Step If Length and diameter ofhandle The length ‘a’ of the handle from the axis of the screw to the point of application of hand force is given by, (M)=Pxa @ or 3402.23=20xa = 170.11 mm The handle is subjected to bending moment and the maximum bending moment near the screw is approximately given by, M=Pxa (b) From (a) and (b), ‘M,=(M), = 3402.23 N-mm The handle will bend with a permanent set when the bending stress reaches the yield strength of the material, or, = S,,= 400 N/mm? The bending stress is given by, — 32My 3/32. GM02.25) Oe d=442 mm wi) Example 6.10 it is required to design a fiy- press, as shown in Fig. 6.17, which is capable of punching 50 mm diameter circles from a 1.5 mm +—Ra——I Bal Ball Ta PEEL TE tne, | 1 {Seren : =] 1 | ‘ |) |) Leanse Pillar 1] Pune =H 1 || bie = | Fig.617 Fly-prese thick mild steel sheet. The ultimate shear strength of the sheet metal is 375 N/mm? and it can be assumed that shearing will be complete when the punch penetrates through half the thickness of the sheet. The screw, with square threads, is made of steel 30C8 (Sp = 400 Nimmr"), while the nut is made of bronze. The factor of safewy is 3. The operator is expected to sit in front of the fiy_press, insert the sheet by his left hand and operate the handle by the right hand. The total working stroke consists of a one-quarter revolution, 45° in front of the press and 45° behind the press. During the return stroke, the punch is raised by 5 mm to provide clearance to insert the sheet. The forward or working stroke is completed in 1 second. The balls are made of cast iron, with a mass density of 7280 kg/m? and the radius R,, is 300 mm. Neglecting collar friction, calculate (Othe dimensions of the screw; aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 208 Design of Machine Elements Step IIT General Considerations (i) The screw jack is manually operated. According to ergonomists, hand force should not exceed 130 N. However, this value is recommended for prolonged work. The jack is never operated continuously and, as such, a higher value of 400 N is assumed for hand force in this analysis. It is further assumed that two workers are required to raise the load of 100 KN. When two workers are at work, there is inconvenience and the resultant force is less than twice the individual force. A coefficient of 0.9 is assumed in this case to account for reduction in force due to inconvenience. Therefore, total hand force exerted on the handle by two workers (P) is given by P=(0.9x2x 400)N (ii) A screw-jack is a lifting device and subject to certain hazards. Breakdown of the jack hhas serious consequences such as injury to the operator and damage to machine parts, The jack should be robust and tidiot” proof. To account for this safety aspect, a higher factor of safety of $ is used for the components of the screw jack. Step IV Design of Screw ‘The screw jack is an intermittently used device and wear of the threads is not an important consideration. Therefore, instead of trapezoidal threads, the screw is provided with square threads. Square threads have higher efficiency and provision can be made for self- locking arrangement. When the condition of self- locking is fulfilled, the load itself will not tum the screw and descend down, unless the handle is rotated in reverse direction with some effort. WwW. Collar fiction t torque Side cup | (Myc view i T f= OP 7 Le. a 7 i 1] Extemal ‘ j i] torque i i ‘ : h i ! Wx if a Nut friction . tf a tor j] Bendin wi oral diagram (e) (©) Torque diagram © ® Fig. 6.19 (a) Load in Raised Position (b) Torque Diagram (c) Compression of Screw (d) Bending Moment Diagram ‘The portion of the screw between the handle and the nut is subjected to maximum stress, when the load is being raised. The screw is subjected to torsional moment, compressive foree and bending moment is illustrated in Fig. 6.19. The screw is made of plain carbon steel (S,, = 400 N/mm). Assuming Sy = Sy = 400 N/mm? and the factor of safety of 5, Sse _ 400 7 86> ps = 7 BONA From Fig. 6.19(c), where d, is the core diameter of the screw. Substituting the values, 00 x 10° Gey d.~39.89 or 40mm 80= or, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 212 _Design of Machine Elements selection, it is assumed that the handle rotates at 10 rpm. Therefore, the life of the bearing in million revolutions is given by, 60nL, _ 60(10)(3000) The dynamic load capacity of the bearing is L'3 = 100 x 10 (1.8)! = 121 644.04 N It is assumed that the bore diameter of the 1° 10° = Smillion rev. bearing is 50 mm. For this diameter, the following four bearings are available® also P= W= 100 10°N [Se No. d (mm) D (mm) ‘H (mm) cm™ CN) D, (mm) Designation 4 50 70 14 25500 0000 2 s1110 | 2 50 78 22 41.600 73 500. 52 $1210 3 50 9s 31 97.500 160000 52 51310 {4 50. no 43 159 000 250.000 52 51410 (C= dynamic load capacity C, = static load capacity From the above table, Bearing No. $1410 with d=50mm = D=110mm H=43 mm dynamic load carrying capacity of 159 000 N is © D,=52mm 2000 Fig. 6.24 Dimensions of Cup selected for the jack. The dimensions of the bearing are as follows: 3 SKF General Catalogue No. 32006, The dimensions of the cup are shown in Fig. 6.24. The section thickness is kept 20 mm throughout as far as possible. Step VII Design of Handle The handle is subjected to bending moment. The force exerted by two workers on the handle is given by, P=(0.9x2x400)N The handle is made of steel 30C8 (S,, = 400 N/mm), There is no collar friction’ torque. Therefore, M,=Px1,=(M), Px 1,=M, (0.9 x2 x 400) J, = 648 316.03 1,= 900.43 or 910mm or Since, 32M, o-—, nd} (2)- 32 (0.9x2x 400) (910), 5 ad; or d,= 43.69 or 45mm ‘The handle is inserted through a hole in the head of the screw as shown in Fig. 6.23. Two holes are provided, at right angles to each other, for changing the position of the handle after a quarter revolution. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 216 Design of Machine Elements Compared with conventional power screws, recirculating ball screws has the following disadvantages: (i) A recirculating ball serew is much more costly than conventional power screw. (ii) Recirculating ball screws are usually overhauling due to low friction. Therefore, a separate brake is required to hold the load in its place. (iii) Buckling of serew and eritical speed are serious problems with recirculating ball Fig. 6.28 Recirculating Ball Screw screw. (iv) Recirculating ball screws require a high degree of cleanliness compared with conventional power screws. They are completely enclosed to prevent the entry of Compared with conventional power screws, recirculating ball screws offer the following advantages: (i) In conventional power screw, there is sliding friction between the screw and nut threads. In recirculating ball screw, there is rolling friction between the balls and the grooves in the screw and nut. This reduces friction drastically. The efficiency of a foreign particles. (¥) Recirculating ball screws require a thin film of lubricant between the balls and grooves in the nut and the screw for satisfactory operation. Conventional power screws can be easily lubricated by grease. conventional power screw is as low as 40%. The efficiency of ball screws is as high as 90%, because sliding friction is replaced by rolling friction Recirculating ball screws ere used in the following applications (i) Automobile steering gears (i) Power actuators (ii) In conventional power screw, ‘stick-slip’ (iii) X-Y recorders of CNC machines phenomenon is observed due to difference (iv) Aircraft landing gear retractors between the values of coefficient of static (¥) Hospital bed adjustors friction and coefficient of sliding friction. (vi) Machine tool controls It is a serious drawback. In recirculating Short-Answer Questions ball screw, it is nearly eliminated and the operation is smooth. iii) A conventional power screw must be 6.1 What is power screw? adjusted periodically to compensate for wear 6.2. What are the applications of power screws? on the surfaces of the screw and the nut. A 6,3. What are the advantages of power screws? recirculating ball screw is virtually wear-fiee 6.4 What are the disadvantages of power due to presence of lubricant film between the contacting surfaces and protection from contamination by dirt particles. (iv) The load carrying capacity of recirculating ball screw is more than that of conventional power screw. For the same load carrying capacity, recirculating ball screw is more compact and lightweight than conventional screw jack. screws? 6.5 What are the types of threads for power screw? 6.6 Why are V threads not used in power screws? 6.7 What are the advantages of square threads over trapezoidal threads? 6.8 What are the disadvantages of square threads compared with trapezoidal threads? aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 220 Design of Machine Elements stress concentration near the threaded portion. of the parts. Such areas are vulnerable to fatigue failure. (ii) Threaded joints loosen when subjected to vibrations. Threaded fasteners are considered as a major obstacle for efficient assembly. in manual assembly, the cost of tightening a screw can be six t0 ten times the cost of the screw itself! Therefore, Design for Manufacture and Assembly (DFMA) _ recommends minimum number of threaded fasteners. ii) 7.2. BASIC TYPES OF SCREW FASTENING There are three parts of a threaded fastening, viz., a bolt or screw, a nut and a washer. There is a basic difference between the bolt and the screw. A bolt is a fastener with a head and straight threaded shank and intended to be used with a nut to clamp two or more parts. The same bolt can be called screw when it is threaded into a tapped hole in one of the parts and not into the nut. Although bolt and serew are similar, there is a fundamental difference in their assembly. A bolt is held stationary. while torque is applied to the nut to make threaded joint, whereas the torque is applied to the screw to turn it into matching threads in one of the parts. A nut is a small symmetrical part, usually having hexagonal or square shape, containing matching intemal threads. Simple washers are thin annular shaped metallic disks. The functions of a washer are as follows: (@_ Itdistributes the load over a large area on the surface of clamped parts. (ii) It prevents marring of clamped parts during assembly. It prevents marring of the bolt head and nut surface during assembly. (iv) It provides bearing surface over large clearance holes. Threaded fastenings are classified according to their shape and the purpose for which they are used. Common types of threaded fastenings are as follows: (iii) (®) Through Bolts A through bolt is simply called a ‘bolt or a ‘bol! and nut’. It is shown in Fig. 7.1(a). The bolt consists of a cylindrical rod with head at one end and threads at the other. The cylindrical portion between the head and the threads is called shank. The shank passes through the holes in the parts to be fastened. The threaded portion of the bolt is screwed into the nut. The head of the bolt and the ut are either hexagonal or square. Hexagonal head bolt and nut are popular in the machine building industry. Square head and nut are used mostly with sane + i t i i \ (a) : © © Fig.7.1 Types of Screw Fastening: (a) Through Bolt (b) Tap Bolt (c) Stud ' Bart Huthwite—Checklist for DFM—Machine Design—Nol. 62, No. 3—February 1990. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 224 Design of Machine Elements the setscrew is screwed, does not have sufficient thickness. (ii) Dog Point (Fig. 73 b) Dog point is used when the lateral force, which tends to displace one part with respect to other, is large. Also the part, which is held, should have sufficient thickness to accommodate a cylindrical hole for the dog point. Cone Point (Fig. 73 ) Cone point is used when the lateral force is small. Also, the part with the tapped hole into which the seiscrew is screwed, does not have sufficient thickness. The part being held is provided with conical hole. (iv) Hanger Point (Fig. 73 d) Hanger point has a small taper. It is used when the lateral force is large. Also the part, which is held, should have sufficient thickness to accommodate a cylindrical hole. Hanger point ensures good location of the part. (») Cut Point (Fig. 7.3.) Cut point is used when the part being held cannot be drilled or hardened. It is also used to transmit force to steel balls or spherical parts The point of the setscrew is generally hardened. 7.5 BOLT OF UNIFORM STRENGTH Bolts are subjected to shock and impact loads in certain applications. The bolts of cylinder head of an intemal combustion engine or the bolts of connecting rod are the examples of such applications. In such cases, resilience of the bolt is important design consideration to prevent breakage at the threads. Resilience is defined as the ability of the material t0 absorb energy when deformed elastically and to release this energy when unloaded. § resilient bolt absorbs energy within elastic range without any permanent deformation and releases this energy when unloaded, It can be called spring property of the bolt. A resilient bolt absorbs shocks and vibrations like leaf springs of the vehicle. In other words, the bolt acts like a spring. It can be shown that the energy absorbed during elastic deformation is proportional to the square of the stress induced in the material and the volume of the material under the stress. Figure 7.4(a) shows an ordinary bolt with usual shape, The major diameter of the thread as well as the diameter of the shank is d. The core diameter of the threads is d,. When this bolt is subjected to tensile force, there are two distinct regions of stress. They are as follows: (i) The diameter of threaded portion d, is less than the shank diameter d. The threaded portion is also subjected to stress concentration. Therefore, stress induced in the threaded portion is more than the stress in the shank portion. The energy absorbed by each unit volume of bolt material is proportional to the square of the stress. Hence, a large part of the energy is absorbed in the threaded portion of the bolt. (ii) The diameter of the shank is more than the core diameter of the threaded portion. There is no stress concentration in the shank, Therefore, when the bolt is subjected to tensile force, the stress in the shank portion is less than the stress in the threaded portion. The energy absorbed in the shank, which is proportional to the square of the stress, is less than the energy absorbed in the threaded part. The shock absorbing capacity of bolt can be increased if the shank of bolt is turned down to a diameter equal to the root diameter of threads or even less. In this case, the shank is subjected to higher stress and hence absorbs a greater proportion of strain energy and relieves the thread portion of high stress. The resilience of the bolt can also be increased by increasing its length, The strain energy absorbed by the shank is linearly proportional to its length. Therefore, there are two methods for increasing the shock absorbing capacity of bolts. They are as follows: (@) Reduce the shank diameter to core diameter of threads or even less. (ii) Increase the length of the shank portion of the bolt. The threaded portion of the bolt is the weakest part and maximum amount of elastic energy is absorbed in this region. The ideal bolt will be one aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 208 Design of Machine Elements i) Minor Diameter The minor diameter is the diameter of an imaginary cylinder that bounds the roots of an extemal thread («i,) or the crest of an internal thread (D,), The minor diameter is the smallest diameter of the screw thread. It is also called core or root diameter of the thread. (iii) Pitch Diameter The pitch diameter is the diameter of an imaginary cylinder, the surface of which would pass through the threads at such points as to make the width of the threads equal to the width of spaces cut by the surface of the cylinder. It is also called the effective diameter of the thread. Pitch diameter is denoted by d, for external threads and D, for internal threads. (iv) Pitch Pitch is the distance between two similar points on adjacent threads measured parallel to the axis of the thread. It is denoted by the letter p. (o) Lead Lead is the distance that the nut moves parallel to the axis of the screw, when the nut given one tum. (ei) Thread Angle Thread angle is the angle included between the sides of the thread measured in an axial plane. Thread angle is 60° for ISO metric threads. (ii) Tensile Stress Area \t has been observed during testing of the threaded rods that an unthreaded rod, having a diameter equal to the mean of the pitch diameter and the minor diameter [ie., (d, + d,)/2] has the same tensile strength as the threaded rod. The cross-sectional area of this unthreaded rod is called the ‘tensile-stress area’. This area is used for the purpose of calculating the tensile strength of the bolts. 78 ISO METRIC SCREW THREADS Fastening threads are usually vee threads. They offer the following advantages: G@) Vee threads result in higher friction, which lessen the possibility of loosening. (ii) Vee threads have higher strength due to increased thread thickness at the core diameter. (ii) Vee threads are more convenient to manufacture. The profile of an ISO metric screw thread is illustrated in Fig. 7.1173. It consists of an equilateral triangle with a thread angle of 60°. The base of this triangle is equal to the pitch. The Root rounded beyond a width e of pi a So“ aT Hh 80 h g fh PVE 4 External threads ay D dD, f # j dp d intemal thread External throadt dameters diameters Fig.7.11 Profi of internal and External Threads 2 1§ 4218-1976: ISO Metric screw threads (in four parts) ic profile 3 ISO 68-1SO General purpose screw threads—Bi aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 232 _Design of Machine Elements Rewriting the height of the standard nut, h=0.8d (73) ‘The design of the bolt consists of determination of correct size of the bolt. The size of the bolt is given by the nominal diameter d and pitch p. In design calculations, many times the core diameter d. is determined. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the core diameter d. into the nominal diameter d. This can be easily done when the tables like (7.1) and (7.2) are available. Knowing the minor or core diameter, the corresponding designation of the thread can be obtained from these tables, However, when the tables for threads are not available, some relationship between d, and d has to be used. The correct relationship for ISO metric screw threads is as follows‘, d= 1.226 81p Since there sre two unknowns on the right hand side, it is not possible to find out the value of d by knowing the value of d,.. Therefore, the following approximate relationship can be used, d,=0.8d (7a) Preference should be given to use values given in Tables 7.1 and 7.2. An electric motor weighing 10 kN is Tied by means of an eye bolt as shown in Fig. 7.13. The eye bolt is serewed into the frame of the motor. The eye bolt has coarse threads. It is made of plain carbon steel 30C8 (S,, = 400 Nimm’) and the factor of safety is 6. Determine the size of the bolt. Fig. 7.13. Eye Bolt 418.4218 (Part i) Solution Given P=10kKN S,,=400 N/mm? (B)=6 Eye bolt is used for lifting and transporting heavy machinery on the shop floor. It consists of a ring of circular cross-section at the top end and threaded portion at the lower end. The threaded portion is screwed inside a threaded hole on the top surface of the machine to be lifted. A crane hook or chain is inserted in the circular ring. The circular ring is called the eye. The threaded portion of the eye bolt is subjected to tensile stress due to the weight being lifted. StepI Permissible tensile stress 5, gece Oe ese niin? (Bf) 6 Step II Size of bolt From Eq. (7.2), (10x 10°) = + 06.67 = or From Eq. (7.4), —— = 17.27 or 18mm. From Table 7.1, the standard size of the bolt is M20. Example 7.2 Two plates are fastened by means of two bolts as shown in Fig. 7.14. The bolts are made of plain carbon steel 30C8 (Sy, = 400 Nimm?) and the factor of safety is 5. Determine the size of the bolts if, P=5kN 4 Fig. 7.14 1976: ISO Metric screw threads—Part 1: Basic and design profile. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 236 Design of Machine Elements (iii) The bolts are not preloaded and there are no tensile stresses due to initial tightening. (iv) The stress concentration in threads is neglected. (v) All bolts are identical. Fig. 7.20 The force P results in direct shear force on the bolts. Since the bolts are identical, the shear force on each bolt is given by, Be (No. of bolts) The moment (P x e) tends to tilt the bracket about the edge C. As shown in Fig. 7.20(b), each bolt is stretched by an amount (8) which is proportional to its vertical distance from the point C.Or, (7.9) Beh and daly Also, force = stress because [P-oA] stress « strain because [o= Ee] strain stretch because [= df] ‘Therefore, it can be concluded that the resisting force induced in any bolt, due to the tendency of the bracket to tilt under the moment (P x e), is proportional to its distance from the tilting edge. If Ri Py" are the resisting forces induced in the bolts, Pfec and Pye ly or, R’=Ch PY=Ch (a) where Cis the constant of proportionality. Equating the moment due to resisting forces with the moment due to external force P about the edge C, Pe=2R"t, +2P;' ly ) Substituting (a) in (b), Pe=ACh)I +ACHh Gat © if +8) From (a) and (c), rs 1" 27 +B) P Peli (7.10) 2 +8) The bolts denoted by 1 are subjected to maximum force. In general, a bolt, which is located at the farthest distance from the tilting edge C, is subjected to maximum force. Equations (7.9) and (7.10) give shear and tensile forces that act on the bolt due to eccentric load perpendicular to the axis of the bolts. The direct shear stress in the bolt is given by, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 240 _Design of Machine Elements Pirech and Pf xh where J, and /, are the distances of the axis of bolts from the edge C. Therefore, R=Ch and P= Cl, (a) where Cis the constant of proportionality. Equating the moment of resisting forces with the moment due to external force about the edge C, Px 550= Ph + Ply (b) From (a) and (b), Px550= C(I? +13) Px330 a+8) (c) From (a) and (c), pp = LES, Substituting numerical values, 10 x 10° )(550)(450) (450? +50") =24146.34N (ii) Step HT Resultant tensile force Bolt 1 is located at the farthest distance from the tilting edge C. Therefore, it is subjected to maximum tensile force. From (i) and (ii), the total tensile force acting on the bolt 1 is (10 000 + 24 146.34) o 34 146.34 N. SizeIV_ Size of tolts Al) nax, = 3414634 oF A = 455.28 mm? From Table 7.1, the standard size of the bolts is M 30 (4-561 mm’) ACTS) = 3414634 Example 7.9 4 cast iron bracket fixed to the sieel structure is shown in Fig. 7.24(a). It supports a load P of 25 kN. There are two bolts at A and two bolts at B. The distances are as follows, 1,= 50mm 1, 200mm 1 = 400mm Determine the size of the bolts, if maximum permissible tensile stress in the bolt is 50 N/mm? Fig. 7.24 Solution Given, P~25kN 1-400 mm {Omnax. = 50 Nimm? The bolts are subjected to following stresses: (i) Direct tensile stress due to load P. (ii) ‘Tensile stress due to tendency of the bracket tottilt in clockwise direction about the edge C. Step 1 Direct tensile force Since the bolts are identical, the direct tensile force on each bolt is given by, w RaR- Wo. of bolts) 5 2x = 6250N rn) Step I Tensile force duc to tendency of bracket to tilt The following assumptions are made: (All bolts are identical, (ii) ‘The bracket and the structure are rigid. (iii) The bolts are not preloaded and there is no initial tensile siress due to tightening of the bolt. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Threaded Joints 249 (i) torque required to overcome thread friction and induce the pre-load, i.e., (Mj); and (ii) torque required to overcome collar friction between the nut and the washer (J). The equations derived for trapezoidal threads are suitably modified for ISO metric screw threads. Replacing W by pretension P, in Eq. (6.13) (Section 6.10), the torque required to overcome thread friction is given by, a, = fide, ,, {usec + tan a) 1° "2" d= psec @ tana) (@) For ISO metric screw threads, 6=30° a@e25° d,=09d where d is the nominal or major diameter of the bolt. The coefficient of friction varies from 0.12 to 0.20, depending upon the surface finish and accuracy of the thread profile and lubrication. Assuming, H=0.15 and substituting the above values in Eq. (a), M= ( 2024) [0.15 sec (30) + tan (2.5)} 12) [10.15 see (30) tan (2.5)] or M,= 0.098 Pd ) According to uniform wear theory, the collar friction torque (1), is given by, _( HP.)[D.+D; . wo-(2222] In the above equation, D, is the diameter of an imaginary circle across the flats of the hexagonal aut and D, is the diameter of the hole in the washer. For ISO metric screw threads, ad and 40.15 $ 1s 2016-1967: Specification for plain washers. Substituting these values in Eq, (c), (Mt). -(H Io 4d) 2 (M),- 0.105 Pd @ Adding expressions (b) and (d), the total torque (M,), required to tighten the bolts is given by, (M,),= M+ (M). = (0.098 + 0.105) P,d or (M), = 0.2 Pd (7.19) The above equation gives a simple expression to determine the wrench torque (Mf), required to create the required pre-load P,. 7.15 DIMENSIONS OF FASTENERS Fasteners such as hexagonal head bolts, screws, washers and nuts are frequently used in all design projects. Their standard dimensions are essential to prepare assembly and detail drawings. However, in previous cxamples the bolts are designed and their standard size such MI6 or M20 is specified. Other dimensions of the fasteners are determined by referring to the particular Indian Standard for that fastener. Tables 7.3 to 7.5 give dimensions of commonly used hexagonal head bolts and screws, hexagonal nuts and washers* °, The dimensions of other fasteners can be similarly obtained from relevant standards or handbooks’, It is observed from these tables that the inner diameter of the washer is stightly more than the nut size. 1984: Specification for hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of Product Grade C. (In three parts). 7 SP-29: Handbook on Industrial Fasteners (In three volumes)—Bureau of Indian Standards. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Threaded Joints 253 ‘The principal shear stress is given by, a > Tax = (2) +r (22) + (29.89) \2 2 = 44.47 N/mm? and, Sy 05S y (Q=—+-— 45 Tmax. Tax. The factor of safety is slightly less than the required value of 5. The next size of ISO metric coarse thread is M42 with 36.479 mm as minor diameter (d,) and 4.5 mm pitch. The stress area is 1120 mm? Trial No. 2 d=42mm and d,=36.479 mm ~. oe =4784Nimm? (i) z a 76479)" ‘M,=0.098 P d= 0.098 (50x 103) (42) = 205 800 N-mm _ 16M, _ 16(205800) = 21.59 N/mm? nd (36479 o The principal shear stress is given by, a =i fe fu 7) (21.59)! =32.22 Nimm? 055, — 0.5(400) - 621 = T, 32.22 The fact of miley incnetichetary, Theetire, the nominal diameter and the pitch of the threaded portion of the rod should be 42 mm and 4.5 mm respectively. In Fig, 7.31, the length of the threaded portion of the rod in contact with coupler threeds is denoted by /. It is determined by shearing of the threads at the minor diameter d,. Equating shear resistance of the threads to the tension in the rod, adJt=P 0,5(400) A) 5 3 = 40 N/mm? Therefore, (36.479) 1 (40) = (50 x 10°) 1=1091mm @ This length is too small compared with the nominal diameter of 42 mm. In practice, the length {varies from dto 1.25 d. Or, [=d=42mm I= 1.25 d= 1.25 (42) = $2.5 mm (ii) From (i) and (ii), the length of the threaded portion (/) is assumed as 50 mm. Step VI Design of Coupler The two ends of the coupler are called coupler nuts. As shown in Fig. 7.31, the coupler nuts are integral with the coupler. The outer and inner diameters of the coupler nut are D and d respectively and the length is denoted by /. It acts as a hollow rod. Considering tension, p= 4 (D*-A)0, a The coupler is made of cast iron (S,, = 200 N/mm?) and factor of safety is 5. Therefore, = See = 200 «49 mm? Gs) 5 Substituting the above value in Eq. (i), — 427) (40) 30x10°) = Zp? (50x10°) 4 or, D= 57.93 or 60 mm (a) ‘The standard proportion for D is from 1.25 d to 1.5 d. Or, D=1.25 d= 1.25 (42)= 52.5 mm D=15d =15 (42)= 63mm (b) From (a) and (b), it is decided that the dimension D should be 60 mm. The coupler nut is subjected to direct tensile stress as well as torsional shear stress due to torque M,. Step VII Check for Design D_ 60 M,=205 800 Nimm r= == 30mm y= RDA =a) _ a(60' — 424) 32 2 = 966854.98 mm* aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Threaded Joints 257 P Fig. 7.36 Soluti Given P; 25kKN P=SKN (f)~=2.5 00 Nim? k? = 2.5k;, Step 1 Permissible tensile stress Sy _ 400 . (ymax. = 25 = 160 N/mm’ Step II Resultant load on bolt KL = 25kh = Ln Ki an o( qe) = 6000) = 1428.57N Py = P,+ AP =2500 + 1428.57 = 3928.57 N Step III Size of bolt The tensile stress area A of the bolt is given by, B, 3928.57 P= Ones, oF 4 = 160 A= 24.55 mm? From Table 7.1, a bolt with threads M8 (4 = 36.6 mm”) is suitable for this application. 718 BOLTED JOINT UNDER FLUCTUATING LOAD In many applications, the extemal force acting on the bolted joint fluctuates between two limits. The endurance limit is the criterion of failure in these applications. The endurance limit of the bolt is determined by the procedure discussed in Chapter 5. This involves the use of the surface finish factor, the size factor, the reliability factor and the modifying factor to account for stress concentration. The fatigue stress concentration factors (K;) for the threaded parts are given in Table 7.6. According to SAE and metric specifications, bolt grades are numbered as per tensile strength. Higher the tensile strength, more is the grade number. Cutting is the simplest method of making threads. However, rolled threads have smoother thread finish than cut threads. Rolling also provides an unbroken flow of material grain in the thread region. Therefore, rolled threads are preferred for applications subjected to fluctuating loads. After determining the endurance strength, Goodman diagram is constructed. The following points should be noted in finding endurance limit of threaded fasteners: (i) It is not necessary to consider surface finish factor separately. It is incorporated in fatigue stress concentration factor. (ii) The size factor is taken as 1 for axial loading. (ii) The reliability is assumed as 90% for finding reliability factor. A typical analysis of bolt failures indicate that (i). 15% failures of bolt occur at the fillet under the head (ii) 20% failures of bolt occur at the end of threads on the shank Gii) 65% failures of bolt occur in the threads that are in contact with the nut Table 7.6 Fatigue stress concentration factors (Ky) for threaded parts SAE grade Metric grade “Rolled threads Cut threads Fillet | 0102 361058 22 28 21 4108 66 1010.9 3.0 38 23 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Threaded Joints_261 Step IV. Size of bolt Since or or 2464.5 _ 630 (5000/4) 4 5.9(2) 2464.5 423.73 2888.23 AT 258.9 = ot = = 53.39 A=54.1 mm? From Table 7.2, a bolt with fine threads M10 x 1.25 (4 = 61.2 mm) is suitable for this application Example 7-19 4 bolted assembly is subjected fo an external force, which varies from 0 t0 10 KN. The combined stiffness of the parts, held together by the bolt, is three times the stiffness of the bolt. The bolt is lly so tightened that at 50% overload condition, the parts held together by the bolt are just about 10 separate. The bolt is made of plain carbon steel SOC4 (Sy = 660 N/mm? and S,, = 460 Nimm?). The fatigue stress concentration ‘factor is 2.2 and the expected reliability is 90%. The factor of safety is 2. Determine the size of the bolt with fine threads. Solution Given P=0to 1OkN (f)=2 For bolts, 5,,= 660 N/mm? _S,,= 460 N/mm? K-22 R=90% kf = 3k; Step I Endurance limit stress for bolt 5 Sy, = 0.5(660) = 330 N/mm? 0 (134.54)S, Goodman line The surface finish factor is incorporated in the fatigue stress concentration factor. The size factor is 1 foraxial load, For 90% reliability, 897 kK, == 1 = 0.545 aK 227° K,K KaS. = (1.0)(0,897) (0.4545)(330) 34.54 Nimm? Step II Construction of Goodman diagram At 50% overload condition, the extemal force will be (1.5% 10) or 15 KN. From Eq. (7.25), Pnw. =P, (“*) or (15 10°) = »( Hee) P,=11250N Similarly, ky) _(_& Kee) ky + Bk The maximum and minimum forces in the bolt are given by Pray =P; + (0.25) P = 11 250 + (0.25(10 000) ~ 13 750. N = P, + (0.25)(0) 11 250 + (0,25)(0) = 11 250N % Pmax.* Prin) = (13 750 +11 250) = 12 250 N P= Pras ~ Prin) = % (13 750 — 11 250) = 1250 N The Goodman diagram for this example is shown in Fig. 7.40. 5 = 0.25 P, P aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. ‘Threaded Joints _265 The solution is obtained by Eg. (7.30). From Eq. (7.30), 1g, = Sa (RIA) _ 900 ~ (326 725.64/4) @ "1+ Su/S.) 1+ (900/136.36) _ 900 ~ (326 725.64/A) 76 Step VI Size of bolt ‘ S. S, Sine 0, == Sil ae, ) A (fh or 25132.74 _ 900 - (326 725.64/ A) A 7.60.5) 25132.74 28 660.14 aay ae = 78.95 — a or 53792.88 _ ag 95 4 A= 681.35 mm? There are 8 bolts. Therefore, the area of each bolt is given by, A= as 85.17 mm? From Table 7.2, bolts with fine threads M12 x 1.5 (A = 88.1 mm’) are suitable for this application. Example 7.22 Figure 7.43 shows the arrange- ‘ment of supporting a machine weighing 200 kg at a distance of 1 m from the nearest point of support. The operation of the machine creates a rotating unbalanced force of 2000 N in the plane of the {figure and at the position of the machine. The speed af rotation is 14 rpm. The weight of the channel is 20 kg/m. Two bolts, denoted by 1 and 2, hold the channel to the main frame. The bolts are located at 35 and 270 mm from the nearest point of support. The following data is given for the bolts: Ultimate tensile strength = 960 MPa Yield point strength = 850 MPa Endurance limit in bending = 500 MPa Fatigue stress concentration factor = 3.0 Factor of safety = 2 The initial preload in each bolt is 55 KN. The ratio of stiffness of the parts held together by the bolts to the stiffness of the bolts is 3. Assume Goodman line as the criterion of failure. Determine the size of the bolts. 50 N/mm? 00 N/mm? (fs) = 2 K,=3 P,= 55 KN Step 1 Endurance limit stress for bolt Si=500MPa or 500 Nimm? 11 Kaa Rng S. = KyS{ =(1/3)(S00) = 166.67 Nimm? Step I Analysis of forces As shown in Fig 7.44, when the load tends to tilt the bracket about the nearest point of support C, each bolt is stretched by an amount (6), which is proportional to its distance from the tilting edge. 235 35 oe Fig. 7.44 or, 6h, and xh ah 6 f) It is assumed that the bolts are identical. Therefore, PL AL 6-42 nd 6 = BE & LF steak (b) a7 B ) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. ‘Threaded Joints 269 Step II Permissible stress amplitude The co-ordinates of the point C (Sq S,) are obtained by solving the following two equations simultaneously: sme 780 86.67 © 34361.17 tS.) where A is tensile stress area of the bolt. ‘The solution is obtained by Eq. (7.30). From Eq. (7.30), Sy - (RA) _ 780-(34 361.17/4) 1+(Sy/S,)_1+(780/86.67) _ 780 - (34361.17/ 4) _ 10 S, Step1V_ Size of tlt Since oo, Sa Sa “ (fs) Us) es 1202.64 _ 1 [ 780—(34361.17/4) A 7 10 1202.64 _ 1718.06 A ea 2920.7 or == 39 A=7489 mm? From Table 7.2, bolts with fine threads M12 x 1.5 (4= 88,1 mm?) are suitable for this application. Short-Answer Questions 7.1 What is threaded joint? 7.2 What are the advantages of threaded joints? 7.3. What are the disadvantages of threaded joints? 1.4, What is a through bolt? 7.5 What is a machine bolt? 7.6 What is an automobile bolt? 7.7, What is a tap bolt? 7.8 What is a cap screw? 7.9. When do you use tap bolts and cap screw? 7.10 What is a stud? 7.11 Why is hexagonal head preferred for cap screw instcad of square head? 7.12 What is a setscrew? 7.13. What is bolt of uniform strength? 7.14 What are the methods of preventing loosening of threads between the nut and the screw? 7.15 What is lock nut? What is the principle of lock nut? 7.16 What is a castle nut? Why is it called castle nut? 7.17 What is a split pin? 7.18 How is locking of threads obtained in castle nut? 7.19 Whats a split nut? 7.20 How is locking of threads obtained in split nut? 7.21 What is nominal diameter of screw thread? 7.22 What is root diameter of screw thread? 1.23 What is pitch diameter of screw thread? 7.24 Whatis pitch of screw thread? 7.25. What is lead of screw thread? 7.26 What is thread angle of screw thread’? 7.27 What is magnitude of thread angle of ISO metric thread? 7.28 What is tensile stress area of screw thread? 7.29, What are the advantages of coarse threads? 7.30. What are the advantages of fine threads? 7.31. What are the applications of coarse threads? 7.32. What are the applications of fine threads? 7.33 How will you designate ISO metric coarse threads? 7.34 How will you designate ISO metric fine threads? 7.35. What do you understand by ‘hard’ and ‘soft’ gaskets? Problems for Practice 7.1 A gearbox weighing 7.5 KN is provided with a steel eye bolt for lifting and transporting on the shop-floor. The cycbolt is made of plain carbon, steel 30C8 (S,, = 400 N/mm?) and the factor of safety is , Determine the nominal diameter of the eye bolt having coarse threads if, d= 0.8d where d, and d are core and major diameters, respectively. [3.66 mm] 7.2. A steam engine cylinder has an effective diameter of 250 mm. It is subjected to a aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints _273 can be used where strength is required and thin plates can be used at other places. The rules of uniform cross-section and minimum section thickness required for casting process are not necessary for a welded design. The designer has more freedom and flexibility in the design of welded assemblies. (iii) Welded assemblies are more easily machined than castings. (iv) The capital investment for a welding shop is considerably lower than that for a foundry shop. Here, the cost of pattern making and storing is eliminated which reduces the cost of welded structures. ‘Welded joints have the following disadvantages: () As compared with cast iron structures, the capacity of welded structure to damp vibrations is poor. ii) Welding results in a thermal distortion of the parts, thereby inducing residual stresses. In many cases, stress-relieving heat treatment is required to relieve residual stresses. Riveted or cast structures do not require such stress relieving treatment. (iii) The quality and the strength of the welded joint depend upon the skill of the welder It is difficult to control the quality when a number of welders are involved. (iv) The inspection of the welded joint is more specialised and costly compared with the inspection of riveted or cast structures. Today, riveting has been superseded by welding in metal working industries, ship building industries and boiler manufacture, except for certain special cases. Welding has also become the chief method to make joints in steel structures in civil engineering. 8.2 WELDING PROCESSES Welding processes are broadly classified into the following two groups: () Welding processes that use heat alone to join the two parts. (i) Welding processes that use a combination of heat and pressure to join the two parts. The welding process that uses heat alone is called the fusion welding process. In this method, the paris to be joined are held in position and molten metal is supplied to the joint. Tae molten metal can come either from the parts themselves called ‘parent? metal or an external filler metal is supplied to the joint. The joining surfaces of the two parts become plastic or cven molten under the action of heat. When the joint solidifies, the two paris fuse into a single unit, Fusion welding is further classified into the following three groups: (i) Themnit welding (ii) Gas welding (iii) Electric arc welding (i) Thermit Welding In this method, a mould is prepared around the joint and thermit is placed in the reservoir of the mould, Thermit consists of a mixture of finely divided iron oxide and aluminum, When thermit is ignited, there is chemical reaction, which converts iron oxide into molten stec!, This molien steel flows into the mould, melts the parts and forms the joint on solidifying. The advantage of thermit welding is that all paris of the weld section are molten at the same time and coo! at a uniform rate. This minimises the residual stresses induced in the joint. Themit welding is used to weld heavy sections such as rails in the field, where it is uneconomical to transport welding equipment. It is particularly suitable to join parts of large casting or forging that are complicated to make in one piece. Thermit welding is used to repair heavy steel parts such as heavy machinery frames, locomotive frames and ship structures, where it is not possible 10 relieve the siresses in the joints. Duc to uniform rate of cooling, thermit welding is ideally suitable for these assemblies. (ii) Gas Welding In the gas welding process, oxygen-hydrogen or oxygen-acetylene gas_is burned in a torch to create a pointed flame. This flame is directed upon the surfaces to be joined. The intense heat of the flame heats the adjoining parts of the joint to the fusion temperature and simultaneously melts the welding rod to supply the molten metal to the joint. A flux is used to remove the slag. There is a basic difference between gas aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints 277 throat of the weld / to the plate thickness rin Eq. (8.1), the strength equation of butt joint can be written as, P=o,tl (82) where, P = tensile force on plates (N) ; = permissible tensile stress for the weld (N/mm?) 1 = thickness of the plate (mm) There are certain codes, like code for unfired pressure vessels, which suggest reduction in strength of a butt welded joint by a factor called efficiency of the joint. Where the strength is to be reduced, Eq. (8.2) is modified and rewritten in the following way, P=o,thn (83) where, 1) = efficiency of the welded joint (in fraction) Butt welded joint, when properly made, has equal or better strength than the plates and there is no need for determining the stresses in the weld or the size and the length of the weld. All that is, required is to match the strength of the weld material to the strength of the plates. Example 8.1 4 gas tank consists of a cylindrical Shell of 2.5 m inner diameter. It is enclosed by hemispherical shells by means of butt welded Joint as shown in Fig. 8.6. The thickness of the cylindrical shell as well as the hemispherical cover is 12 mm. Determine the allowable internal pressure to which the tank may be subjected, if the permissible tensile stress in the weld is 85 Nimmt. Assume efficiency of the welded joint as 0.85. Fig. 86 Se Given For shell, D=2.5m ¢=12mm For weld, 6,=85 N/mm? = 0.85 Step Tensile force on plates The length of the welded joint is equal to the circumference of the cylindrical shell. 1= xD=n(2.5x 10)= 7853.98 mm. From Eq. (8.3), P=, tln =(85) (12) (7853.98) (0.85) = (6809.4 x 10-)N Step I Allowable internal pressure Corresponding pressure inside the tan! P _ (6809.4 10°) —? x 12 2p? = @sxid 4 as ’ given by =1.39 N/mm? 8.7 STRENGTH OF PARALLEL FILLET WELDS A parallel fillet weld subjected to a tensile force P is shown in Fig, 8.7(a). The enlarged view of the fillet weld is shown in 8.7(c). There are two terms related to the dimensions of the fillet weld, viz., leg # and throat ¢. The size of the weld is specified by the leg length. As explained in Section 8.3, the cross-section of the fillet weld consists of a right-angled triangle having two equal sides. The length of each of the two equal sides is called a Jeg. As a mule, the leg length h is equal to the plate thickness. The throat is the minimum cross-section of the weld located at 45° to the leg dimension. Therefore, t= hos (45°) or 1= 0.707 h (8.4) Failure of the fillet weld occurs due to shear along the minimum cross-section at the throat. It will be proved at a later stage in Section 8.7 that for parallel fillet weld, the inclination of the plane where maximum shear stress is induced, is 45° to the leg dimension. The shear failure of the weld is, shown in Fig. 8.7(b). The cross-sectional area at the throat is (1) or (0.707 Al). The shear stress in the fillet weld is given by, __? = V707 (8.5) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Wetted and Riveted Joints 281 150 kN t i 100-1 T 150 KN. Fig. 8.13, Solution Given P=150kKN h=Smm Allowable shear load ~ 330 N/mm. ‘Step I Total length ofweld It is mentioned earlier that the transverse fillet weld is designed on the basis of shear stress. In such cases, the stress in the fillet weld is considered as shear stress on the throat for any direction of applied load. With this assumption, the equations derived for the parallel fillet weld are also applicable to the transverse fillet weld. Suppose Z is the total length of welds required for the joint. Since the allowable shear load per mm Jength of weld is 330 N, the required length of weld is given by, 150x10° bey 245455 mm @ Step IL Length of parallel fillet weld From Fig. 8.13, 2x 1+ 100 (i) From (i) and (ii), 2x 1+ 100 = 454.55 (7177.27 mm Adding 15 mm for starting and stopping of the weld run, T= 177.27 +15 = 192.27 or 195 mm 8.9 MAXIMUM SHEAR STRESS IN PARALLEL FILLET WELD A double parallel fillet weld of equal legs subjected to a force of (2P) is shown in Fig. 8.14(a). It is required to find out the inclination (@) of the plane in the weld, where maximum shear stress is induced and also, the magnitude of the maximum shear stress. The effect of bending is to be neglected. The free body diagram of forces acting on the vertical plate with two welds cut symmetrically is shown in Fig. 8.14(b). The symbol x (cross) indicates a fore perpendicular to the plane of paper, which gocs away from the observer. The symbol © (dot) indicates a force perpendicular to the plane of Paper, which is towards the observer. The welds are cut at an angle 6 with the horizontal. ¢ is the width of plane that is inclined at angle @ with the horizontal. had © Fig. 8.14 In the triangle ABC (Fig. 8.14¢), AB=BC=h ZECD=45° DE LBC BC=BE+ EC =BE+DE — (DE=EC) = BD cos 6+ BD sin @ = BD (cos 6+ sin @) on, h= (sin 0+ cos 8) Therefore, (sind + cos®) en aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded end Riveted Joints 285 le 8.8 How much length of a 10 mm fillet weld is required to weld the long side of an ISA angle 150 x 75 x 10 to a steel plate with side welds only? A static load of 125 kN acts through the centre of gravity of the angle section which is 53.2 mm from the short side. The allowable load per mm of the weld length is 665 N. Solution Given P= 125KkN allowable load ~ 665 N per mm of weld Step 1 Total iength of weld The welded joint is shown in Fig. 8.18. The total length (/) of two fillet welds is given by. P 125x10" _ i g797 Py 665 eam 53.2 T P Fig. 8.18 Step I Weld lengths 1, and ly J+ == 18797 mm @ From Eq. (8.19), 1hy,= bys or b (150 ~ 53.2) = (53.2) 96.81, = 53.25 (i) From (i) and (ii), 1, = 66.67 mm — and 1, = 121.30 mm 8.12 ECCENTRIC LOAD IN THE PLANE OF WELDS The design of welded joint subjected to an eccentric load in the plane of welds, consists of calculations of primary and secondary shear stresses. A bracket subjected to an eccentric force P and attached to the support by means of two fillet welds 7, and W;, is shown in Fig. 8.1%(a). In such problems, the first step is to determine the centre of gravity of welds, treating the weld as a line. Suppose G is the centre of gravity of two welds and ¢ is the eccentricity between the centre of gravity and the line of action of force P. According to the principle of Applied Mechanics, the eccentric foree P can be replaced by an equal and similarly directed force (P) acting through the centre of gravity G, along with a couple (Mf = P x e) lying in the same plane (Fig. 8.19(b)]. The effects of the force P and the couple M are treated separately as shown in Fig 8.19(c) and (d) respectively. fa) ° “y “et (o) Fig. 8.19 Analysis of Eccenirically Loaded Welded Joint aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints 289 Vertical component = 7, sin ¢ ~ 1824.27 1094.56 N/mm? sin (36.87) = Horizontal component = 7, cos — 1824.27 1459.41 Nimm? cos (36.87) = The primary shear stress C2) is vertically upward. Therefore, the total vertical component is given by, (ese. 22) or (= 56 t The resultant shear stress is given by, nn? Step IV Size of weld ‘The permissible shear stress for the weld material is 100 N/mm?, Therefore, 2018.58 100 = or ¢= 20.19 mm t and D507 ~ 0.107 Example 8.11 An eccentrically loaded bracket is welded to the support as shown in Fig. 8.28, The permissible shear stress for the weld material is 55 N/mm? and the load is static. Determine the throat and leg dimensions for the welds. = 28.56mm 25kN 490 Solution Given P=25kN 1=55N/mm? Step 1 Primary shear stress There are two vertical welds W, and i”; and one horizontal weld W3. By symmetry, the centre of gravity G of the welds is midway between the vertical welds. or = F =50mm Taking moments about the top weld and treating the weld as a line, (150 +150 +100) ¥ = (150) (75) + (150) (75) + (100) (0) ¥ =56.25mm (from the top weld) ‘The areas of the three welds are as follows: 4, = (150 ) mm? 50.) mn? 100 ¢) mm? 1 +4) +43 = (400 ) mm? ‘The primary shear stress in the weld is given by, P_ 25000 62.5 a ao P= 2500 25 Nia? @ A 4001 t Step 11 Secondary shear stress ‘As seen from Fig. 8.28, A is the farthest point from the centre of gravity and its distance ris given by GA = Y(1S0— 56.25)? + (50)? (150 ~ 56.25) 6=61.93° 50 ¢=90-0=90- 61.93 = 28.07° Therefore, the secondary shear stress % is inclined at 28.07° with the horizontal, e=50+ 100= 150mm M-= Px e= (25000) (150) = 3 750 000 N-mm Gy, G, and G, are the centres of gravity of the three welds and the distances are as follows: GG = (75 - 56.257 +(50)? = 534mm 7, =53.4mm 106.25 mm. tan 6= oy n= GG 56.25 mm From Eq. (8.25), ices: P waned] ae aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints 293 ‘The primary shear stress in the welds is given by, gate 2 (2 ‘4 G00) Vt StepII Bending stress Referring to Fig. 8.35, the moment of inertia of four welds about the X-axis is given by e ay id? Tg = 2| — = = 12 t OOx [> lg ) Nmm? (i) for Y Fig. 8.35, Assuming b and d to be large as compared to the throat dimension ¢ and neglecting the terms containing ?, we have Substituting the values, [! 00)(150)? (150)? 2 From Eq, (8.28), _ Myy _ (25000x500)(75) 7 (75) (50y¢ 5555)q vec Step III Maximum shear stress From Eq, (8.29), the maximum shear stress in the weld is given by, z 2 2 ( a 2 _ |( 555.55) | (50 2 ) +m) ( a Jt = 2a! N/mm? HHeseso7} mm’ op Gi) StepIV Size ofweld Since the permissible shear stress in the weld is 15 Nimm?, (24)=15 or ¢=3.76mm 7 k 76 0.707 0.707 and =5.3226mm Example 8.15 4 circular beam, 50 mm in diameter, is welded to a support by means of a fillet weld as shown in Fig. 8.36. Determine the size of the weld, if the permissible shear stress in the weld is limited t0 100 N/mm’. 1 Solution Given P=10KN t= 100 N/mm? StepI Primary shear stress From Eq. (8.27), the primary shear stress in the weld is given by P__ 10000 A xDt x50) ( t 10kN Fig. 8.36 Ninn? @ Step IT Bending stress Consider an elemental section of area 64 as shown in Fig. 8.37. It is located at an angle @ with X axis and subtends an angle 46. y aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Rivet Joints 297 The endurance limit of the butt weld is given by, Se=KK KK Se = (0.52)(0. ssyo90n( 5 e225) = 74.34 Nimm? Step IT Permissible stress amplitude 0, on 7.17 N/mm? Step I Length of weld P 100000 o=G ot MIT= as = 107.61 or 110mm 8.17 WELDING SYMBOLS The complete information about the welded joint is conveyed by the designer to the welding operator by placing suitable welding symbols on the drawings. The information includes the type of welded joint, the size of weld, the location of weld and certain special instructions?. The basic symbols used to specify the type of weld are shown in Fig. 8.42. The complete weld symbol consists of the following elements: Type of Weld | Symbol Fillot ‘ Square Butt | TT Singe v-Butt | “J Double V-Butt| Spot x Seam xxx Projection Aa Fig. 842 Basic Weld Symbols (i) abasic symbol to specify the type of weld; Gi) an arrow and a reference line to indicate the location of the weld; (iii) supplementary symbols to indicate special instructions such as weld-all-round, site weld, finish, ete.; and (iv) dimensions of the weld in cross-section and length. The weld symbols are illustrated in Fig. 8.43. The location of the weld is indicated by an arrow and a reference line. The head of the arrow indicates the reference side of the joint. When the weld symbol is below the reference line, the weld is made on the same side of the joint as the arrowhead. When the weld symbol is above the dn le he Ler cee em (9) Double Fil IN (d) Double v-Butt Weld t Wold (b) Single Fillet Weld ee ae (€) Lap jeint (©) Sing’e V-Butt Weld (9 Edge joint Fig. 843 Weld Symbols reference line, the weld is made on the other side of the joint opposite the arrowhead. The dimensions given in the fillet weld indicate the leg dimensions. The length of the weld is indicated on the right 31S 813-1986: Scheme of symbols for welding, hand side of the symbol. If nothing is specified, means that the weld is continuous along the entire length of the joint. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints _301 (i) Git) dy) ) wi) to increase the plate thickness to compensate for this loss. Therefore, the thickness of the plate or part is more in case of riveted joint compared with corresponding thickness of parts in case of welded joint. In addition, the weight of rivet is more than the weight of weld. It is estimated that rivets account for 3.5 to 4 per cent of the weight of the structure, while the weight of weld material comes only to 1 to 1.5 per cent. Increased material required for rivet and additional plate thickness increase the material cost of riveted joints. In addition, overlapping strap- plates are required in some types of riveted joints, The labour cost of riveted joins is more than that of welded joints. Riveted joint requires higher labour input due to necessity to perform additional operations like layout and drilling or punching of holes. Besides, the process of riveting is much more complicated and less productive compared with welding operation. The overall cost of riveted joint is more than that of welded joint due to increased metal consumption and higher labour input, On the other hand, welding is cheaper compared with riveting. Riveted assemblies have more weight than welded assemblies due to strap-plates and rivets. Welded assemblies result in lightweight construction. Riveting process creates more noise than welding due to hammer blows. Holes required to insert rivets cause stress concentration. However, in many applications, plates are made of ductile material like mild steel and the effect of stress concentration is reduced due to plastic flow in the vicinity of the holes. Stress concentration also exists in the rivet at the junction between the shank and head. When riveted joint is subjected to variable external load, vibrations or temperature variation, fatigue failure may occur in the regions of stress concentration. 8.20 TYPES OF RIVET HEADS There are number of shapes for the head of the rivet. The most popular type of rivet head is snap head as shown in Fig. 8.46(a). It is also called bution head. Riveted joint with a snap head has strength and fluid tightness. It is used in boilers, pressure vessels and general engincering applications. Its main drawback is the protruding head, which is objectionable in some cases. Pan head rivet, illustrated in Fig. 8.46(b), consists of frustum of cone attached to the shank. It is also called cone head rivet. Pan head rivets are mainly used in boilers and ship hulls and are ideally suited for corrosive atmosphere. Its main drawback is the protruding head. In applications where protruding head is objectionable, countersunk head rivet as shown in Fig. 8.46(c), is employed. The riveted joints with snap and countersunk head rivets are illustrated in Fig. 8.47. Countersunk head rivets are used in structural work and ship hulls below the waterline. The countersunk hole weakens the plates or parts that are assembled to a great extent. Therefore, countersunk head rivets should be used under unavoidable circumstances. The flat head rivet is shown in Fig. 8.46(d). The height of the protruding head is less than that of snap head rivet or pan head rivet, It does not weaken the plate being assembled. They are used for general engineering applications. Flat head rivets of small sizes are called tinmen’s rivets, which are used in light sheet metal work such as manufacture of buckets, steel boxes and air conditioning ducts. A combination of countersunk head and snap head is shown in Fig. 8.46(e). It is also called half countersunk head. The height of the protruding head is less than that of snap head rivet. It is used for joining steel plates up to 4 mm thickness aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joinis 305 Atypical riveted joint used in construction work such as bridges, trusses and cranes is shown Fig. 8.53. Itis known as diamond joint because the rivets are arranged in a diamond shape. It is also called Lozenge joint. This type of joint results in economical construction because a plate of smaller width is required for this joint. Lozenge joint is often called ‘economical’ joint. CPG, => @ @ 2 6 @ ©e@@ ® © Coes oc a @ @ ee 8.53 Diamond or Lozenge Joint 8.22 RIVET MATERIALS Rivets used in most of the applications are made of mild steel. There are two varieties of steel rivet bars—hot rolled steel! rivet bar and high-tensile steel rivet bar. Their chemical composition is as follows: carbon = 0.23% (max) sulphur = 0.05% (max) phosphorus = 0.05% (max) Mechanical properties" of steel rivet bars are given in Table 8.4. Rivets used in corrosive atmosphere are made of stainless steel. Rivets used for connecting non-ferrous metals and soft materials are made of copper, brass, bronze and aluminium alloys. Structural joints made of aluminium alloy sections employ duralumin rivets. When metal for the parts being joined and rivet metal have different electrochemical potentials, they form galvanic pairs and accelerate the corrosion process. Therefore, many times rivets are made of the same material as the parts being joined. Table 84 Mechanical properties of steel rivet bars Grade Sy(Nimm?) S,, (Nim?) S,, (N/mm) Elongation (%) | 1. Hot rolled steel rivet bar : 6-12 mm dia 410-530 260 330 23 12-20 mm dia. 250 20-40 mm dia, 240 High tensile steol rivet bar 6-12 mm dia 460 310 370 n 12-20 mm dia 300 20-40 mmm dia. 280 Steel rivet bar for boiler of Grade S137 BR 0-20 mm dia 360-440 220 6 > 20mm dia, 200 4, Steel rivet bar for boiler of Grade St 42 BR 0-20 mm dia 410-300 250 . 2B 20 mm dia. 240 240 'S,,.= ultimate shear strength IS 1148-1982: Specification for hot rolled stee! rivet bars for structural purposes. "2 I$ 1149-1982: Specification for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes. '3 1§ 1990-1973: Specification for steel rivet and stay bars for boilers. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Welded and Riveted Joints 309 the diameter of the rivets; the thickness of the plates; the dimensions of the seam, vi and (iv) the efficiency of the joint. p. p,andm: THETA Fig. 8.60 Given P=250KN w= 200mm 9,~70N/mm? t= 60 N/mm? g,~ 100 N/mm? Step Diameter of rivets There are five rivets subjected to double shear. From Eq. (8.36), P,=2 [E en] 4 or (250x103) =2 [Ee (coy6)| d= 23.03 or 25 mm @ Step IL Thickness of the plates In case of tension in the plate, the first thought is to investigate the section-XX passing through the centres of the three holes as shown in Fig. 8.60. This section has minimum cross-sectional area. However, if the main plate is to break at this section, the two-hole section, denoted by YY, must also fail before the joint will break. This failure at the section-YY may be due to shear failure in two rivets or crushing failure in the plate at two holes. On the other hand, the plate might fail in tension at the two-hole section without affecting the three- hole section. Therefore, strength equations are wrilten for two-hole sections rather than three-hole sections. Or, (w—2d) 10,=P or (200-2 x 25) (70) = 250 x 10? 1=23.81 or 25 mm (i) Step INL Pitch of rivets The pitch of the rivets is given by, width of plate _ 200 = ees = = 66.67 = Sumber of rivets 3 OOOT or p=65mm As mentioned in Section 8.19, the dimensions of the seam are as follows: Sd = 1.5(25) = 375 or 40 mm = 06p = 0.6 (65)= 390r 40 mm (iti) Step IV Efficiency of joint From Eqs (8.36), (8.37) and (8.38), P,=2 [5 #r] =2 5 sy | = 294 524.31N (a) P,= (ov ~ 2d) to, = (200 - 2 x 25)(25)(70) 262 500 N (b) P. =dto, n= 25 (25)(100)(5) = 312 500 (c) From (a), (b) and (c), the lowest strength is 262 500 N. The strength of the solid plate is given by, P= wt o,= 200 (25) (70) = 350 000 N Therefore, the efficiency of the joint is given by, 262 500 = 0.75 13% 7 350 000 “ o Example 8.20 Two tie-bar plates of a bridge Structure, 250 mm wide and 20 mm thick, are fo be connected by a double-sirap butt joint as shown in Fig. 8.61. The rivets and the plates are made of steel. The permissible stresses in tension, shear and compression are 60, 60 and 120 N/mun’? respectively. (i) Determine the diameter of the rivet by using the following empirical relationship, d= 6vt where tis the plate thickness. (ii) Determine the number of rivets by equating the strength of the plate with the strength of aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 320 _Design of Machine Elements For end joints m=0.5n or 0.42 (whichever is less) Knowing efficiency of the joint and rivet diameter, the pitch of rivets is calculated by Eq. (8.59). (@) Number of Rows Referring to Fig. 8.65, the number of rivets in one row is given by, x(D, +1) ae (8.60) A where, n= number of rivets in one row The number of rows is given by, total number of rivets in joint Number of rows ~ number of rivets in one row or Number of rows = n After determining the number of rows, the type of joint such as single-riveted lap joint or double- riveted lap joint is decided. The pitch is again readjusted. The pitch p; obtained by the above procedure has minimum and maximum limits like the pitch of longitudinal joint. From Eqs (8.48) and (8.49), Pr a Prax, = Ct+ 41.28 The minimum limit is set from considerations of ‘manufacturing the rivet head, while maximum limit from considerations of obiaining leakproof joint. (8.61) (vi) Transverse Pitch Figure 8.66 shows a double- riveted circumferential lap joint for a cylindrical pressure vessel. The transverse pitch (p,) is the , blest ld iad) Fig. 8.66 Double-riveted Circumferential Lap Joint distance between two rows of rivets. The overlap of the plate, denoted by a, is given by, a=p,+2m (8.62) where, m= margin The number of rivets in each row is equal. From Eqs. (8.50) and (8.51), (For zig-zag riveting) 2, =0.33p + 0.67d (For chain riveting) pn 2d The margin m is given by, m=1Sd Example 8.23 4 cylindrical pressure vessel with ‘m inner diameter is subjected to internal steam pressure of 1.5 MPa, The permissible stresses for the cylinder plate and the rivets in tension, shear and compression are 80, 60 and 120 N/mm? respectively. The efficiency of longitudinal joint can be taken as 80% for the purpose of calculating the plate thickness. The efficiency of circumferential lap joint should be at least 62% Design the circumferential lap joint and calculate: (i) thickness of the plate; (ii) diameter of the rivets; (iii) number of rivets; (iv) pitch of rivets; (v) number of rows of rivets; and (vi) overlap of the plates. Soluti Given For vessel, D,=1m_ P,=1.5MPa 9,=80N/mm? 7=60N/mm? 0, = 120 Ninm? For longitudinal joint, 7 = 80% For circumferential joint, 1, = 62% Step 1 Thickness of pate From Eq. (8.43), = PRL ca. 1511000) 20,9 2(80)(0.8) = 13.72 or 14mm a Step IL Diameter of rivets 1>8mm From Eq. (8.45), d=6 Vi=6V14 =22.45 or 23mm aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 324 Design of Machine Elements Therefore, PR’ Bit Pf'= Cr = 25(100) = 2500 N Step II Resultant shear force The primary and secondary shear forces are shown in Fig. 8.69(b) and (c). It is observed from the figure that rivet-2 is subjected to maximum resultant force. At rivet-2, the primary and secondary shear forces are additive. Therefore, PS + Py 1250 + 2500 = 3750 N StepIV Diameter of Rivets oy Xp er 50 = — d°(60) a or 3750= 5 ) d=892 or le 8.27 4 bracket is atiached to a steel channel by means of nine identical rivets as shown in Fig. 8.70. Determine the diameter of rivets, if the permissible shear stress is 60 N/mm. 9mm 100 100 Solution Given P=50KN ¢=300mm = t= 60 Nimn? Step] Primary shear force From Eq, (8.63), Pl= P= °* (No. of rivets) . = GON) 5555.56 Step Secondary shear force By symmetry, the centre of gravity G is located at the center of rivet-5. The radial distances of rivet centres from the centre of gravity G are as follows: rs=0 ry = fe =rg= r= 100 mm r= 7 =r, = VL00" +1007 ‘The primary and secondary shear forces acting on rivets 3, 6 and 9 are shown in Fig. 8.71. 3 Ain rs ot ro 9 > i Fig. 8.71 n 14142mm 100 tan@=—— or 9=45° 100, From Eq, (8.65), Pe co 2 (oP trp et) (50. 10°)(300) _ (4x 100? +4 «141.42? +1x 0°) ‘Therefore, P= Cry = 125 (141.42) = 1767.5 N Pé'= Crs = 125(100) = 12500 N By'= Cry = 125(141.42) = 17677.5N Step WE Resultant shear force The resultant force P, is given by, P;= \(Rsin 8 + (Pecos 8+ BP = yil7 677.5sin(45°)P +[17 677.5 cos(45)° + 5555.5 = 21960.1.N The resultant force P, is equal to the resultant force Py aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 328_Design of Machine Elements 8.14 A pressure vessel of the boiler consists of cylindrical shell of 0.8 m inner diameter. It is subjected to internal steam pressure of 2 MPa, Triple-riveted double-strap longitudinal butt joint is used to make the shell. The straps are of unequal width. The pitch of the rivets in outer row is twice of the pitch of rivets in middle and inner rows. A zig-zag pattern is used for arrangement of rivets. The efficiency of the joint should be at least 80%. The corrosion allowance is 2 mm. The permissible stresses for rivets and shell in tension, shear and compression are 80, 60 and 120 N/mm? respectively. Calculate: G)_ thickness of the shell: Gi) diameter of the rivets; (iii)_ pitch of the rivets in outer row; (iv) distance between outer and middle rows, () distance between middle and inner rows, (vi) thickness of inner strap; (vii) thickness of outer strap; and (viii) efficiency of the joint. [@ 14.5 or 15 mm (ii) 23.24 or 24 mm (iii) 130 mm (iv) 53.6 or 55 mm (v) 37.53 or 40. mm (vi) 11.25 or 12 mm (vii) 9.38 or 10 mm (viti) 81.5476] 8.15 A cylindrical pressure vessel with a 0.8 m inner diameter is subjected to an intemal steam pressure of 2 MPa. The permissible stresses for cylinder plate and rivets in tension, shear and compression are 80, 60 and 120 N/mm? respectively. The efficiency of longitudinal joint can be taken as 80% for the purpose of calculating the plate thickness. The corrosion allowance is 2 The efficiency of circumferential lap int should be at least 62%. Design the circumferential lap joint and calculate: (®) thickness of the plate; Gi) diameter of the rivets; (iii) number of rivets; (iv) pitch of the rivets; (v) number of rows of rivets; and (vi) overlap of the plates. [() 14.5 or 15 mm (ii) 23 mm (iii) 42 (iv) 60 mm (v) I (vi) 70 mm) 8.16 A bracket is attached to a vertical column by means of six identical rivets as shown in Fig. 8.81. It is subjected to an eccentric force of 60 KN at a distance of 200 mm from the centre of the column, The maximum permissible shear stress for the rivets is 150 N/mm’. (i) Which rivet is subjected to maximum shear force? (ii) What is the magnitude of maximum force? (iii) Determine the diameter of rivet. [@ Rivet-2 or 4 (ii) 35.38KN (iii) 17.33 mm] lesen 75] 75} Fig. 8.81 8.17 A bracket is attached to a horizontal column by means of three identical rivets as shown in Fig, 8.82. The maximum permissible shear stress for the rivets is 60 N/mm”, Uf 3 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 382_Design of Machine Elements When the shaft is subjected to pure bending moment, the bending stresses are given by, = Moy 32M, or, o,= b= eB When the shaft is subjected to pure torsional ‘moment, the torsional shear stress is given by, (9.2) 16M, a @3) When the shaft is subjected to combination of loads, the principal stress and principal shear stress are obtained by constructing Mohr’s circle as shown in Fig. 9.2. The normal stress is denoted by @, while the shear stress, by 7. We will consider two cases for calculating the value of t {o,2) | (ov2) Fig.9.2 Mohr’s Circle Case I In this case, the shaft is subjected to a combination of axial force, bending moment and torsional moment. 6, = 9,+ 6, Oo) Case In this case, the shaft is subjected to a combination of bending and torsional moments without any axial force. ,= 9, @3) The values of ¢, and o, in Eqs (9.4) and (9.5) are obtained from Eqs (9.1) and (9.2) respectively. The Mobr’s circle is constructed by the following steps: (Select the origin O. (ii). Plot the following poi OA-o, MB-t OD-+ Join DB. The point of intersection of DB and OAs E. (iv) Construct Mohr’s circle with £ as centre and EB as radius. The principal stress 0; is given by, o,= OF = OF + EF= 0 +EB + @h3)-0 The principal shear stress Zax is given by, nus, = EA = EB ( (9.6) 2 (0.7) Equations (9.1) to (9.7) are fundamental equations for design of shafts. However, every time, it is not necessary to use all these equations. For the design of shafts, simple expressions can be developed by combining the above equations. The shaft can be designed on the basis of maximum principal stress theory or maximum shear stress theory. We will apply these theories to transmission shaft subjected to combined bending and torsional moments. 5 a ie} +7 () Maximum Principal Stress Theory The maximum principal stress is 0}. Since the shaft is subjected to bending and torsional moments without any axial force, @) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 336 _Design of Machine Elements Step IV Shaft diameter From Eq. (9.10), Tax = Je V4 04)? ad 16 > > 66.67 = —z V1 185 625.45)° + (330 88: and’ d=45.47 mm. Example 9.2 The layout of a shaft carrying ovo pulleys T and 2, and supported on two bearings A and B is shown in Fig. 9.4(a). The shaft transmits 7.5 kW power at 360 rpm from the pulley 1 t0 the pulley 2. The diameters of pulleys 1 and 2 are 250 mm and 500 mm respectively. The masses of pulleys 1 and 2 are 10 kg and 30 kg respectively. The belt lensions act vertically downward and the ratio of belt tensions on the tight side to slack side for each pulley is 2.5:1. The shaft is made of plain carbon steel 40C8 (Sy = 380 Nimm?) and the factor of safety is 3. Estimate suitable diameter of shaft. If the permissible angle of nwist is 0.5° per metre length, calculate the shaft diameter on the basis of torsional rigidity. Assume G = 79300 N/mm”. 250 500 250 bf ious Py Py” Pe Ps ‘9529275 a Fig.9.4 337 775 S,= 380 Nimm? (8) =3 Forbeltdrive, P;/P, = 2. G=79300 N/mm? @= 0.5° per metre length StepI Permissible shear stress Se _ 05S _ 0.5(380) qe SS = 63.33N/Anm? 6) 3 Step IT Torsional moment _ 60 10°) 2an = 198 943.68 N-mm. Step I Bending moment For the pulley 1, (P, — Pa) X 125 = 198 943.68 _ 60x 10°(7.5) 2(360) (P,-P2)= 1591.55N @ Also, (b) From Eqs (a) and (b), P,=2652.58N and P;= 1061.03 N ‘The weight of the pulley is given by, W,= mg~ 109.81) - 98.1N The total downward force acting at the centre line of the pulley 1 is given by, (P, + Py W,) = 2652.58 + 1061.03 + 98.1 3811.71N ‘The bending moment at the bearing A is given by, (My)up 4 = 3811.71 x 250 = 952 927.5 N-mm For the pulley 2, (P,— P,) x 280 = 198 943.68 (P,- P,) = 795.77 N © Also, @ From Eqs (c) and (4), P= 1326.29 N and P, = 530.52 N The weight of the pulley is given by, W,, = mzg = 30(9.81) = 2943 N ‘The total downward force acting at the centre line of the pulley 2 is given by, (Py+Py+ Wy) = 1326.29 + 530.52 +2943 =2151.11N ‘The bending moment at the bearing B is given by, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 340 _Design of Machine Elements AG, 1358 124 N-mm M,= 381 971.86 N-mm Step IV Shoft diameter From Eq. (9.15), 16 a Vy M py? + MP 16 a Saddsaldb§a @GniSviga (1.5 x 1358124)° + (1.5 x 381971 86) (94.5) or d=48.5 mm Example 9.6 4 transmission shaft supporting ahelical gear B and an overhung bevel gear D is shown in Fig. 9.10. The shaft is mounted on two bearings, A and C. The pitch circle diameter of the helical gear is 450 mm and the diameter of the bevel gear at the forces is 450 mm. Power is transmitted from the helical gear to the bevel gear. The gears are keyed to the shaft. The material of the shaft is steel 45C8 (S,, = 600 and S,, = 380 N/ mm?), The factors k, and k, of ASME code are 2.0 and 1.5 respectively, Determine the shaft diameter using the ASME code. Fig. 9:10 600 Nimm? S,,= 380 N/mm? k=20 k,=15 For gears,(d’,), = 450mm (d’,), = 450mm Step Permissible shear stress 0.30 S,, =0.30(380) = 114 N/mm? 0.18 S,, = 0.18(600) = 108 N/mm? The lower of the two values is 108 N/mm? and there are keyways on the shaft. Tmay, 7 0.75(108) = 81 N/mm? Step It Bending moment The forces and bending moments in vertical and horizontal planes are shown in Fig. 9.11. The resultant bending moments at B and C are as follows: ALB, My = (158 752)? + (208374) = 261 957.85 N-mm AtC, My = ¥ (61500)? + (256 000)? = 263 283.59 N-mm ‘Vertical plane (396.87 33.13 210 Horizontal plane 520.94 60750 640 Neen Step HII Torsional moment M, = 640 x 225 = 144 000 N-mm aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 344 _Design of Machine Elements stress theory. Let us assume that the hollow shaft is subjected to combined bending and torsional moments without any axial force and apply these theories of failures. () Maximum Principal Stress Theory Substituting Egs (9.18) and (9.19) in Eq. (9.20), 1M, |, 16M, Fas 16M, | ~ |xdil-C) nd3(\~C*), ndl-C), or, o> 16 3 > Balen i NOU HOY | (9.22) Ss, yt Also, 1" (By Sw Therefore, — = ) 16 Jonrrone | a, + oP +, 9.23) wl b+ VMY +C *] 623) Equation (9.23) can be used to determine the outer diameter of the hollow shaft on the basis of maximum principal stress theory. (ii) Maximum Shear Stress Theory Substituting Eqs (9.18) and (9.19) in Eq. (9.21), 16m, | 16m, | Fm Vaa-C)| ~ leat UC) 16 a OF Tee = Ht LM) +(M,)° | (9.24) Also, Sux, = Therefore, 0.55, 16 “@ 7a [a4 +4? ] 6.25) It is observed from Eqs (9.8) and (9.22) that expressions for 6, for solid and hollow shafts are similar except the term (1 - C*). The expressions for Tjqx, are also similar for solid and hollow shafts except the term (1 — C*). 9.6 DESIGN OF HOLLOW SHAFT ON TORSIONAL RIGIDITY BASIS. The design of hollow shaft on the basis of torsional rigidity is govemed by the permissible angle of twist per metre length of shaft. The angle of twist 9, (in radians) is given by, Me IG Converting 6, from radians to degrees (8), 180) Mt fe (2) IG © For hollow circular cross-section, (dj ~di') _ w(d} - C*d}) nr 32 8 ads(i-C*) or, J 32 ) ‘Combining Eqs (a) and (b), 584 Ml Gasl-c*) Equation (9.26) is used to design the hollow shaft on the basis of torsional rigidity. Example 9.10 4 propeller shaft is required to Transmit 43 EW power at 500 rpm. It is a hollow shaft, having an inside diameter 0.6 times of outside diameter: It is made of plain carbon steel and the permissible shear stress is 84 Nimm?. Calculate the inside and outside diameters of the shaft. 0.26) Solution Given iW = 45 d,=06 d, Step 1 Torque transmitted by shaft — 60x 10°(kW) _ 60% 10°(45) ‘ 22(500) 1= 84 N/mm? n= 500 rpm Qa = 859 436.69 N-mm. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 348 Design of Machine Elements hub prevents relative motion between the shaft and the hub. The power is transmitted by means of friction. Therefore, saddle keys are suitable for light duty or low power transmission as compared with sunk keys. The resistance to slip in case of flat key is slightly more than that of hollow key with concave surface. Therefore, flat saddle key is slightly superior to hollow saddle key as far as power transmitting capacity is concerned Saddle key requires keyway only on the hub. Therefore, cost of the saddle key joint is less than that of sunk key joint. This is the main advantage of the saddle key. The disadvantage of the saddle key is its low power transmitting capacity. Saddle key is liable to slip around the shaft when subjected to heavy torque. Therefore, it cannot be used in medium and heavy duty applications. x4 Taper 1:100 , i Q al (=n) 9.10 SUNK KEYS 4 sunk key is a key in which half the thickness of the key fits ino the keyway on the shaft and the remaining half in the keyway on the hub. Therefore, keyways are required both on the shaft as well as the hub of the mating element. This is a standard form of key and may be either of rectangular or square cross-section as shown in Fig. 9.18. The standard dimensions of square and rectangular cross-section sunk keys are given in Table 9.3 given on page 349. In sunk key, power is transmitted due to shear resistance of the key. The relative motion between the shaft and the hub is also prevented by the shear resistance of key, Therefore, sunk key is suitable for heavy duty application, since there is no possibility of the key to slip around the shaft. (e>h) @) (b) Section at XX Fig. 9.18 (a) Square Key (b) Flat Key It is a positive drive. This is the main advantage of the sunk key over the saddle key. However, it is necessary to cut keyways both on the shaft and the hub. Therefore, the cost of the sunk key joint is ‘more than that of the saddle key joint. Sunk keys with square or rectangular cross- sections are widely used in practice. A sunk key with rectangular cross-section is called a flat key. The flat key has more stability as compared with square key, Square keys are used in general industrial machinery, Flat keys are more suitable for machine tool applications, where additional stability of the connection is desirable. While selecting the square key without stress analysis, the following rule of thumb may be used, “The industrial practice is to use a square key with sides equal 10 one-quarter of the shaft diameter and length at least 1.5 times the shaft diameter”. d or, b=h= q and 1=1Sd where, b= width of key (mm) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 352_Design of Machine Elements Solution Given kW=15 =720rpm_ S,,= 460 N/mm? (A)=3) d=25mm Step I Permissible compressive and shear stresses Syo=Syy = 460 Nimim? 5, 2 Bec “ = 153.33 N/mm? (f) According {o maximum shear stress theory of failure, Sy =0.5 Sy = 0.5 (460) = 230 Ninm? So 230 96.67 Nim? (A) 3 Step Il Torque transmitted by the shaft 60x 10%(kW) _ 60%10°(15) . Qnn 2x (720) = 198 943.68 N-mm Step HI Key dimensions The industrial practice is to use a square key with sides equal to one-quarter of the shaft diameter. Therefore, d_ 2 be = =6.25 or6mm 4 4 From Eq, (9.27), 2M, __2(198943.68) _ ca Ee oom) From Eq. (9.28), 4M, _ 4098 943.58) 54.60 (4) dh (15333)(25)(6) From (a) and (b), the length of the key should be 35 mm, The dimensions of the key are 66x35 mm. Example 914 The standard cross-section for @ flat key, which is fitted on a 50 mm diameter shaft, is 16 X 10 mm. The key is transmitting 475 Nem torque from the shaft to the hub. The key is made of commercial steel (S,, = 230 N/mm?) Determine the length of the key, if the factor of safety is 3. Solution Given M4,=475N-m_ 5,,=S,.= 230 Nimm? (S)=3 d=50mm b= 16mm A= 10mm Step I Permissible compressive and shear stresses gett 22S 76.67 N/mm? (BA) 3 According to maximum shear stress theory of failure, Sy =05 S,,=0.5 (230) = 115 Nim? Sy _ US oS => =3833N/mm? (6) 3 Step It Key length From Eq. (9.27), 2M, __20475x10') tb @8.33)(50)6) om" @) From Eq. (9.28), 3 4M, __AA7SX10) = 49.56 mm (6) o,dh (76.67)(50)(10) From (a) and (b), the length of the key should be 50 mm. 9.14 DESIGN OF KENNEDY KEY The Kennedy key consists of two square keys as shown in Fig. 9.24. In this case, the hub is bored off the centre and the two keys force the hub and the shaft to a concentric position. Kennedy key is used for heavy duty applications. The analysis of the Kennedy key is similar to that of the flat key. Fig.9.24 Kennedy Key It is based on two criteria, viz., failure due to shear stress and failure due to compressive stress, The forces acting on one of the two Kennedy keys are shown in Fig. 9.25. Since there are two keys, the aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 356 Design of Machine Elements Step Ul Force required to shift gear Due to torque M, a normal force P acts on the splines. It is assumed that the force P acts at the mean radius of the splines. Therefore, M=PR, @ Rye PEE 892 98 4 4 Substituting the above value in Eq, (a). pa Mi _ 936619-16 _ 99 736.42N Rn 28 Friction force = uP ~ 0.06(22 736.42) = 1364.19 N, The force required to shifi the gear is equal and opposite of the friction force. Therefore, the force required to shift the gear is 1364.19 N. 9.16 COUPLINGS A coupling can be defined as a mechanical device that permanently joins two rotating shafts 10 each other. The most common application of coupling is joining of shafts of two separately built or purchased units so that a new machine can be formed. For example, a coupling is used to join the output shait of an engine to the input shaft of a hydraulic pump to raise water from well. A coupling is used to join the output shaft of an electric motor to the input shaft of a gearbox in machine tools. A coupling is also used to join the output shaft of an electric motor to the input shaft of a compressor. There is a basic difference between a coupling and a clutch. Coupling is a permanent connection, while the clutch can connect or disconnect two shafts at the will of the operator. The shafts to be connected by the coupling may have collinear axes, intersecting axes or parallel axes with a small distance in between. Oldham coupling is used to connect two parallel shafts when they are at a small distance apart. Hooke’s coupling is used to connect two shafts having intersecting axes. When the axes are collinear or in the same line, rigid or flexible couplings are used, While the flexible coupling is capable of tolerating, T I$ 6196-1971: Dimensions of fitted half coupling. a small amount of misalignment between the shafts, there is no such provision in rigid coupling. The discussion in this chapter is restricted to rigid and flexible couplings. Oldham and Hooke’s couplings are covered in more detail in textbooks on Theory of Machines. The difference between rigid and flexible couplings is as follows: (i) A rigid coupling cannot tolerate misalignment between the axes of the shafts. It can be used only when there is precise alignment between two shafts. On the other hand, the flexible coupling, due to provision of flexible elements like bush or disk, can tolerate 0.5° of angular misalignment and 5 mm of axial displacement between the shafts. (ii). The flexible elements provided in the flexible coupling absorb shocks and vibrations. There is no such provision in rigid coupling. It can be used only where the motion is free from shocks and vibrations. (iii) Rigid coupling is simple and inexpensive. Fleaible coupling is comparatively costlier due to additional parts. In practice, misalignment always exists due to imperfect workmanship. Therefore, flexible couplings are more popular. A good coupling, rigid or flexible, should satisfy the following requirements: (i) The coupling should be capable of transmitting torque from the driving shaft to the driven shaft. (ii) The coupling should keep the two shafts in proper alignment. (ii) The coupling should be easy to assemble and disassemble for the purpose of repairs and alterations. (iv) The failure of revolving bolt heads, nuts, key heads and other projecting parts may cause accidents. They should be covered by giving suitable shape to the flanges or by providing guards, The couplings are standardized’ * and can be purchased as readymade units, * IS 2693-1964: Specifications for cast iron flexible couplings. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 360 Design of Machine Elements halves and the shaft and partly by shear resistance of key in case of clamp coupling. Clamp coupling is usually designed on the basis of standard proportions for sleeve halves and clamping bolts For sleeve halves, D=2sd (9.35) L=35d (9.36) where D = outer diameter of sleeve halves (mm) L= length of sleeve (mm) d= diameter of shaft (mm) For clamping bolts, dy =0.2d+10 mm (9.37) when d<55mm and d,=0.15d+15 mm (9.38) when d>55mm where, 4d, = diameter of clamping bolt (mm) Alternatively, the diameter of the clamping bolts can be calculated from the first principle. Let us assume that even with Key, the torque is transmitted only by the friction between the shaft and the coupling halves. The clamping force of each bolt is given by, na R=7a?o, 9.39) Va (9.39) G, = permissible tensile stress (N/mm?) It is assumed that half the number of bolts give clamping pressure on input shaft and the remaining half on the output shaft. Therefore, clamping force ‘on each shaft is given by, R vast @) where, ‘n= total number of bolts N= clamping force on each shaft (N) As shown in Fig. 9.32, the frictional force is (/N) and frictional torque is given by, = yn(@ {2 ) = yp b) M, in(S}+sn(2) JNd (b) where, f= coefficient of friction From expression (a) and (b), fad Rn | i i M 132 Forces on Shaft 2M, jan or, (9.40) 9.20 DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR CLAMP COUPLING The basic procedure for finding out the dimensions of clamp coupling consists of the following steps: () Calculate the diameter of cach shaft by the following equations: 60x 10°(kW), = LOM, an xd The shaft, key and clamping bolts are usually made of plain carbon steel. (ii) Calculate the main dimensions of the sleeve halves by using the following empirical equations: D=25d M, and L=35d The sleeve halves are made of grey cast iron of Grade FG 200, (ii) Determine the standard cross-section of the flat key from Table 9.3. The length of the key in cach shaft is one-half of the length of sleeve. Therefore, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 364_Design of Machine Elements approach, the bolts are fitted in large clearance holes. In this case, bolts are tightened with a pre- load and power is transmitted by means of friction between the two flanges. Case I Bolts Fitted in Reamed and Ground Holes ‘The forces acting on individual bolts due to transmission of the torque are shown in Fig. 9.36. Equating the external torque with the resisting torque, Bes My=PX>XN @) where, torque transmitted by the coupling (N-mm) force acting on each bolt (N) D= pitch circle diameter of bolts (mm) N= number of bolts. 6 /— Botrote section Fig. 9.36 Shear Resistance of Bolts It should be noted that the bolts are subjected to direct shear stress due to the force P and not torsional shear stress, No torque is acting about the axis of the bolt. The force P results in only direct shear stress. The direct shear stress in the bolt is given by, P (b) (74) 4 where, T= shear stress in the bolt (N/mm?) d, = nominal diameter of the bolt (mm) From (a) and (b), 8M, t= 9.40) aDNdP Equation (9.41) is used to determine the nominal diameter of the bolts, The above analysis of the coupling is based on the assumption that the bolts are fitted in rimmed and ground holes. The bolts are finger, tight in these holes and there is no clearance between the holes and the nominal diameter of the bolts. Case I Bolts Fitted in Large Clearance Holes When the bolts are fitted in large clearance holes, the above analysis is not applicable. In this case, the bolts are sufficiently tightened with a pre- load and the torque is transmitted from one flange to the other by means of friction between them. For uniformly distributed pressure, the friction radius Ry is given by, =2R=R) 3(R, -R}) a (9.42) where, (Fig. 9.35) R, = outer radius of the flange (D, /2) (mm) R,~ radius of the recess (d, /2) (mm) Assume that, initial tension in each bolt (N) H= coefficient of friction between flanges The friction force will be (yi P; N) and the torque is given by, M,= uP, N Ry (9.43) Flanges have complex shape and the easiest method to make the flanges is casting. Flanges are usually made of grey cast iron of grade FG 200. The bolts, keys and shaft are made of plain carbon steels on strength criterion. 9.22 DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR RIGID FLANGE COUPLING The basic procedure for finding out the dimensions of the rigid flange coupling consists of the following steps: (i) Shaft Diameter Calculate the shaft diameter by using the following two equations: 60x10°(kW) ge 2an F _ 16M, an =e (ii) Dimensions of Flanges Calculate the dimen- sions of the flanges by the following empirical equations: aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 368. Design of Machine Elements = @,<240 Nimm? Step VE_ Dimensions of keys From Table 9.3, the standard cross-section of the flat key for a 60-mm diameter shaft is 18x 11 mm. The length of the key is equal to /,. Or, 1=1,=90mm ‘The dimensions of the flat key are 18 x 11 x 90 mm. From Eq. (9.27), AR) 2M 20 O84 135.18) _ 61.4 N/mm? dbl (60)(18)(90) *-£<80 N/mm? From Eq. (9.28), ow Ae = M2984 155.18) dhl (60\(11)(90) = 200.95 N/mm? 9, < 240 Nimm? The shear and compressive stresses induced in the key are within permissible limits, 9.23 BUSHED-PIN FLEXIBLE COUPLING Rigid coupling can be used only when there is perfect alignment between the axes of two shafts and the motion is free from vibrations and shocks. In practice, it is impossible to obtain perfect alignment of shafis. Misalignment exists due to the following reasons: (i) deflection of shafts due to lateral forces; (ii) error in shaft mounting due to manufacturing tolerances; (iii) use of two separately manufactured units such as.an electric motor and a worm gear box; and (iv) thermal expansion of the parts. If rigid coupling is used in such circumstances, the misalignment causes excessive bearing reactions resulting in vibrations and wear. To overcome this problem, flexible couplings are used. A flexible coupling employs a flexible element like a rubber bush between the driving and the driven flanges. This flexible rubber bush not only accommodates the misalignment but also absorbs shocks and vibrations. The basic types of misalignment between axes of the input and output shafts are shown in Fig. 9.38. A flexible coupling can tolerate 0.5 mm of lateral or axial misalignment and 1.5° of angular misalignment. Inputshatt Output shaft iF 8 {a) Lateral misalignment 3 (b)Axal misalignment e (e)Angular misalignment Fig. 9.38 Types of Misalignment The construction of the flexible coupling is shown in Fig. 9.39. It is similar to the rigid type of flange coupling except for the provision of rubber bush and pins in place of bolts. The coupling consists of two flanges, one keyed to the input shaft and the other to the output shaft. The two Manges are connected together by means of four or six pins. At one end, the pin is fixed to the output flange by means of a nut, The diameter of the pin is enlarged in the input flange where a rubber bush is mounted over the pin, The rubber bush is provided with brass lining at the inner surface. The lining reduces the wear of the inner surface of the tubber bush. Power is transmitted from the input shaft to the input flange through the key. It ig then transmitted from the input flange to the pin through the rubber bush. The pin then transmits the power to the output flange by shear resistance. Finally, power is transmitted from the output flange to the ‘output shaft through the key. The bushed-pin type flexible coupling has following advantages: (i It can tolerate 0.5 mm of lateral or axial misalignment and 1.5° of angular misalign- ment. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 372_Desigo of Machine Elements 2M, 7 abl 4M, “dil: Example 9.23 4 flexible coupling, illustrated in Fig. 9.39, is used 10 transmit 15 kW power at 100 rpm. There are six pins and their pitch circle diameter is 200 mm. The effective length of the bush (1). the gap between two flanges and the length of the pin in contact with the right hand flange are 35, 5 and 23 mm respectively. The permissible shear and bending stresses for the pin are 35 and 152 N/mm’ respectively. Catculate. (@ pin diameter by shear consideration; and (ii) pin diameter by bending consideration, Solution. S$ = 100 rpm For pins, $Nimm? 6, =152 Nimm? N=6 D=200mm Step Pin diameter by shear consideration 60x10" (kW) _ 60x10°(15) 2nn 2 (100) = 1432 394.49 N-mm From Eq. (9.51), 8M, 35- 8 (1 432 394.49) ad?DN dj? (200) (6) y= 932mm a Step I Pin diameter by bending consideration The force acting on each bush P and torque M, are related by the following expression, D M=Px>xN 21 432 394.49) _ 599 39 y DN (200)(6) It is assumed that the force P is uniformly distributed over the bush length of 35 mm as shown, in Fig. 9.42. At the section-XX, M,= [se]. (2387.32 x 22.5) N-mm ws pgp = 321038732 22.5) nd ad; d, = 15.33 mm (ii) section at XX adhe Fig. 9.42 It is required to design a bushed- coupling to connect the output shaft of an electric motor to the shaft of a centrifugal pump. The motor delivers 20 kW power at 720 rpm, The starting torque of the motor can be assumed to be 150% of the rated torque. Design the coupling and specify the dimensions of its components. Solution ven KW=20 n= 720 rpm design torque = 1.5 (rated torque) Step 1 Selection of materials () The shafts are subjected to torsional shear stress. On the basis of strength, plain carhon steel of grade 40C8 (S,, = 380 N/mm?) is used for the shafts. The factor of safety for the shaft is assumed as 2. (ii) The keys are subjected to shear and compressive stresses. The pins are subjected to shear and bending stresses. On the basis of strength criterion, plain carbon steel of grade 30C8 (S,, = 400 N/mm”) is selected for the keys and the pins. The factor of safety for the keys and the pins is taken as 2. It is assumed that the compressive yield strength is 150% of the tensile yield strength. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Shafts, Keys and Couplings 379 Table 9.4 (Contd) ‘Case 8 Simply supported beam—Overhang load (A) Bending moments P (M,)atz=-* wen @9) (My) atx=P@-t-a) (xD) G0) yp (®) Deflections , Pax(t? = x?) 4 af oc fare OE) «

) @2) id Pa(i +a) Case 8 dac=-AOro @3) Solution (i) Deffection due to a force of 6631.5 N [Fig. Given 6,,.= 1mm £=207000N/mm? StepI Deflection at Gear -B The deflection at gears B ot C (Fig. 9.6) is calculated by the principle of superimposition. Consider the deflection at B. Vertical plane (i) Deflection due to a force of 1609 N [Fig. 9.41(a), Eq. (27) of Table 9.4]: Pax(x? +6? -P) sh = SETI _ (1609) (1800) (900) (9007 + 18007 - 27007) ~ 6E (2700) n ~~ 2d mm @ 200. +1800 r jes a 3 c D a) Cpe A 3 c 2 © 9.47(b), Eq. (27) of Table 9.4): Gp, = PGB PY 6EIT (6631.5) (900) (900) (900 +900" — 2700) ~ 6E 1(2700) 18.8x10" =e Gi) The vertical deflection at B denoted by (5,), is given by the principle of superimposition. (6p). = Oe + Oe)2 _ 5.2131 x10 + 8.8 x10! ~ El EI n = 13.5860x10" EI po “— A 8 @ 6631.5 ° ) ea a 8 foes 67 2 @ Fig. 9.47 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Shufis, Keys and Couplings _383 PP 6; | 2 32EI The deflection at B is given by, PP PP _ PP °°" 32EI 96EF 48E] © 5p = 83 9.28 GRAPHICALINTEGRATION METHOD In some cases, the forces acting on the shaft and its geometry are such that it is not possible to use classical methods, such as the principle of superimposition or Castigliano’s theorem, to find out the deflection, Hence, here the graphical integration method is used. The main drawback of this method is its limited accuracy. The principle of this method is illustrated in Fig. 9.50. Let us consider a function, J=SO) in such a way that, = 200 units ford. a) Pa(!— x(x? +a” —2ix) Ss)4= ie ETI (By = $28335105002250—1750)(1750" + 750% oe GEI(2250) —4.05(10)' . = =e , Gi) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Shafts, Keys and Couplings 391 (27.15 mm) 9.12 Assume the data of the intermediate shaft illustrated in Example 9.11. The permissible angle of twist for the shaft is 0.25° per metre length and the modulus of rigidity is 79 300 N/mm?, Determine the shaft diameter on the basis of torsional rigidity. [45.3 mm] Consider the forces acting on the intermediate shaft illustrated in Example 9.11. The maximum permissible radial defiection at any gear is limited to (0.01 m), where m is the module. The module of the two spur gears is 10 mm and the modulus of elasticity of the shaft material is 207 000 N/mm?, The shaft is simply supported at the bearings. Determine the radial deflections at gears A and B and find out the shaft diameter on the basis of lateral rigidity. 25.42 x 108 31.23 x108 a’ &F 9.13 and 41.87 om 9.14 A transmission shaft, supporting two pulleys A and B and mounted between two bearings C, and C, is shown in Fig. 9.57. Power is transmitted from the pulley A to B. The shaft is made of plain carbon steel 45C8 (S,, = 600 and 5,, = 380 N/mm”). The pulleys are keyed to the shaft. Determine the shaft diameter using the ASME code if, 915 9.46 947 Fig. 9.57 ky=15 and = 1.0 Also, determine the shaft diameter on the basis of torsional rigidity, if the permissible angle of twist between the two pulleys is 0.5° and the modulus of rigidity is 79 300 Nimm? [25.35 and 25.78 mm] The cross-section of a flat key for a 40 mm diameter shaft is 22 x 14 mm. The power transmitted by the shaft to the hub is 25 kW at 300 rpm The key is made of steel (S,. = S,, = 300 N/mm?) and the factor of safety is 2.8. Determine the length of the key. Assume (S,, = 0.577 S,,) [53.05 mm] It is required to design a square key for fixing a pulley on the shaft, which is 50 mm in diameter. The pulley transmits 10 kW power at 200 rpm to the shaft. The key is made of steel 45C8 (5,, = 5,, = 380 N/mm?) and the factor of safety is 3. Determine the dimensions of the key. Assume (S,, = 0.5775,) [/2.5 x 12.5 X25 mm} A fiat key is used to connect a pulley to a 45 mm diameter shaft. The standard cross section of the key is 14 x 9 mm. The key is made of commercial steel (5, = S,. = 230 Nimm®) and the factor of safety is 3. Determine the length of the key on the basis of shear and compression considerations, if 15 kW power at 360 rpm is transmitted through the keyed joint. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. leaf, called the master leaf, is bent at the two ends to form spring eyes. The leaves of multi-leaf spring are subjected to bending stresses. Multi-leaf springs are widely used in automobile and railroad suspensions. In addition to the above mentioned types of springs, there are other springs such as helical springs of rectangular cross-section, spiral torsion springs, disk or belleville springs and volute springs. The discussion in this chapter is mainly restricted to helical springs and leaf springs. 10.3 TERMINOLOGY OF HELICAL SPRINGS The main dimensions of a helical spring subjected to compressive force are shown in Fig. 10.4. They are as follows: wire diameter of spring (mm) inside diameter of spring coil (mm) D, = outside diameter of spring coil (mm) D = mean coil diameter (mm) Therefore, D, +d, pacts 0.1) 2 bes Fig. 104 Dimensions of Spring There is an important parameter in spring design called spring index. It is denoted by the letter C. The spring index is defined as the ratio of mean coil diameter to wire diameter. Or, oo2 10.2) dq (10.2) Springs 395 In the design of helical springs, the designer should use good judgement in assuming the value of the spring index C. The spring index indicates the relative sharpness of the curvature of the coil. A low spring index means high sharpness of curvature. When the spring index is low (C < 3), the actual stresses in the wire are excessive duc to curvature effect. Such a spring is difficult to manufacture and special care in coiling is required to avoid cracking in some wires. When the spring index is high (C > 15), it results in large variation in the coil diameter, Such a spring is prone to buckling and also tangles easily during handling. A spring index from 4 to 12 is considered best from manufacturing ‘considerations, Therefore, in practical applications, the spring index usually varies from 4 to 12. However, a spring index in the range of 6 to 9 is still preferred particularly for close tolerance springs and those subjected to cyclic loading. ‘There are three terms—free length, compressed fength and solid length, which are illustrated in Fig. 10.5. These terms ere related to helical ‘compression spring. These lengths are determined by the following way: (Solid Length Solid length is defined as the axial length of the spring which is so compressed that the adjacent coils touch each other: In this case, the spring is completely compressed and no further compression is possible. The solid length is given by, Solid length =, d where, NN, = total number of coils (ii) Compressed Length Compressed length is defined as the axial length of the spring, which is subjected to maximum compressive force. In this case, the spring is subjected to maximum deflection &. When the spring is subjected to maximum force, there should be some gap or clearance between the adjacent coils. The gap is essential to prevent clashing of the coils, The clashing allowance or the total axial gap is usually taken as 15% of the maximum deflection. Sometimes, an arbitrary decision is taken and it is assumed that there is a gap of 1 or 2 mm between adjacent coils under maximum load condition. In this case, the total axial gap is given by, Total gap = (W,— 1) x Gap between adjacent coils aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Springs 399 4c-1 a 0.615 k= 4e-4*¢e where C is the spring index. The Wahl factor provides a simple method to find out resultant stresses in the spring. As shown in Fig. 10.9(c), the resultant shear stress is maximum at the inside radius of the coil. In normal applications, the spring is designed by using the Wahl factor. When the spring is subjected to fluctuating stresses, two factors X, and K, are separately used. ‘The angle of twist (@) for the equivalent bar, illustrated in Fig. 10.8(b), is given by, (10.7) w M, = torsional moment (PD/2) 1= length of bar (RDN) J= polar moment of inertia of bar (nd/32) G= modulus of rigidity Substituting values in Eq. (f), = EDI ADN) (xd*/32)G 16PD?>N or o- GA ® As shown in Fig. 10.10, the axial defiection ‘5? of the spring, for small values of @, is given by, x (length of bracket) x(DI2) (h) = a) He P P Fig. 10.10 Deflection of Spring Substituting value of @ from Eq. (g) in Eq. (h), 8PD'N Gd" o= (10.8) The above equation is called the load-deflection equation. The rate of spring () is given by, P “6 Substituting Eq, (10.8) in the above expression, p= 10 ~ 3pN (in) When a helical spring is cut into two parts, the parameters G, d and D remain same and NV becomes (N12). Iris observed from Eq. (10.9), that the stiffness (2) will be double when N becomes (N/2). It is observed from Eq. (10.8) that for a given spring, baP or Ped ‘The load is linearly proportional to the deflection of the spring. The load-deflection curve for helical spring is shown in Fig. 10.11. The area below the load-deflection line gives the strain energy stored in the spring. Assuming that the load is gradually applied, the energy stored in the spring is given by, E= area below load-deflection line = area of triangle O4B = 8 Fig. 10.11 Load-deflection Diagram or, E (10.10) where, E = strain energy stored in spring (N-mm) 10.6 SERIES AND PARALLEL CONNECTIONS There are two types of spring connections—series and parallel. The objectives of series and parallel combinations are as follows: aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Springs 403 or expansion that occurs after coiling. Springs made of small diameter wires are wound cold. However, helical springs mede of 6 mm diameter bar or larger are usually hot wound to avoid the high residual stresses that are induced by cold forming, There are non-ferrous materials, such as spring brass, phosphor bronze, silicon-bronze, monel and beryllium-copper, which are also used in spring wires. The discussion in this chapter is restricted to springs made of steel wires. 108 DESIGN OF HELICAL SPRINGS There are three objectives for the design of the helical spring. They are as follows: (i) It should possess sufficient strength to withstand the external load. (ii) It should have the required load-deflection characteristic. (ii) It should not buckle under the external toad. It is possible to design a number of springs for a given application by changing the three basic parameters, viz., wire diameter, mean coil diameter and the number of active turns. However, there are practical limitations on these parameters. In certain applications, there are space limitations, e.g., the spring is to fit in a hole of certain diameter, where the outside coil diameter (D,) is restricted. In some applications, the spring is to fit over a rod, where the minimum inside diameter (D,) of the coil is specified. Before proceeding to design calculations, the designer should specify the limits on these diameters. The main dimensions to be calculated in the spring design are wire diameter, mean coil diameter and the number of active coils. The first two are calculated by the load-stress equation, while the third is calculated by the load-deflection equation. It is convenient to use the load-stress equation, which contains spring index as a parameter. From Eq. (10.6), Substituting r=4(5) (10.13) nd? Factor of Safety The factor of safety in the design of springs is usually 1.5 or Jess. The use of a relatively low factor of safety is justified on the following grounds: (@ In most of the applications, springs operate with well defined deflections. Therefore, the forcesacting on the spring and corresponding stresses can be precisely calculated, It is not necessary to take higher factor of safety to account for uncertainty in external forces acting on the spring. (ii) In case of helical compression springs, an overload will simply close up the gaps between coils without a dangerous increase in deflection and stresses. (iii) In case of helical extension springs, usually overload stops are provided to prevent excessive deflection and stresses. (iv) The spring material is carefully controlled at all stages of manufacturing. The thin and uniform wire cross-section permits uniform heat treatment and cold working of the entire spring. Therefore, the factor of safety based on torsional yield strength (S,,) is taken as 1.5 for the springs that are subjected to static force. (a) 5 0.75S,,and S,, Expression (a) is written as, .S77S.4 (0.577)0.75)S.e 15 or 1203S, (10.14) The permissible shear stress is, therefore, 30% of the ultimate tensile strength of the spring wire. ‘The Indian Standard 44541981 has recommended a much higher value for the permissible shear stress. According to this standard, 05S, (10.15) This is due to higher tensile yield strengths exhibited by the spring wires. In design of helical aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. The line DC is parallel to the line BA. Any point on the line CD, such as X, represents a stress situation with the same factor of safety. Line CD is called the design line because it is used to find out permissible stresses with a particular factor of safety. ‘The line GH is called load line, It is drawn from the point G on the abscissa at a distance 7, from the origin. The torsional shear stress due to initial pre-load on the spring (P;) is 1. The line GH is constructed in such a way that its slope @ is given by, tan @= 2 Tn The point of intersection between design line DC and load line GH is X. The co-ordinates of the point KX are (Ty, 7). Considering imilar triangles XFD and AEB, wz or (10.22) wo The above equation is used in the design of springs subjected to fluctusting stresses. Examples based on Simple Analysis Example 10.1 it is required to design a helical compression spring subjected to a maximum force of 1250 N. The deflection of the spring corresponding 10 the maximum force should be approximately 30 mm. The spring index can be taken as 6. The spring is made of patented and cold-drawn steel wire. The ultimate tensile strength and modulus of rigidity of the spring material are 1090 and 81 370 N/mm? respectively. The permissible shear stress for the spring wire should be taken as 50% of the ultimate tensile strength. Design the spring and calculate: (i) wire diameter; (ii) mean coil diameter; (iil) mumber of active coils; (ix) total number of coils; Springs _407 (v) free length of the spring; and (vi) pitch of the coil Draw « neat skeich of the spring showing various dimensions. Sol Given P=1250N 6=30mm C=6 Sy = 1090 N/mm? G= 81 370 Nimm? 1205 Sy Step Wire diameter The permissible shear stress is given by, T= 0.5 S,,=0.5(1090) = 545 N/mm? From Eq. (10.7), 4c-1 =o + 4c-4° From Eq, (10.13), t= «(&) or 545= (25s) M2520} 0.615 A()=1 , 0615 4(6)-4" 6 K = 1.2525 ad d= 6.630r7 mm @ Step II Mean coil diameter D=Cd=6(7)=42 mm (ii) Step TIL Number of active coils From Eq. (10.8), 8PD'N ie 8(1250)(42)° NV Gd‘ (81 370X7)" =7.91 or 8 coils Gii) StepIV Total number of coils It is assumed that the spring has square and ground ends. The number of inactive coils is 2. Therefore, N,=N+2=8+2= 10coils (iv) Step V_ Free length of spring ‘The actual deflection of the spring is given by, SPD? N _ 8(1250)42)°(8) Gd* (81370)(7)* solid length of spring = WN, d= 10(7) = 70mm It is assumed that there will be a gap of 1 mm between consecutive coils when the spring is subjected to the maximum force. The total number of coils is 10. The total axial gap between the coils will be (10-1) x 1 =9 mm. = 30.34 mm aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 3 3 je 8PD" au _ 8G00)(24) © <1i'Sinm Ga* (81 370K4) The total gap between the adjecent coils is given by, Gap = 15% of = 0.15 (11.15) = 1.67 mm Solid length = N, d= 9(4) = 36 mm Free length = solid length + total axial gap +6 6 + 1.67 + 11.15 8.82 or 30 mm w) Step VI Pitch of coils freelength 50 i it = OS TenB _ "6.25 i Pitch ofeoil= “= B= mm (vi) Example 10.5 4 helical tension spring is used in the spring balance to measure the weighis. One end of the spring is attached to the rigid support while the other end, which is free, carries the weights to be measured. The maximum weight attached to the spring balance is 1500 N and the length of the seale should be approximately 100 mm. The spring index can be taken as 6. The spring is made of oil-hardened and. tempered steel wire with ultimate tensile strength of 1360 Nimm? and modulus of rigidity of 81 370 Nimm?. The permissible shear stress in the spring wire should be taken as 50% of the ultimate tensile strength. Design the spring and calculate @ wire diameter; (ii) mean coil diameter; (iii) number of active coi (iv) required spring rate: and (¥) actual spring rate. Solution Given P=1500N C=6 S,,= 1360 Ninm? G=81 370 N/mm? 0.5 S,, Step 1 Wire Diameter The working principle of the spring balance is illustrated in Fig. 10.18. As the load acting on the spring varies from 0 to 1500 N, the pointer attached to the free end of the spring moves over a scale between highest and lowest positions. The length of the scale between these two positions of the pointer is 100 mm. In other words, the spring deflection is 100 min wien the force is 1500 N. Springs 411 e We 1500 N Fig. 10.18 Mechanism of Spring Balance The permissible shear stress for spring wire is given by, 5 Sy = 0.5 (1360) = 680 N/mm? 0.615 28” 21.25; a ae ad r= 4x6-1 ACA, 0615 4C-4° From Eq. (10.13), f 1500 6 125254 ad ) or 680 d= 65 or7 mm @ Step I Mean coil diameter D=Cd=6(7)=42 mm (i) Step ILL Number of active coils From Eq. (10.8), SPN 8(1500)(42)' NV Gd* (81 370)(7)* N= 21.97 or 22 coils Gi) StepIV Required spring mte P_ 1500 = =15Nh : 5 100 a ow) Step V- Actual spring rate pa Gat _ 813700" 8D°N — 8(42)°(22) 4.98N/mm (vy) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Springs 415 Example 10.9 A safety valve, 50 mm in diameter, is to blow off at a pressure of 1.5 MPa. It is held on its seat by means of a helical compression spring, with an initial compression of 25 mm. The maximum lift of the valve is 10 mm. The spring index can be taken as 6. The spring is made of patented and cold-drawn steel wire with ultimate tensile strength of 1500 N/mm? and modulus of rigidity of 81 370 Nimm?. The permissible shear stress for the spring wire should be taken as 30% of the ultimate tensile strength. Design the spring and calculate: () wire diameter; Gi) mean coil diameter; (iii) number of active turns; (iv) total number of turns; (0) solid length; (vi) free length; and (vit) pitch of the coil. Solution Gi =6 5y= 1500 Nimm? G=81370N/mm? 7= 03S, Step 1 Wire diameter Let P, and 6, denote the initial spring force and deflection respectively when the valve just begins toblow off. R= ; (50)?(1.5) = 2945.24 N 6,= 25mm Let P, and 6 denote the spring force and deflection respectively when the valve is open. 5,= 5,+ valve lift = 25 + 10= 35 mm Also, Pod Therefore, Bee ett R 4 (2945.24) 25 P,= 4123.34 N (maximum force) The permissible shear stress for the spring wire | isgiven by, T= 0.3 S,,= 0.3 (1500) = 450 Nimm? Ka 4CH1 0.615 = A6)-1 , 0.615 c¢. «6-4 6 From Eq. (10.13), t= «() or 450 = 1.2525 [eee rd ad? d=13.240r 14mm @ Step IT Mean coil diameter D=Cd=6(14) =84 mm Gi) Step I Number of active turns From Eq. (10.8), 8PD'N Gd* Substituting values of P, and &,, - 8(2945.24)(84)° N (81370)(14)4 N=5.6 or6 tums Giiy Step IV. Total number of turns It is assumed that the spring has square and ground ends. The number of inactive coils is 2. Therefore, N,=N+2=6+2=8 tums wv) Step V_ Solid length of spring Solid length N,d-8(14)~ 112mm (¥) Step VI Eree length of spring The maximum deflection of the spring under the force of 4123.34 N is given by, b= 8PD°N . 8(4123.34)(84)°(6) es + St = 37.53 mm, Ga (81370\114) It is assumed that there will be a gap of 2 mm between the adjacent turns, when the spring is subjected to the maximum compression. This gap is essential to avoid clashing of the coils. The total number of tums is 8. Therefore, the total axial gap will be (8 — 1) x 2= 14 mm. Free length = solid length + total axial gap + 6 = 112+ 14 +37.53 = 163.53 mm or free length = 165 mm wi) Step VII Pitch of coils Pitch of coil = aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Springs 419 From Table 10.2, S,= 1570 Nim? 5 Sq = 0.5(1570) = 785 N/mm? Therefore, t< 1 The design is satisfactory and the wire diameter should be 2.5 mm. Step II Mean coil diameter D=Cd=6(2.5)=15 mm StepIV Number of active coils i ___ Length of scale length of each division = S08) SS = 100 am 50 Each division indicates 0.5 kg. Therefore, k 8 0508), = 2.4525 Nimm From Eq, as 9), Gd* __81370(2.5)' “gpk 805)'(2.4525) Step V_ Tolal number of coils For helical tension spring, all coils are active coils. Therefore, N=N=48 Solid length of the spring = N, d = 48(2.5) = 120 mm Step VI Spring specifications @ material ~ oil-hardened and tempered steel wire of Grade-SW (ii) wire diameter = 2.5 mm. ii) mean coil diameter = 15 mm (iv) total number of coils = 48 (v) solid length = 120 mm (vi) style of ends = extended-hook Spring Design for Fluctuating Stresses Example 10.13 4 helical compression spring of ‘a. cam-mechanism is subjected to an initial preload of 50 .N. The maximum operating force during the load cycle is 150 N. The wire diameter is 3 mm, while the mean coil diameter is 18 mm. The spring is made of oil-hardened and tempered valve spring wire of Grade-VW (S,, = 1430 Nimm?). Determine the factor of safety used in the design on the basis of fluctuating stresses. = ISON Ppig,=50N d=3mm D=18mm" "Sy = 1430 N/mm? Step Mean and amplitude shear stresses D_WB Ca => =6 a3 From Eq, (10.7) and (10.5), _4C=1,, 0615 _ 46)-1 , 0.615 4C-4 C 4@-4" 6 + Prin y= 4.0s0+50)~ 100 N 2 P, = 5 Pa = Pain.) + (150-50)= SON From Eq, (10.18) and (10.19), 8P,D 8 (100)(18) =K, 1.0833) rank (SP)=¢ oe zo = 183.91 Nimm? - a( 2) = (1.2525) jee 2) xd 23) = 106.32 N/mm? Step 11 Factor of safety From. Eq. (10.21), the relationships for oil-hardened and tempered stee! wires are as follows: 22(1430) = 314.6 N/mm? S,y = 0.45 S,,= 0.45(1430) = 643.5 N/mm? From Eq. (10.22), 1 > 314.6 36 ) 643.5 — ; (314.6) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 426 Design of Machine Elements Adjacent springs having opposite hands, prevent the locking of coils, in the event of axial misalignment or buckling of springs. Concentric spring has the following advantages: (i) Since there are two springs, the load carrying capacity is increased and heavy load can be transmitted in a restricted space. (ii) In concentric spring, the operation of the mechanism continues even if one of thesprings breaks. This results in ‘fail safe’ system. (iii) In concentric spring, the spring vibrations called ‘surge’, are eliminated. Fig. 10.24 Concentric Springs Concentric springs are used as valve springs in heavy duty diesel engines, aircraft engines and railroad suspensions. In some applications, concentric spring is used to obtain a spring force, which is not directly proportional to its deffection. Such a variable force- deflection characteristic is obtained by nesting two springs, one inside the other, having different free lengths. This type of concentric spring is shown in Fig. 10.25(a). The shorter spring begins to act only after the longer spring has been compressed to a certain amount of deflection, As shown in Fig, 10.25(b), the force-deffection characteristics of this type of concentric spring are as follows: Force deflection characteristic of longer spring Force deflection characteristic of shorter spring -cd Force_deflection characteristic of composite spring = agh It is observed that agh is not a straight line. Initially, the concentric spring follows the straight line ag, and at g, there is a sudden change in the load-deflection relationship and then it follows the straight line gh. This results in variable force- , y | i Solid length b bh Force sS ) 5 fa) Fig. 10.25 This type of concentric spring is used in the governor of variable speed engines to take care of variable centrifugal force. The design analysis of concentric spring shown in Fig. 10.24, is based on the following assumptions: (i) The springs are made of the same material. (i) The maximum torsional shear stresses induced in outer and inner springs are equal. (iii) They have the same free length (iv) Both springs are deflected by the sameamount and therefore, have same solid length. The following notations are used in the analysis: ire diameter of outer spring wire diameter of inner spring mean coil diameter of outer spring mean coil diameter of inner spring P, = axial force transmitted by outer spring Py = axial force transmitted by inner spring P = total axial force 6, = deflection of outer spring leflection of inner spring aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 430 _ Design of Machine Elements Stiffness of springs From Eg. (10.9), 4 7 Gay. BISONS)" «99.43 Nima BDIN, — 8(30)°(8) _ Gd _ (813706) _ 8D3N, — 8(36)°(10) This type of spring is shown in Fig. 10.25. The free length of the outer spring is 15 mm greater than the inner spring. Therefore, the inner spring will not transmit any force till the outer spring is compressed. by 15 mm. Suppose P is the axial force on the outer spring corresponding to this compression. P= k, 5= 28.25 (15) = 423.75 N After this load, both springs are active and each will transmit the force. Remaining load shared by two springs = 1000 ~ 423.75 = $76.25 N Concentric springs are parallel springs. From Eq. (10.12), k= 28.25 N/mm. 57.68 N/mm of the composite spring. Suppose x is the further compression of two springs. Remaining load= Ax or 576.25 =57.68x x= 9.99 mm Compression of outer spring = 6, = 15 + 9.99 99mm (i) ‘Compression of inner spring = 5,=9.99 mm (i) Step II Force transmitted by each spring Force transmitted by outer spring P,,= k,8, = 2825(24.99)=705.97N (ii) Force transmitted by inner spring P,= k,6,= 29.43(9.99) = 294.01 N ii) Step IIT Maximum shear stress D, _36 oF, 376 From Eq, (10.7), 4C-1 0615 _ 4(6)-1 Cc 46-4 Outer spring From Eq, (10.6), 1.2525) [eare m6)" = 375.28 Nimm? Gi) Inner spring (1.2525) [eee | (sy = 225.06 Nimm* ii) 10.12 OPTIMUM DESIGN OF HELICAL SPRING In certain applications, springs are designed with @ specific objective, such as minimum weight, minimum volume or maximum energy storage capacity. In such analysis, only one objective is considered at a time for a given application. In this section, we shall discuss the optimum design of a valve spring. The operating mechanism of the exhaust vaive of a disse! engine is shown in Fig. 10.22. The valve-spring is required to meet the following two conditions: (i) The force acting on the spring at the most extended position should have a certain minimum value (Puig). This force is required to keep the valve closed and can be considered as pre-compression, i) When the spring is subjected to maximum compression and the valve is completely open, the stress in the spring wire (mx) should not exceed the permissible torsional shear stress, For the purpose of analysis, the effect of inactive coils is neglected and the spring is designed on the basis of minimum weight. " ae Cross-sectional area of wire = Length of one coil = 2D Length of all active coils = xD Volume of spring wire = (24) (xDN) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 434 Design of Machine Elements Fig. 10.28 Angular Deflection of Spring ‘The strain energy stored in the spring is given by Mh, y =f Ud & v=) Se ©) ‘The integration is to be carried over the entire length of the wire, ic., from 0 to (DA). Therefore, © The deflection in the direction of the force P is approximately (rd ). Using Castigtiano’s theorem, aU _ Pr°(@DN) oP EL Substituting (/ = md'/64), we have ro= gn St PON (10.30) Ed* The stiffness of the helical torsion spring is defined os the bending moment required to produce unit angular displacement. Therefore, galt @ __kd* or = GDW (10.31) Helical torsion springs are cold-wound and residual stresses are set up due to cold working. The direction of the external force acting on the spring should be such that it tends to wind up the spring, In this case, the resulting stresses are opposite to the residual stresses. On the other hand, when the extemal force tends to unwind the spring, stress- relieving treatment is required. The design of the helical torsion spring is based on the torgue-stress and the torque-deflection ‘equations. The spring index is gonerally kept from 5 to 15. When itis less than 5, the strain on the coiling arbor of the torsion winder causes excessive tool breakage. When it is more than 15, the control over the spring pitch is lost. Example 10.21 /t is required to design a helical torsion spring for a window shade. The spring is made of patented and cold-drawn steel wire of Grade-4, The yield strength of the material is 60% of the ultimate tensile strengih and the factor of safety is 2. From space considerations, the mean coil diameter is kept as 18 mm, The maximum bending moment acting on the spring is 250 N-mm, The modulus of elasticity of the spring material is 207 000 Nimnr?. The stiffness of the spring shonld be 3 N-mmirad. Determine the wire diameter and the number of active coils. Solution Given S,=065S, fs)=2 D= 18mm M,~250N-mm £= 207000 N/mm? k=3N-mmrad Step1 Wire diameter ‘The wire diameter is calculated by the trial and error method. Trial! d= 14mm From Table 10.1, Sy = 2290 Nimm? The permissible stress (G, ) is given by, Sy _ 0.605, _ 0.60 (2290) 4, ot = ES = 687 Ni () B) @ ™ o, 857) 4c(c -1) (12.857) (12.85 = 1.0616 32M, 32(250, =K, 2th) 1.0616) % ( ad) " may = 985.18 Nimm? aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 438 _Design of Machine Elements that the individual leaves are separated and the master leaf placed at the centre. Then the second leaf is cut longitudinally into two halves, each of width (6/2) and placed on each side of the master leaf, A similar procedure is repeated for the other leaves. The resultant shape is approximately a triangular plate of thickness 1 and a maximum width at the support as (n, 6). The bending stress in the plate at the support is given by, M, (PAL) (t/ 2). One == Ho >| (1), = @ of ie = Se a ee Fig.10.32 Graduated-lengih Leaves as Triangular Plate It can be proved that the deflection (6,) at the load point of the triangular plate is given by, PL PL oe FE 1 max, 2d (gb) | 3 or, 5 oe () Engbt Similarly, the extra full-length leaves can be treated as a rectangular plate of thickness ¢ and uniform width (n, 6), as shown in Fig. 10.33. The bending stress at the support is given by, My (P,E\t/2) p)y = ; [z yore} _ Pb or (p= abe ©) ’, Fi, 3 7 (a) | aor tt br 1 nb if © Liye Fig. 10.33 Extra full-length leaves as rectangular plate The deflection at the load point is given by, 341 1 3z| 5(0/ax)| 3 or see @ En,bt Since the deflection of full-length leaves is equal to the deflection of graduated- length leaves, = 4 4P,D En,bt* 2n, te or any © also, P.+P,=P. Oo From Eqs (¢) and (1), ® 2n,P oe ) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 442 _Design of Machine Elements (i) It is simple in construction and easy to manufacture. (ii) The Belleville spring is a compact spring unit. It is especially useful where very large force is desired for small deflection of the spring. It provides a wide range of spring constants making it versatile. (v) It can provide any linear or non-linear load- deflection characteristic. (vi) The individual coned disks of a particular size and thickness can be stacked in series, parallel or series-parallel combinations as shown in Fig. 10.37, These combinations provide a variety of spring constants without changing the design. When two Belleville springs are arranged in series, double deflection is obtained for the same force. On the other hand, when two Belleville springs are in parallel, almost double force is obtained for a given defection. 53 es Fig.10.37 Nesting of Belleville Springs: (a) Series Combination (b) Parallel Combination (c) Parallel Series Combination (iii) (iv) ©) Belleville springs are used in plate clutches and brakes, gun recoil mechanisms, relief valves and a wide variety of bolted connections. ‘The analysis of the Belleville spring is exceedingly complex, and mathematical treatment is beyond the scope of this book. The load-deffection andload-stress equations of the Belleville spring are as follows: ES P= [(h- 6/2) (h- St d= Hy M(d,/2y ‘ Mes Orr] (10.42) ES =—, 1G (h- 8/2) + C, 4: © agra i 82+ Cael (1048) where, P = axial force (N) eflection of spring (m) thickness of washer (m) free height minus thickness (m) modulus of elasticity (N/m?) tress at the inside circumference (N/m?) outer diameter of washer (m) inner diameter of washer (m) oisson’s ratio ( 0.3 for steel) 6 [eddy ~ qlog.(d,id,)| (d,/d,) (08) 6 [cess ' saSqmean ae | (10.45) log.(d,/d,) | log.(d,/d;) —§__ [i4)=!_) (10.46) F log. (d,/4,) 2 Example 10.26 4 Belleville spring is made of Silicon steel. The spring is compressed completely flat when it is subjected to an axial force of 4500 N. The corresponding maximum stress is (1375 x 108) N/m? Assume, fo 21.75 and Caleulate (i) thickness of the washer; (ii) free height of the washer minus thickness (h): (iii) outer diameter of the washer; and (iv) inner diameter of the washer fois t fen P=4500N Oya, = 1375 x 105 Nim? Step Thickness of washer When the spring is compressed completely flat. 6=h From Eqs (10.44), (10.45) and (10.46), w.—# [e—] mlog,(d,/d,) (d,fdj) 2 ee Sy = 0.6268 mlog..73) | 1.75 aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 445 _Design of Mactine Elements wire diameter and mean coil diameter of the outer spring are 10 and 80 mm respectively. The number of active coils in inner and outer springs are 10 and 15 respectively. Assume same material for two springs and the modulus of rigidity of spring material is 81370 N/mm?, Calculate (i) the stiffness of spring when the deflection is from 0 to 25 mm (Gi) the stiffness of spring when the deflection is more than 25 mm. [(i) 13.24 Nimm (ii) 29.13 Nimm] 10.11 A flat spiral spring is required to provide a Inlet maximum torque of 1000 N-mm. It is made Fig. 10.38 Spring Loaded Relief Valve of steel strip (E = 207000 Nimm?) and the ‘maximum bending stress in the strip should ‘The diameter of the plunger is 25 mm and the not exceed 750 Nimm2. The ratio of width outer diameter ofthe spring should notexceed 20mm to thickness of the strip is 10. The arbor because of space limitations. The normal working tums through 2.5 revolutions with respect pressure is 0.25 N/mm? and the valve should open to the retaining drum to provide the required ata pressure of | N/mm?, with a valve-lift of 6 mm torque, from the normal position. The spring is made of oil- Calculate the thickness, width and length of hardened and tempered valve spring wire of Grade- strip. VW (G = 81370 Nimm?). The permissible shear [U.2 mm, 12 mm and 5.62 m] stress in the wire can be taken as 50% of theultimate 10.12 A semi-clliptic leaf spring consists of two tensile strength. Design the spring and determine: extra full-length leaves and six graduated- (i) the wire diameter; length leaves, including the master leaf. Each (ii) the mean coil diameter; leaf is 7.5 mm thick and 50 mm wide, The (iii) the stiffness of the spring; and centre-to-centre distance between the) two (iv) the number of active coils. eyes ite] cm: The leaves are:pre: stressed [Ci 3.6 mm (ii) 15 mm (iii) 61.36 N/mm (iv) 9} such a way that when the load is maximum, stresses induced in all the leaves are equal to 350 Nimm?. Determine the maximum force that the spring can withstand, 10.9 A helical compression spring of a mechanism is subjected to an initial pre-load of 50 N and the maximum force during the load eyele is 300 N. The wire diameter is 5 mm, while the spring index is 5. The spring is made of oi!- hardened and tempered steel wire of Grade- SW (5,,= 1440 Nemm?). Determine the factor of safety against fluctuating stresses. [5250.N] 10.13 A semi-elliptic leaf spring consists of two extra full-length leaves and eight graduated- length leaves, including the master leaf, The centre-to-centre distance between the two , eyes of the spring is 1 m, The maximum force . | [1.82] acting on the spring is 10 KN and the width 10.10 A concentric spring consists of two helical of each leaf is 50 mm. The spring is initially compression springs, one inside the other. pre-loaded in such a way that when the load The free length of the outer spring is 25 is maximum, the stresses induced in all the mm greater than the inner spring. The wire leaves are equal to 350 Nimm?, The modulus diameter and mean coil diameter of the inner of elasticity of the leaf material is 207 000 springare 8 and 64 mm respectively. Also, the N/mm, Determine aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 450 _Design of Machine Elements _ The main advantages of friction clutch are as follows (i). The engagement is smooth. (ii) Slip occurs only during engaging operation and once the clutch is engaged, there is no slip between the contacting surfaces. Therefore, power loss and consequent heat generation do not create problems, unless the operation requires frequent starts and stops. In certain cases, the friction clutch serves as a safety device. It slips when the torque transmitted through it exceeds a safe value. This prevents the breakage of parts in the transmission chain. Depending upon the number of friction surfaces, the friction clutches are classified as single-plate or multi-plate clutches. Depending upon the shape of the friction material, the clutches are classified as disk clutches, cone clutches or expanding shoe clutches. The following factors should be considered while designing friction clutches: ( Selection of a proper type of clutch that is suitable for the given application (ii) Selection of suitable friction material at the contacting surfaces (iii) Designing the clutch for sufficient torque capacity (iv) Engagement and disengagement should be without shock or jerk (¥) Provision for holding the contacting surfaces together by the clutch itself and without any extemal assistance (vi) Low weight for rotating parts to reduce inertia forces, particularly in high-speed applications (vii) Provision for taking or compensating wear of rubbing surfaces (viii) Provision for carrying away the generated at the rubbing surfaces heat 11.2. TORQUE TRANSMITTING CAPACITY A fiction disk of a single plete clutch is shown in Fig. 11.3. The following notations are used in the derivation: outer diameter of friction disk (mm) inner diameter of friction disk (mm) intensity of pressure at radius 7 (N/mm?) ‘otal operating force (N) orque transmitted by the clutch (N-mm) 2 Ch Fig.11.3 Friction Disk The intensity of pressure p at radius r may be constant or may be variable. Consider an elemental ring of radius r and radial thickness dr as shown in Fig. 11.4. For this ring, elemental area = (27 dr) elemental axial force = p(2nr dr) 2alpr dr) (a) elemental friction foree = up(2mr dr) elemental friction torque = pip(2nr dr) r = 2m (pred) b) Fig. 11.4 Friction Force on Elemental Ring Integrating the expression (a), P=[2n(prdr) pe or P=2nf pro quay dia Integrating the expression (b), [2m (pr? dr’) bp or M, = 2m J pr dh (1.2) ap aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 454 Design of Machine Elements Example 11.2 Assume the data given in Example 11.1 and calculate the power transmitting capacity of the clutch using uniform pressure theory. Solution =200mm d= 100mm p=02 P,=1Nimm? n=750 1pm Step 1 Operating force From Eq, (11.3), =e (D?-#)= 0) (200? - 100?) P me =23561.95N Step HW Power transmitting capacity From Eq. (11.5), = HP (DS =d°) ‘3 (D?-d?) = 28(750)(366 519.22) 60x10 28.79 Example11.3 An plate clutch is of two pairs of contacting surfaces with an asbestos friction lining. The torque transmitting capacity of the clutch is 550 N-m. The coefficient of friction is 0.25 and the permissible intensity of pressure is 0.5 N/mm. Due to space limitations, the outer diameter of the friction disk is fixed as 250 mm. Using uniform wear theory, calculate (i) the inner diameter of the friction disk; and (ii) the spring force required to keep the clutch in an engaged position. automotive cons Solution =550N-m D=250mm p=0.25 5 Nimm? number of pairs of contacting surfaces = 2 Step I Inner diameter of friction disk ‘The friction disk of the automotive clutch is fixed between the flywheel on one side and the pressure plate on the other. The friction lining is provided on both sides of the friction disk. There are two pairs of contacting surfaces—one between the flywheel and the friction disk and the other between the friction disk and the pressure plate, Therefore, the torque transmitted by one pair of contacting surfaces is (550/2) or 275 N-m. From Eq, (11.7), (275x 10%) = % Rearranging the terms, we have d(250°— dP) = 5 602 254 The above equation is solved by trial and error method. It is a cubie equation, with the following three roots: (i) d= 174.16 mm Gi) d= 112.29 mm (ii) d=-286.46 mm Mathematically, all the three answers are correct. ‘The inner diameter cannot be negative. As a design engineer, one should select the inner diameter as 174.16 mm, which results in a minimum area of friction lining compared with 112.29 mm. For minimum cost of friction lining, d= 174mm @ Step II Required spring force From Eq, (11.6), P Bhd (pay =AO 30 59174) =10386.11N Gi) Example114 A single plate clutch consists of one pair of contacting surfaces. Because of space limitations, the outer diameter of the friction disk is fixed as D. The permissible intensity of pressure is p, and the coefficient of friction, p. Assuming uniform wear theory, plot the variation of the torque transmitting capacity against the ratio of diameters (AD). Show that the torque transmitting capacity of the clutch is maximum, when (d/D) is equal to 0.577. Solution Step I Variation of torque capacity against the ratio @) Sex @ aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. ()) the required force to engage the clutch; and (ii) power transmitting capaclty at 750 rpm. Solution Given D=150mm d=75mm p=0.1 a=750rpm_ = p,=0.3 N/mm? Number of steel plate: Number of bronze plates = 4 Step 1 Required operating force From Eq. (11.6), - FO) 59-75) =2650.72N (i) Step I Power transmitting capacity There are five steel plates and four bronze plates. The total number of plates is 9. Number of disks ~2+1~9 apd P=“ O-d) or z=8 From Eq. (11.10), M, = FE +a) = MONRO 150475 = 119 282.4 N-mm Therefore, _ 2mnM, _ 2 (750)(119 2824) _ 9 1. eae ee 60106 An oil immersed multi-disk clutch, ‘asbestos on one side and steel disks on the other, is used in an application. The torque transmitted by the clutch is 75 N-m. The coefficient of friction between the ashestos lining and the steel plate in the wet condition is 0.1. The permissible intensity of pressure on the asbestos lining is 500 kPa, The outer diameter of the friction lining is kept as 100 mm due to space limitation. Assuming uniform wear theory, calculate the inside diameter of the disks, the required number of disks and the clamping force. Solution Given 75N-m D=100mm p=0.1 Pa= 500 kPa Step I Inside diameter of disks M,=75 N-m= 75 000 N-mm_ Pq = 500 kPa = 500 x 10-3 MPa = 0.5 N /mm? From Eq. (11.10), Pz M= = (D+d) It is observed from the above expression that there are two unknowns d and z, and one equation. It cannot be solved unless we make some assumption. We will assume that the clutch is wansmitiing maximum torque. As explained in Example 11.4, the condition for this objective is written as, d prO577 or d= 0571 D=0.577(100) = 57.7 or 58mm Step IT Clamping force For Eq. (11.6), 2A oy 103) 68) agp 5) = 1913.23N Step I Required number of disks From Eq. (11.10) 4M, 4(75 000) UP(D+d) — (0.1)(1913.23)(100+ 58) .92 oF 10 Number of disks =z +1=10+1=11 We will use 6 plane stecl disks and 5 steel disks with attached asbestos lining 114 FRICTION MATERIALS For light loads and low speeds, wood, cork and leather are used as friction materials, The present trend for high speeds and heavy loads has given a stimulus to the development of new friction materials, which are capable of withstanding severe service conditions. The desirable properties of a good friction material are as follows: (It should have high coefficient of friction. (ii) The coefficient of friction should remain constant over the entire range of tempera- tures encountered in applications. (iii) It should have good thermal conductivity. (iv) It should remain unaffected by environmental conditions like moisture, or dirt particles. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Friction Clutches 463 we 28 O=2] ‘sina 2 aM, #) (1.17) Dividing Eq. (11.17) by (11.16), =P pra (1.18) 4sina The following observations are made: (H Its observed from the above equation, that the torque capacity is inversely proportional to sin @. The value of of should be as small as possible so that sin will be less and M, will be more. Therefore, the torque capacity of a cone clutch increases as the semi-cone angle decreases. However, when ois less than the angle of static friction (@), the clutch has a tendency to grab, resulting in self-engagement. This is not desirable because the clutch should engage or disengage at the will of the operstor, To avoid self-engagement and to facilitate disengagement, a> angle of static friction Taking the coefficient of friction as 0.2, a@>tan'g or o>tan' (0.2)or 11.3" Therefore, the semi-cone angle (a) is taken as 125°. (ii) Fora given torque, M, = constant From Eq. (11.18) — HP Mas ‘Therefore, a relatively small axial fore can transmit a given torque if the semi-cone angle is decreased. However, as the semi- cone angle decreases, there is more wedging action and the force required to disengage increases. Thus, a clutch with a small semi- cone angle requires a relatively small force to engage the clutch but a relatively large force to disengage the clutch. From Eq. (11.8), the torque transmitting capacity of single plate clutch is, + «sit qOrd o Pxsina P M= (D+) Dividing Eq. (11.18) by Eq. (11.8), (Micone 1d (MJpie Sina sin(12.5) Thus, for given dimensions, the torque transmitting capacity of cone clutch is higher than that of single plate clutch, Refer to Fig. 11.14. The face width of a friction lining (6) is given by, D-d 4.62 (ig) 2sinw Fig. 11.14 Example 1110 4 cone clutch with asbestos Jriction lining transmits 30 kW power at 500 rpm. The coefficient of friction is 0.2 and the permissible intensity of pressure is 0.35 N/mm?. The semi-cone angle a is 12.5°. The outer diameter is fired as 300 mm from space limitations. Assuming uniform wear theory, calculate: (i) the inner diameter; (ii) the face width of the friction lining: and (iii) the force required to engage the clutch Solution Given kW=30 »=500rpm y=02 P= 0.35 Nimm? a= 125° D=300mm StepI Inner diameter y= SOX LO(KW) _ 60 x 10°30) . 2an 2(500) =572 957.8 N-mm From Eq. (11.17), = Pod (pp _ 4) 8sina aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 47A_ Design of Machine Elements plane road. When the brakes are applied, the car decelerates at 0.5 g. There are brakes on all four wheels. Calculate: (i) the energy absorbed by each brake; and (ii) the torque capacity of each brake. Solution Given Forcar, m=1000kg v, = 100 km/h Deceleration = (0.52) For wheels, Skg-m? R=0.35m For engine and the transmission system, 1=2.5 kg-m? speed =5 (wheel speed) Step 1 Energy absorbed by each brake (KE of the car 100x10* vy, = 100 km/h = 6x60 =27.18 m/s and v,=0 wpe } c0003(27.787 = 385802.44 J (ii) KE of the wheels 79.37rad/s and @,=0 R035 1 2 KE of four wheels = alt Moy -0 = [2037937 | = 6298.81 J (ill) KE of the engine and transmission system @, = 5(79.37) = 396.83 rad/s and @,=0 KE= $M? -03)= $(2.5)096 837 = 196 837.97 J The energy absorbed by the four brakes consists of the kinetic energy of the car, the kinetic energy of the wheel and the kinetic energy of the engine and the transmission system. (385 802.44 + 6298.81 + 196 837.97) = 147 234.8) 3) Step If Torque capacity of brake The braking time fis given by “oy, 27.78-0 1 =05E 00 3 050.81) 1= 5.665 ‘The average velocity during the braking time is (@,+ ©,)/2 oF (@,/2). Therefore, o- (2): = (FZ )e56 = 224.6 md E_ 147234. aE ONS esa i 3 De 54.N-m Gi) Example 12.3 4 mass of 2500 kg is lowered at @ velocity of 1.5 m/s from the drum as shown in Fig. 12.1. The mass of the drum is 50 kg and its radius of gyration can be taken as 0.7 m. On applying the brake, the mass is brought to rest in a distance of 0.5 m. Calculate (the energy absorbed by the brake: and (ii) the torque capacity of the brake 2500 kg Fig. 121 Solution ven m=2500kg v=15 m/s For drum, R=0.75m m=50kg k=0.7m h=0.5m Step Energy absorbed by brake KE of the mass KE= Smo? eydyes $ 25000.) = 281251 KE of the drum 13. ¥ ot @ =—— = 2rad/s R078 KE= Smo -o FE50V0.770" 349) PE of the mass PE ~ mgh ~(2500)(9.81)(0.5) = 12 262.53 E=2812.5+49+12262.5=151243 (i) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 484 Design of Machine Elements e o+tsin2g or h =a — Risin g)8 =0 4Rsin6 = 26+sin26 (12.12) The elemental torque of frictional force (judN) about the axis of the brake drum is (udNR). Therefore, a M, = 2] udNR 3 Substituting the value of dV from Eq. (0), @ M, = 2UR2WPgay, e080 3 M4, = 2URWP pgs, Sin 8 (12.13) The reaction Ry can be determined by considering two components (dN cos @) and (id sin @) as shown in Fig.12.15(2). Due to symmetry, Juaw sing = 0 This is illustrated in Fig. 12.15(b), where two symmetrical elements in mirror image position with respect to the X-axis are considered. Therefore. 6 8 Ry = 2fancosp = 2RWP max, Joos? odo ° a = 28 Ppa ast 2 or Ry = ERP a (26+sin20) (12.14) The reaction Ry can be determined by considering two components (dN sin 9) and (udN cos ¢) as shown in Fig, 12.15(a). Due to symmetry, Javsing =0 This is illustrated in Fig. 12.15(c), where two symmetrical clements in mirror image position with respect to the X-axis are considered. Therefore, ° @ R= 2fuan 608 9 = 2LRWP ne, Joos? dg 0 ° 1 or (12.15) HRWP yyy, (20 +8120) Pivoted shoe brakes are mainly used in hoists and cranes. The applications of these brakes are limited because of the physical problem in locating a pivot so close to the drum surface. Example 12.7 4 pivoted double-block brake, ilar to that in Fig. 12.12, has two shoes, which subtend an angle (26) of 100°. The diameter of the brake drum is 500 mm and the width of the friction Tining is 100 mm. The coefficient of friction is 0.2 and the maximum intensity of pressure between the lining and the brake drum is 0.5 N/mm. The pivot of each shoe is located in such a manner that the moment of the frictional force on the shoe is zero. Caleulate: (i) the distance of the pivot from the axis of the brake drum; (ii) the torque capacity of each shoe; and (iii) the reactions at the pivot. Solution Given D~ 500mm 00 mm = = 0.2 Prax, = 0.5 Nitam? 26= 100° Step 1 Distance of pivot from axis of drum From Eq. (12.12), , =—4Rsind____4(250)sin(50°) 26+sin26— (2222) sin 0% 180 = 280.59 mm @ Step Torque capacity ofeach shoe From Eq. (12.13), M, = 2UR?WPypay, Si. 0 = 2(0.2(250)?(100¥0.5) sin(50°) = 957 555 N-mm. Gi) Step UL Reactions at pivot From Eqs (12.14) and (12.15), Ry= FR Pq (29 +sin 26) = }(250)0100,0.5) (( wen sin (009 = 17063 N Ry= ; HRWPyqy, (20 + sin 28) = UR, = 0.2 (17 063) = 3412.6 N ii) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 490 Design of Machine Elements The total torque-absorbing capacity of the pair of shoes in the upper half of the brake drum is given by, (Mun = (p+ (4), = 686 315.98 + 404 926.43, = 1091 242.41 N-mm Since all four shoes are identical, the two pairs are also identical. Therefore, M,= (Mun + y= 2M) yp = 2(0.091 242.41) = 218248482 N-mm or, 1M, = 2182.48 N-n (i) 12.7 BAND BRAKES The construction of a simple band brake is shown in Fig.12.20. It consists of a flexible steel strip lined with friction material, which is pressed against the rotating brake drum. When one end of the steel band passes through the fulcrum of the actuating lever, the brake is called the simple band brake. ewok ed” | Fig. 1220. Simple Band Brake The working of the steel band is similar to that of a flat belt operating at zero velocity. The free-body diagram of forces acting on the band and the lever is shown in Fig. 12.21. The ratio of band tensions is given by, Rg Boe (12.24) , where, P= tension on the tight side of the band (N) tension on the loose side of the band (N) 11= coefficient of friction between the friction lining and the brake drum = angle of wrap (rad) The torque M, absorbed by the brake is given by. M,=(P,~P)R (12.25) where, jorque capacity of the brake (N-mm) radius of the brake drum (mm) €2) ZV ‘elt Fig 12.21 Free-body Diagram of Forces Considering the forces acting on the lever and taking moments about the pivot, Pyxa= Px! Ba or Pa (12.26) An element of the band subtending an angle (d¢) is shown in Fig. 12.22. The elemental area of the friction lining is (Rd@w), where w is the width of the lining parallel to the axis of the brake drum. In the figure, (P) and (P+ dP) are tensions in the band in the loose and tight sides respectively. Ifp is the intensity of pressure, the normal reaction (aN) is given by (P+ dP) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 500_Design of Machine Elements ‘The disadvantages of belt drives compared to other types of drives are as follows: (i) Belt drives have large dimensions and ‘occupy more space. Gi) The velocity ratio is not constant due to belt slip. (iii) They impose heavy loads on shafts and bearings. (iv) There is considerable loss of power resulting in low efficiency. (v) Belt drives have comparatively short service life. Belt drives are mainly used in electric motors, automobiles, machine tools and conveyors. Depending upon the shape of the cross-section, belts are classified as flat belts and V-belts. Flat belts have a narrow rectangular cross-section, while V-belts have a trapezoidal cross-section. Flat belts offer the following advantages over V-belts: (i) They are relatively cheap and easy to maintain. Their maintenance consists of periodic adjustment in the centre distance between two shafis in order to compensate for stretching and wear. They do not require precise alignment of shafts and pulleys. ‘When worm out, they are easy to replace. (ii) A flat belt drive can be used as a clutch by making a simple provision of shifting the belt from tight to loose pulley and vice versa. Gii) Different velocity ratios can be obtained by using a stepped pulley, where the belt is shifted from one step to another, having different diameters. (iv) They can be uscd in dusty and abrasive atmosphere and require no closed casing. (v) The design of fiat-belt drive is simple and inexpensive. (vi) They can be used for long centre distances, even up to 15 m. (vii) The efficiency of flat belt drive is more than ‘V-belt drive. The major disadvantage of flat belt drives over V-belt drives are as follow: (i) The power transmit drive is low. capacity of flat-belt (ji) The velocity ratio of fiat belt-drive is lower than V-belt drive. (iii) Flat-belt drives have large dimensions and ‘occupy more space compared to V-belt drives. (iv) Flat belts generate more noise than V-belts. (v) In general, fiat-belt drives are horizontal and not vertical. It is due to these reesons that flat belts are becoming less popular on the shop floor. Flat belts are used in belt conveyors, baking machinery, brick and clay machinery, crushers, saw mills, textile machinery, line shafts and bucket elevators. Compared with flat belts, V-belts offer the following advantages: (® The force of friction between the surfaces of the belt and V-grooved pulley is high due to wedge action. This wedging action permits a smaller arc of contact, increases the pulling capacity of the belt and consequently results in increase in the power transmitting capacity. (i) Woelts have short centre distance, which results in compact construction, (iii) They permit high specd-reduction even up to seven to one. (iv) Flat belts are hinged, while V-belts are endless which results in smooth and quiet ‘operation, even at high operating speeds. (¥) The drive is positive because the slip is negligible due to wedge action (vi) Welt drive can operate in any position, even when the belt is vertical. ‘The disadvantages of a V-belt drive over a flat- belt drive are as follows: (W The ratio of the cross-sectional height to the pulley diameter is large in case of the V- belt. This increases bending stresses in the belt cross-section and adversely affects the durabilit (ii) The efficiency of the V-belt is lower than that of the flat-belt and the creep is also higher. (iii) The construction of V-grooved pulleys is complicated and costlier compared with pulleys of the flat-belt drive. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 504 Design of Machine Elements Refer to Fig.13.5 again. The length of the belt (L) is given by, L= are (fab) + be + arc (cde) + a =D = = 7 la.) 40g +> (ats) + on = Sr 2p)+ Coop +2en+ 26) +Coosp mee or L= Ss BD-d)+2CcosB (a) For small val of B, and Substituting these values of f and cos B in Eq. (a), we get, L= er *\o- 4) af 2] 8c? 2 2 244) (Dd, p_ (=a 2 2c 4c a(D+d) | (D-dy =2¢+2D+a) , (D-a" 4 a2 8 (13.3) Acrossed belt drive is shown in Fig. 13.6. Construction Draw a line Og perpendicular to the line o;¢ The area ofeg is a rectangle. Fig. 13.6 Crossed Belt Drive From triangle ogo,, sin p= 28 90468 _ 0 of 00,00, 09, _ Di2+dj2_ Did ee eae D+d sin B= in B= 0, = %, = (180° + 2p) = 1804 2sin1( 222) (13.4) The procedure used for open belt drive can be used for crossed belt drive and it can be proved that a, the belt length L for a crossed belt drive is given by, m(D+d), (D+dy La2c+ Oe Z a 35) It should be noted that in the above expréssions, D and dare pitch diameters of pulleys while L is the pitch length of the belt, 13.4 ANALYSIS OF BELT TENSIONS ‘The forces acting on the element of a flat belt are shown in Fig. 13.7. The following notations are used in the derivations: aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 808 _Design of Mechine Elements 13.6 CONDITION FOR MAXIMUM POWER (ALTERNATIVE APPROACH) ‘When the belt passes over the pulley, the centrifugal force due to its own weight tends to lift the belt from the surface of the pulley. An element of belt subtending an angle (d9) at the centre of the pulley is shown in Fig, 13.9. Fig. 13.9 Length of belt element = r do Mass of element = mr do where m is the mass per unit length of the belt. The acceleration of the belt element rotating a about the axis of the pulley is | — 5 Centrifugal force on belt element = CF = mass x acceleration CF = mr do (5) mido (a) The centrifugal force CF induces belt tension P.. By symmetry, the centrifugal force induces equal tension on two sides of belt, Resolving the forces acting on the belt element in vertical direction, CF= sin{ 2) (b) From (a) and (b), méag=2r,sn( 2) {c) For small values, “e-#) From (c) and (d), mm? d= 2P, (4) P.=m? (3.11, A belt can transmit maximum power when the following two conditions are simultaneously satisfied: (i) The tension on the belt reaches the maximum permissible value for the belt cross-section. (ii) The belt is on the point of slipping, ic., maximum frictional force is developed in the belt. Suppose, b= width of belt (mm) 1= thickness of belt (mm) = maximum permissible tensile stress for the belt material (N/mm?) ‘The maximum belt tension (P,,4.) is given by, Pg OS () Since there is tension due to centrifugal forece, Pi Pras. —P, © Also, i ge or aoe ® The power transmitted by the belt is given by, Power =(P\— P.) Power =P, v A= (Prag — PK = (Pru. — 7k Power = (Pray, ¥— mv) The power transmitted will be maximum when, a 2 powers 0 oF S (Pay v— mr) =0 av av or Pry, 3m = 0 (13.12) The optimum velocity of the belt for maximum power transmission is given by, ip. Van From Eqs (13.11) and (13.12), Pray ~3P.=0 Of Ppa =3P, (13.14) v (13.13) (13.15) From the expression (f), aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 512 _Design of Machine Elements Example 13.2 The following data is given for a V-belt drive connecting a 20 kW motor to a compressor. ——— Motor-pulley —— Compressor- pulley | itch diameter 300 900 (mm) Speed (rom) 1440. 480 Coefficient of 0.2 02 friction The centre distance between pulleys is 1 m and the dimensions of the cross-section of the belt are given in Fig. 13.14(a). The density of the composite belt is 0.97 g/cc and the allowable tension per belt is 850 N. How many belts are required for this application? ‘| REESI RRS) SoRRBIN Rees ee BSISIIOY Fig. 13.14 Solution Given KW=20 D=900mm d=300mm C=1m p=097 g/cc P,=850N f=0.2 n= 1440 rpm = 40° StepI Ratio of belt tensions From Eq. (13.1), a, 180-2sin" (224) 2C a) 2x 1000 = 180—2sin’ ( 145.07" 180 elaisin(@2) — ¢10/20\2.53)/sinQ0") = 4 4 (‘S2)— =2.53 rad Step II Mass of belt per metre length Refer to Fig. 13.14(b). Draw ab L be From A abe, tan20° be = ba tan 20° = 14tan 20° The width by at the base is given by, by= 22 =2 be = 22 -2(14 tan 20°) = 11.81 mm 1 Area of cross-section = pli +22)(14) = 236.67 mm? = (236.67 x 10) cm? The length of a one metre belt is 100 cm. Therefore, the mass of the belt (m) per metre length is given by, mass = density x volume of belt = density x (area of cross-section x length) 97) x (236.67 x 10°2)(100) gna/m .97)(10"3)(236.67 x 10-2100) kg/m. .23 kg/m Step IIL KW rating per belt y= _tda__ 7(300)(1440) ~ 601000) 60(1000) mv? = (0.23)(22.62)? = 117.68 From Eq. (13.7), Ram? Py my R-117.68 SOS 4a P; -117.68 ® The allowable tension in the belt is given as 850N 22.62 m/s eft! sin60/2) 7 P,=850N (b) From Eqs (a) and (b), P= 284.11. N kW per ber = FP” _ (850 = 284.11)(22.62) 1000 1000 =128 Step1V_ Number of belts 20 ‘Number of belts = De 1.56 or 2 belts Example 13.3 The following data is given for an open-type V-belt drive: diameter of driving pulley ~ 150 mm diameter of driven pulley = 300 mm aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Belt Drives 517 Belt Specification 7.2 m length of 152 mm width and 5 plies HI-SPEED belting, 13.9 PULLEYS FOR FLAT BELTS Table 13.4 Recommended diameters of cast iron The pulleys for flat belts consist of three parts, viz., rim, hub and arms or web. The rim carries the belt. The hub connects the pulley to the shaft. The arms or web join the hub with the rim, There are two types of pulleys that are used for flat, belts, viz., cast iron pulleys and mild steel pulleys”. The pulley diameters are calculated in belt drive design. They should comply with standard values. The recommended values of minimum pulley diameters are given in Table 13.3. The minimum pulley diameter depends upon the following two factors: (i) The number of plies in the belt (ii) The belt speed Preferred values of pulley diameters are given in Table 13.4. There is a relationship between the width of the belt and the width of the pulley, or to be more specific, width of the rim of the pulley. The difference between the width of the rim and the widih of the belt is given in Table 13.5. Preferred values for width of cast iron and mild steel pulleys are given in Table 13.6. Table 13.3. Minimum pulley diameters for given belt speeds and bet plies (mm) No. of plies ‘Maximum belt speed (m/s) i ie ae 3 90 100 «112140180 4 140 160 180 200-250 5 200 224 «250315355 6 250 315 355-400-450 1 355 400 450-500 S60. 8 450 500 560 630710 9 560 630710 800-900 10 630710 800-900-1000 and mild steel flat pulleys ‘Nominal diameter (mm) Tolerance on diameter (nm) 40 405 45, 50 +06 56, 63 +08 71, 80 +10 90, 100, 112 +12 125, 140 16 160, 180, 200 +20 224, 250 £25 280, 315, 355 432 400, 450, 500 44.0 560, 630, 710 $5.0 800, 900, 1000 +63 1120, 1250, 1400 +80 1600, 1800, £1 Table 13.5 Relationship between belt and pulley widths Belt width (mm) Pulley to be wider than the belt swith by (mm) Upto and including | 13 From 125 up to and including 250 25 From 250 up to and including 375 38 From 375 up to and including 500 50 Table 13.6 Recommended widths of cast iron anu mild steel flat pulleys Wii (mm) Tolerance (nm) 20, 25, 32, 40, $0, 63, 71 £10 80,90, 100, 112, 125, 140 +15 160, 180, 200, 224, 250, 280, 315 £20 400, 450, 500, 560, 630 £3.0 ‘There is a specific term, “crowning” of pulley in flat belt drive. The thickness of the rim is slightly ? 15 1691-1980: Specifications for cast iron and mild steel flat pulleys. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Table 13.12 Dimensions of standard cross-sections Pitch Belt Nomi- Nomi Recom- Permis- sec- width nal top nal mended sible tion Wy width Height Mini---Mininvum (mm) Wimm) T(mm) mum pitch | pitch diameter | diamerer of pulley | ofpulley (nm) aj (mm) Z 3a 6% 30 A es! 125 S96 B 4 W 200 125 £ 19 14 315 200 D2 19 500335 E32 2363 500 5000 _. 3000 & 2000 = S £ % 1000 5 3 & 500 3 £0 200 100) 1 2.345 10 20 30 50 100 200 Belt Drives 523, The selection of the cross-section depends upon two factors, namely, the power to be transmitted and speed of the faster shaft. Figure 13.24 shows the range of speed and power for various cross- sections of the belt. Depending upon the power and speed of the faster pulley, a point can be plotted on this diagram and the corresponding cross- section selected. In borderline cases, alternative design calculations are made to determine the best solution. 500 800 Design power (kW) Fig. 13.24 Selection of Cross-section of V belt The calculations of V-belts are based on preferred pitch diameters of pulleys and pitch lengths, The series of preferred values for pitch diameters and pitch lengths (in mm) are given in Tables 13.13 and 13.14 respectively. The number of belts required for a given appli- cation is calculated by the following relationship: Number of belts (transmitted power in kW) x (F,) ~ (KW rating of single V-belt) x (F.) x (Fy) PXE, “BXEXhy (13.18) where, P = drive power to be transmitted (kW) F,=correction factor for industrial service (Table 13.15) P, = power rating of single V-belt (from Table 13.16 to Table 13.20) &, rection factor for belt length (Table 13.21) F,=correction factor for are of contact (Table 13.22) An extensive data regarding the correction factors, kW ratings of belts and other details is given in the standard as well as in manufacturer’s catalogues. However, the discussion in this article is restricted to the selection procedure of general purpose belts. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 528 Design of Machine Elements ©o so -is0. Gro 70 | 0 00 org BF 0 a0 wo SO 9FO leo 0 00 859 ca ooze 90 60 0 wre veo 0 00 9 er oz 0 90 Gro cro sco 10 000 19 Ire oon 0 +0 Leo wo 00 000 or sor iso 10 ro 0 000 06s t5e ost 0 sro cro #0 80 oes ove 041 Iso. sro 6e0 co £10 ars tr sve ost aro cro LED 1zo 910 tes wwe ore 0st tro 60 SED oo sro 86 see WE 01 wo Leo eo 810 ey € SVE seo FO Fo a0 ore id seo ico cco 9 utr az zo avo so wwe lez a5 @o sco zz see ose wr Let 0 00 Ore HE we 9 cour vo 090 ere 067 ort Pet ro sto x00 ovo HT + $8t el wt vro ro Loo 000 vez ote oot BFL iro 010. ono 000 961 18 sel ert oo 800 Loo 100 oo 1 at x01 60 970 900 soo £00 000 801 O01 10 670 oo eo zoo 100 ovo 60 $60 sro seo. 160 180 1L0 wo 000 aL BOL S55 S60 PPT (86 v0 ro 9c0 oo 000 | os oss 6s we OE COL Ww oo sz0 #70 reo 0 | ser sve see we OFZ Fee wo oro 810 ovo ovo | sre Lez ZI 6L'I a AY a ay A ay [ae a a at AY po Got IST FEL FEL SE UL 8OT tet taste eet tt OE HLT HET NST E OTT LETT O160T SVT HLT 0c Ost StL! Ot Stee Se 1 pands sof 1.39 42 fo naumip yond kay sys ms sano poods Faqind sojjous uo y20;u00 fo-240 og] wpm apy mu £1 SHPG-A HOHDS-G 40) (4d) Mii sBunvs womeg LVL AE aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 534_Design of Machine Elements Table 13.21 Correction factors for belt pitch length (F,) Table 13.22 Correction factor for arc of contact (E,) Correction Belt pitch length (mm) Factor Belt cross section Z A B c Dd E 0.80 630 0.81 930 | 0.82 700 1560 2740 0.83 1000 0.84 790 1760 0.85 1100 0.86 | 40s 890 3130 0.87 1210 1950 3330 0.88 990 0.89 090 | 475 1100 1370 2190 3730 4660 0.91 2340 092 | 530 1560 2490 4080 5040 0.93 1250 0.94 2720 4620. $420 0.95 625 1760 2800 0.96 1430 3080 6100 097 1950 $400 0.98 700 1550 3310 0.99 1640 2180 3520 6850 1.00 780 1750 2300 6100 1.02 1940 2500 4060 7650 | 1.03 6840 1.94 | 920 2080 2700 1.05 2200 2850 4600 7620 9150 1.06 2300 1.07 1080 8410 9950. 1.08 2480 3200. 5380 1.09 2570 9140. 10710 L10 27003600 La 6100 1.12 2910 10700. 12230 113 3080 4060 114 3290 6860 13750 Las 4430 116 3540 4820. 7600 12200 117 5000 13700 15280 118 5370 119 6070 15200 16800 1.20 9100 1.21 10700. Are of contadion— Corréction D-a os smaller pulley Factor Fy ¢ Gin degrees) 0.00 180 1.00 0.05 177 0.99 0.10 174 0.99 01s 171 0.98 0.20 169 0.97 0.25 166 0.97 0.30 163 0.96 035 160 0.95 0.40 157 0.94 0.45 154 0.93 0.50 151 0.93 13.12. SELECTION OF V-BELTS. In practice, the designer has to select a V-belt from the catalogue of the manufacturer. The following information is required for the selection: (i) Type of driving unit (ii) Type of driven machine (iii) Operational hours per day (iv) Power to be transmitted (v) Input and output speeds (vi) Approximate centre distance upon the availability of space The basic procedure for the selection of V-belts consists of the following steps: (i) Determine the correction factor according to service (F,) from Table 13.15. It depends upon the type of driving unit, the type of driven machine and the operational hours per day. (ii) Calculate the design power by the following relationship: depending Design power = F, (transmitted power) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Belt Drives 539 Example 13.10 11 is required to select a V-belt ‘drive from 5 RW normal torque motor, which runs at 1440 rpm to a light duty compressor running at 970 rpm. The compressor runs for 24 hours per day. Space is available for a centre distance of about 500 mm. Assume that the pitch diameter of the driving pulley ix 150 mm. Solution Given kW=5 = 14401pm_ n= 970 pm C=500mm service = 24 hours per day d~-150mm StepI Correction factor according to service (F,) In this application, a normal torque motor is driving a compressor of 5-kW capacity. From Table 13.15, the correction factor according to service (F,) is 12, Step Design power Design power = F, (transmitted power) 2(5)= 6 kW Step IIL Type of cross-section for belt Plot a point with co-ordinates of 6 kW and 1440 apm speed in Fig. 13.24. It is observed that the point is located in the region of the B-section belt. Therefore, for this application the cross-section of the V-belt is B. StepIV Pitch diameter of smaller and bigger pulleys The pitch diameter for the smaller pulley is given as 150 mm, 1440 fio = —— = 1.485 Speed ratio= 5-5 d=150mm and D=1.485(150)= 222.68 mm It is observed from Table 13.13 that standard diameter for bigger pulley is 224 mm. D=224mm Step V_ Pitch length of belt From Eq. (13.3), n(D+d) Ora 4c (224 +150) , (224 — 150)? 2 4(500) b=2C+ = 2(500)+ = 1590.22 mm Step VI Preferred pitch length From Table 13.14, the preferred pitch length for B-section belt is 1560 or 1690 mm. It is assumed that the pitch length of the belt is 1560 mm. Step VII Correct centre distance Substituting this value of pitch length in Eq. (13.3), n(D+d)_(D-dy 2 4c (224 +150) | (224~ 150)? 2 4c Simplifying the above expression, C2 486.26C + 684.5=0 486.26 + 486.267 ~ 4(684. C= = 484.85 mm 2 The correct centre distance is 484.85 mm. Step VEIL Correction factor for belt pitch length (F.) From Table 13.21 (B-section and 1560 mm pitch length), L=2C+ 1560 = 2C + F,=092 Step IX Correction factor for arc of contact (F,) From Eq. (13.1), = s0-2sir'( 24) 2c 224-150 2x 484.85 =180-2sin“( )=17125° ori From Table 13.22, Fy= 0.98 StepX Power rating of single V-beit From Table 13.17, (1440 mpm, 150 mm pulley, B-section) (speed ratio = 1.485) P, = 3.83 +0.36=4.19 kW Step XI Numter of belis From Eq. (13.18), PxE, FLXELX Fy ___5(1.20) ~ 4.19(0.92)(0.98) 1.59 or 2 belts Number of belts ~ aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Chain Drives. « A Chapter 14 14.1 CHAIN DRIVES direction by means of the chain from a single ; driving sprocket A chain drive consists of an endless chain wrapped around two sprockets as shown in Driven wheels 2S Fig. 14.1. 4 chain can be defined as a series of 2 links connected by pin joints. The sprocket is 2 toothed wheel with a special profile for the teeth. The chain drive is intermediate between belt and gear drives. It has some features of belt Driving wheel : + Fig. 14.2 Driving Driven a pan ag wl sprocket sprockst (iii) Chain drives have small overall dimensions | ; than belt drives, resulting in compact unit. Fig 141 Clin Drives (iv) A chain does not slip and to that extent, z thain drive is a positive drive. drives and some of gear drives. The advantages of . asta ha chain drives compared with belt and gear drives are GG) "The eftieisary, oF chaid cirives/is Righs’Rok as follows: properly lubricated chain, the efficiency of (Chain drives can be used for long as well as chain’ drive ix font 9696 1 98%, short centre distmces, They are particularly (©!) Chain does not require intial tension. suitable for medium centre distance, where La the forces acting on shafts are gear drives will require additional idler * Guanes 7 ‘i gears, Thus, chain drives can be used over a (ii) Chains are easy to replace. (viii) Atmospheric conditions and temperatures do wide range of centre distances As shown in Fig. 14.2, a number of shafts can be driven in the same or opposite not affect the performance of chain drives. They do not present any fire hazard, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 552 _ Design of Machine Elements high speed applications, the recommended surface hardness is 300 to 500 BH. The teeth are hardened cither by carburising in case of low carbon stee! or by quenching and tempering in case of high carbon steel. Lh Y SSS NB] Sw © Fig.14.9 Construction of Sprocket Wheels (@) (a) (b) ‘The difference between the gear and the sprocket is as follows: (i) A gear meshes with another gear. A sprocket meshes with an ‘intermediate’ link, namely chain, which in tum meshes with another sprocket. The face width of gear is usually more with respect to its diameter, The sprockets are comparatively thin so as to fit between inner link plates of the chain. The teeth of gears have involute profile, while circular ares are used for the profile of sprocket teeth. There are standard profiles for the teeth of a di) (iii) Table 146 Proportions of the sprocket wheel (Figs 14.10.and 14.11) sprocket wheel, as illustrated in Figs 14.10 and 14.11. The principal dimensions of the tooth profile are given in Table 14.6, be =| bn bn) bn ee FT IZ Dr Ds) | i | [ee Fig. 14.11 Rim Profile of Sprocket _ imension _ Notation 1. Chain giteh P (able 14.1) ech ek p 2. Pitch circle diameter D 5) 2 | 3. Roller diameter a (Table 14.1) 4, Width between inner plates 4, (Table 14.1) 5, Transverse pitch Pi (Table 14.1) 6. Top diameter D, (Dynwx = D+ 1.25p ~ a doin = D+? ( 7. Root diameter D, D-2r, (Contd) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 562 Design of Machine Elements and 40p = 40(12.7) = 508 mm Refer to Fig.14.15(a). a, 6 and c are the centres of circles 4, B and C respectively. Construct a line ad perpendicular to the line be. sinp= 24-202 95 2. p~30° ab 40p Referring to Fig. 14.15(a), Dy-D, _[137.64-69.12 sino, = 28 —Pa_ | 137.68— 09.12 2a 2(508) or @=3.87° ¥ De-Dz 206.3 ~ 137.64 sin ory as 2a 2(508) or a =3.87° The forves acting on the shaft of the sprocket B are shown in Fig.14.15(b). Considering equilibrium of vertical and horizontal forces, III sin (30 + ay) + $55.5 cos a 111 sin (30 + 3.87) + 555.5 cos (3.87) = 1173.41 N 111 cos (30 + of) - 555.5 sin a 111 cos (30 + 3.87) ~ $55.5 sin (3.87) = 884.98 N The resultant reaction Ris given by R 14.9 SILENT CHAIN The silent or inverted-tooth chain as shown in Fig. 14.16 consists of a series of links formed from laminated steel plates. Each plate has two teeth with a space between them to accommodate the mating tooth of the sprocket. The sprocket teeth have a trapezoidal profile. Depending upon the type of joint between links, the silent chains are divided into two groups—Reynold chain and Morse chain. In the Reynold chain, the links are connected by pins resulting in sliding friction. Rocker joints are used in Morse chain. Fig 14.16 Silent chain Compared with roller chains, the silent chains can be used for high speed applications. They operate more smoothly and almost noiselessly. Their reliability is more due to laminated construction, They are, however, more heavier, more difficult to manufacture and more expensive than roller chains. Their applications are limited due to these reasons. Short-Answer Questions 14.1 What are the advantages of chain drives? 14.2 What are the disadvantages of chain drives? 14.3 What are the applications of chain drives? 14.4 What are the advantages of link chains? 14,5 What are the disadvantages of link chains? 14.6 What are the applications of link chains? 14.7 What are the five parts of roller chain? 14.8. How will you designate roller chain’ 14.9 What are simple and duplex roller chai 14.10 What is the offset link of roller chain? 14.11 What is the polygonal action in rolle: chain? How will you reduce it? 14.12 In chain drives, the sprocket has odd number of tecth and the chain has even number of links. Why? 14.13. What are the types of failure in roller chains? 14.14 What are the advantages of silent chains? 14.15 What are the disadvantages of silent chains? 14.16 What are the applications of silent chains? aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 366 Design of Machine Elements the radius of the ball is slightly less than the radii of curvature of the grooves in the races. Kinematically, this gives a point contact between the balls and the races. Therefore, the balls and the races may roll freely without any sliding, Deep groove ball bearing has the following advantages: (a) Due to relatively large size of the balls, deep groove ball bearing has high load carrying capacity. {b) Deep groove ball bearing takes loads in the radial as well as axial direction. (c) Due to point contact between the balls and races, frictional loss and the resultant temperature rise is less in this bearing. The maximum permissible speed of the shaft depends upon the temperature rise of the bearing. Therefore, deep groove ball bearing gives excellent performance, especially in high speed applications. (4) Deep groove ball bearing generates less noise due to point contact. (e) Deep groove ball bearings are available with bore diameters from a few millimetres to 400 millimetres. ‘The disadvantages of deep groove ball bearings are as follows: (a) Deep groove ball bearing is not self- aligning. Accurate alignment between axes of the shaft and the housing bore is required. (b) Deep groove ball bearing has poor rigidity compared with roller bearing. This is due to the point contact compared with the ine contact in case of roller bearing, It is unsuitable for machine tool spindles where rigidity is important consideration, (ii) Cylindrical Roller Bearing When maximum load carrying capacity is required ina given space, the point contact in ball bearing is replaced by the line contact of roller bearing. A cylindrical roller bearing consists of relatively short rollers that are positioned and guided by the cage. Cylindrical roller bearing offers the following advantages: (a) Due to line contact between rollers and races, the radial load carrying capacity of the cylindrical roller bearing is very high. (b) Cylindrical roller bearing is more rigid than ball bearing. (©) The coefficientof frictions low and frictional Joss is less in high-speed applications, The disadvantages of cylindrical roller bearing are as follows: (a) In general, cylindrical roller bearing cannot take thrust load. (b) Cylindrical roller bearingiis not self-aligning It cannot tolerate misalignment. It needs precise alignment between axes of the shaft and the bore of the housing. (©) Cylindrical roller bearing generates more noise. (ii) Angular Contact Bearing In angular contact bearing, the grooves in inner and outer races are so shaped that the line of reaction at the comact between balls and races makes an angle with the axis of the bearing. This reaction has two components— radial and axial. Therefore, angular contact bearing can take radial and thrust loads. Angular contact bearings are often used in pairs, either side by side or at the opposite ends of the shaft, in order to take the thrust load in both directions. These bearings are assembled with a specific magnitude of pre- load, Angular contact bearings offer the following advantages: (a) Angular contact bearing can take both radial and thrust loads. (b) In angular contact bearing, one side of the groove in the outer race is cut away to pemnit the insertion of larger number of balls than that of deep groove ball bearing. This permits the bearing to carry relatively large axial and radial loads. Therefore, the load carrying capacity of angular contact bearing is more than that of deep groove ball bearing. The disadvantages of angular contact bearings are as follows: (a) Two bearings are required to take thnust load in both directions. (b) The angular contact bearing must be mounted without axial play. (©) The angular contact bearing requires initial, pre-loading aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 572 _Design of Machine Elements of Vis 1 when the inner race rotates while the outer race is held stationary in the housing, The value of V is 1.2 when the outer race rotates with respect to the load, while the inner race remains stationary. In most of the applications, the inner race rotates and the outer race is fixed in the housing. Assuming V as unity, the general equation for equivalent dynamic load is given by, P=XF,+YF, - (153) In this chapter, we will use the above equation for calculating equivalent dynamic load. The effect of F should be considered in special cases, where the outer race rotates and the inner race is stationary. When the bearing is subjected to pure radial load F,, P=F, (15.4) When the bearing is subjected to pure thrust load F,, P=F, (15.5) 15.9 LOAD-LIFE RELATIONSHIP The relationship between the dynamic load carrying capacity, the equivalent dynamic load, and the bearing life is given by, (18.6) » bo = (§) rated bearing life (in million revolutions) iynamic load capacity (N), and p=3 (for ball bearings) 0/3 (for roller bearings) Rearranging Eq. (15.6), C=PC Ly)? For all types of ball bearings, C=P( Ly)" For all types of roller bearings, CHP (Ly) (15.8) The relationship between life in million revolutions and life in working hours is given by (15.7) 60n 107 on (15.9) 10 where, 1 jon = rated bearing life (hours) peed of rotation (rpm) Example 15.1 In a particular application, the radial load acting on a ball bearing is 5 kN and the expected life for 90% of the bearings is 8000 h. Calculate the dynamic load carrying capacity of the bearing, when the shaft rotates at 1450 rpm. Solution Given F,=5KN Lio, = 8000h Step I Bearing life (Ly) Iyq = Sotleon . $0(14508000) ° 10° 10° = 696 million rev. n= 1450 1pm. Step IT Dynamic toad capacity Since the bearing is subjected to purely radial load, P=F,=5000N From Eq. (15.7), C= P(Ljo)'3 = (5000)(696)" = 44 310.48 N Example 15.2 4 taper roller bearing has a dynamic load capacity of 26 KN. The desired life for 90% of the bearings is 8000 h and the speed is 300 rpm. Calculate the equivalent radial load that the bearing can carry. Solution Given C=26KN Ly9,=8000h n= 300 1pm Step I Bearing life (Ly) OnLy _ 60(300)(8000) fo = To 10 = 144 million rev. Step I Equivatent radial load From Eq. (15.8), C=P(Lyo)°3 C___ 26000 Go 044 Since the bearing is subjected to purely radial load, = 5854.16N F, =5854.16N 15.10 SELECTION OF BEARING LIFE While selecting the proper size of bearing, it is necessary to specify the expected life of the bearing for the given application. The information regarding the life expectancy is generally vague and values aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Rolling Contact Bearings 585 Table 15.6 (Contd) d D B Cc Designation e Y 90 160 325 183.000 30218 043 14 160 42.5 238000 32218 0.43 14 190 465 308000 30318 035 7 190 46. 251000 3318 0.83 0.72 190 675 429.000 32318 035 17 100 145 24 119000 T4CB100 0.48 1.25 150 32 161000 32020.X 0.46 13 150 39 212000 33020 0.28 21 165 47 292000 T2EE100 O31 19 180 37 233000 30220 0.43 14 180 ” 297000 32220 0.43 la 180 63 402000 33220 0.40 1s 215 SLS 380000 30320 0.35 7 215 56.5 352000 31320. 0.83 0.72 215 as 539000 32320 0.35 7 150 225 48 347000 32030.X 0.46 13 270 49 402000 30230 043 14 270 7 682000 32230 043 14 320 nR 765000 30330 035 7 320 2 837000 31330. 0.83 o72 200 280 51 446000 32940 0.40 is 310 7 704000 32040. 0.43 14 360 64 737000 30240 043 14 360 104 1140000 32240 0.40 1s 300 420 76. 990.000 32960, 0.40 1s. Example 15.8 4 transmission shaft, ransmitting Solution 8 KW of power at 400 rpm from a bevel gear G; 10 a helical gear G, and mounted on two taper roller bearings B, and B, is shown in Fig. 15.12(a). The gear tooth forces on the helical gear act at a pitch circle radius of 55 mm, while those on the bevel gear can be assumed to act at the large end of the tooth ai a radius of 50 mm. The diameter of the journal at the bearings B, and B, is 40 mm, The load factor is 1.2 and the expected life for 90% of bearings is 10 000 h. Bearings B, and By are identical. The thrust force due to bevel and helical gears is taken by the bearing B., Select suitable taper roller bearings Jor this application. ven kW=8 n=400pm d= 40mm load factor = 1.2 Lig, = 10000 h Step 1 Radial and axial forces on benrings The forces acting on the shaft in the vertical and horizontal planes are shown in Fig. 15.12(b). Considering forces in the vertical plane and taking moments about the bearing B,, 3473 (150) + 439 (100) — 1319(50) — Ry (300) = 0 e Ryg= 1663N Considering equilibrium of vertical forces, 3473 — Ry, — 1663-439 =0 ti Ry = BIN Considering forces in the horizontal plane and taking moments about the bearing 8), aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 604 Design of Machine Elements and stick to the surface in a particular fashion. The clusters of polar molecules, cohering to one another and adhering to the surface, form a compact film which prevents metal to metal contact as is seen in the region B. This results in partial lubrication. There is also a zone (region 4) where metal to metal contact takes place, junctions are formed at high spots and shearing takes place due to relative motion. The performance of bearing under boundary lubrication depends upon two factors, namely, the chemical composition of the lubricating oil, such as polar molecules (at the region B), and surface roughness (at region 4). The hydrodynamic bearing also operates under the boundary lubrication when the speed is very low or when the load is excessive. There is a particular mode of lubrication known as elastohydrodynamic lubrication. When the fluid film pressure is high and the surfaces to be separated are not sufficiently rigid, there is elastic deformation of the contacting surfaces. This elastic deflection is useful in the formation of the fluid film in certain cases. Since the hydrodynamic film is developed due to elastic deflection of the parts, this mode of lubrication is called elastohydrodynamic lubrication. This type of lubrication occurs in gears, cams and rolling contact bearings. 16.2 VISCOSITY Viscosity is defined as the internal frictional resistance offered by a fluid to change its shape or relative motion of its paris. An oil film placed between two parallel plates is shown in Fig. 16.7. The lower plate is stationary while the upper plate is moved with a velocity U by means of a force P. Area—-A LLL Stationary plate Fig. 16.7 Newton's Law of Viscosity ‘The molecules of oil are visualised as small balls, which roll in layers between two plates. The oil will stick to both the surfaces, and therefore the layer of molecules in contact with the stationary plate has zero velocity. Similarly, the layer of molecules in contact with the upper plate will move with a velocity U. The intermediate layers will move with velocities which are proportional to their distance from the stationary plate. Therefore, u_U,_U; hh hy This type of orderly movement is called streamline, laminar or viscous flow. The tangential force per unit area, i.e.,(P/A), is shear stress, while the ratio (U/h) is the rate of shear. According to Newton’s law of viscosity, the shear stress is proportional to the rate of shear at any point in the fluid. Therefore, (6) ron When the velocity distribution is non-linear with respect to, the term (L/h) in the above equation is replaced by (dU/dt) and the equation is rewritten as au i sal dh } The constant of proportionality jz in the above equations is called the absolute viscosity. The unit of absolute viscosity is given by or (16.1) (16.2) = N-s/imm? or MPa-s The popular unit of viscosity is the Poise, which gives absolute viscosity in dyne-s/cm*. Poise is a large unit and viscosities of most of the lubricating oils are given in terms of centi-Poise (cP), which is one-hundredth of a Poise. Therefore, following two separate notations are used for viscosity: = viscosity in units of (N-s/mm?) or (MPa-s) cosity in units of (cP) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Sliding-Contect Bearings 619 or o=201990°%)(— ]eossauot u H=0.145(10°) N-s/mm? = 0.145 cP 16. REYNOLD’S EQUATION The theory of hydrodynamic lubrication is based on a differential equation derived by Osborne Reynold. This equation is based on the following assumptions: @ The lubricant obeys Newton’s viscosity. ii) The lubricant is incompressible. (iii) The inertia forces in the oil filmare negligible. (iv) The viscosity of the lubricant is constant. (¥) The effect of curvature of the film with respect to film thickness is neglected. It is assumed that the film is so thin that the pressure is constant across the film thickness. (vi) The shaft and the bearing are rigid. (vii) There isa continuous supply of lubricant. An clement having dimensions ds, dy and d: is considered in this analysis, and is shown in Figs 16.20 and 16.21. X is the axis in the direction of motion, ¥ is the axis in the radial plane and Z is the axis parallel to the axis of the journal. u, v and w are velocities in X, ¥, Z directions respectively. 1, and 7, are shear stresses along X and Z directions, while p is the fluid film pressure. law of Fig.16.20 Fluid Element in X-Y Plane [— Oil groove Bearing—>f 7 f d Lae WILE eI Fluid element Fig. 20.21 Fluid Element in Y-Z Plane The forces acting on the element in X direction are shown in Fig. 16.22. Considering equilibrium of forces, (Za aey -(Zaloe) © | (ed) Fig. 16.22 Equilibrium of Forces in X Direction The product (dr dy dz) indicates the volume of the clement. Since the element has positive volume, (de dy de) #0 Therefore, Eq. (a) is written as, BQ» According to Newton's law of viscosity [Eq. (16.2), =H © From (b) and (©), Integrating twice, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. ‘Machine Elements (iii) Start-up Load The unit bearing pressure for starting conditions should not exceed 2 Nimm?. The start-up load is the static load when the shaft is stationary. It mainly consists of the dead weight of the shaft and its attachments. The start- up load can be used to determine the minimum length of the bearing on the basis of starting conditions, (i) Radial Clearance The radial clearance should be small to provide the necessary velocity gradient. However, this requires costly finishing operations, rigid mountings of the bearing assembly and clean lubricating oil without any foreign particles. This increases the initial and maintenance costs. The practical value of radial clearance is 0.001 mm per mm of the journal radius. Or, c=(0.001)r The practical values of radial clearances for commonly used bearing materials are given in Table 16.3. Table 16.3 Radial clearance Material Babbins Radial clearance (0.001) r to (0.00167) r ad (0.001) r to (0.01) r (0.002) r to (0.0025) r Copp’ Aluminium-alloy (v) Minimum Oil Film Thickness The surface finish of the journal and the bearing is governed by the value of the minimum oil film thickness selected by the designer and vice versa. There is a lower limit for the minimum oil film thickness, below which metal to metal contact occurs and the hydrodynamic film breaks. This lower limit is given by, hy = (0.0002)r (i) Maximum Oil Film Temperature The lubricating oil tends to oxidise when the operating temperature exceeds 120%. Also, the surface of babbitt bearing tends to soften at 125°C (for bearing pressure of 7 N/mm?) and at 190°C (for bearing pressure of 1.4 N/mm?), Therefore, the operating temperature should be kept within these limits. In general, the limiting temperature is 90°C for bearings made of bebbits. Bearings can be designed for two different conditions—bearings for maximum load carrying capacity and bearings for minimum. frictional fh, loss. The optimum values of (%) for full journal bearing for these conditions are as follows: (5) ratio (4) or (*) for | ‘maximum load minimum fiction | = 0.66 0.60 1 033 030 os 0.43 0.12 025 027 0.03 The designer can use the above values for design of bearings under optimum conditions. Example 16.9 The following data is given for a 360° hydrodynamic bearing: radial load = 3.2 kN Journal speed = 1490 rpm Journal diameter = 50 mm bearing length = 50mm radial clearance = 0.05 mm viscosity of lubricant = 25 cP Assuming that the total heat generated in the bearing is carried by the total oil fiow in the bearing, calculate (i) coefficient of friction; (ii) power lost in friction; (iii) minimum oil film thickness; (iv) flow requirement in litres/min; and (y) temperature rise. Solution Given .2KN 2 =1490 rpm 1=50mm c¢=0.05mm z= 25cP Step Performance parameters W _ 32,0100 P= 1a (60)(50) s-(2) (ais) (Sa) = 0.121 = 1,28 N/mm? aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Sliding-Contact Bearings 645 and the flow requirement is given by, Phe o= Eh 6u log, (2) 165 A 360° hydrodynamic bearing operates under the following conditions: radial load = 50 kN joumal diameter = 150 mm bearing length = 150 mm radial clearance = 0.15 mm minimum film thickness = 0.03 mm viscosity of lubricant = 8 cP What is the minimum speed of operation for the joumal to work under hydrodynamic conditions? [2973 rpm} 16.6 The following data is given for a 360° hydrodynamic bearing: joumal diameter = 100 mm bearing length = 100 mm radial load = 50 KN joumal speed = 1440 rpm radial clearance = 0.12 mm viscosity of lubricant = 16 cP Calculate (i minimum film thickness; (i) coefficient of friction; and ii) power lost in friction. [(@ 0.0087 mum (ii) 2.016 x 10° (iii) 0.76 kW) 16.7 The following data is given for a full hydrodynamic bearing: radial load = 25 KN joumal speed = 900 rpm unit bearing pressure = 2.5 MPa (Ud) ratio = 1 viscosity of lubricant = 20 cP class of fit = H7e7 Caleulate i) dimensions of the bearing , ‘minimum film thickness, and requirement of oil flow. [@) 100 x 100 mm (ii) 0.0191 mm (iii) 1.057 litre/min| 168 The following data is given for a 360° journal diameter bearing length journal speed = 1440 rpm radial load = 8 kN viscosity of lubricant = 12 cP The bearing is machined on the lathe from bronze casting, while the steel journal is hardened and ground. The surface roughness (cla) values for turning and grinding are 0.8 and 0.4 microns respectively. For thick film hydrodynamic lubrication, the minimum film thickness should be five times the sum of surface roughness values for the journal and bearing. Calculate (®) the permissible minimum film thickness; (ii) the actual film thickness under operating conditions; and (iii) power lost in friction. [(@ 6 microns (ii) 6.07 microns (iii) 0.069 kW) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Spur Gears 649 For high speed reduction, two-stage or three-stage constructions are used. The normal velocity ratio for a pair of bovel gears is 1 : 1, which can be increased to 3: 1 under certain circumstances. For high speed reduction, worm gears offer the best choice. The velocity ratio in their case is 60 : 1, which can be increased to 100: 1. They are widely used in material handling equipment duc to this advantage. Spur gears generate noise in high speed applications, due to sudden contact over the entire face width between two meshing teeth. In helical gears, the contact between the two meshing texth begins with a point and gradually extends along the tooth, resulting in quiet operations. Helical gears are, therefore, preferred for high speed power transmission, Fromcostconsiderations, spurgearsare the cheapest. They are not only easy to manufacture but there exist a number of methods to manufacture them, The manufacturing of helical, bevel and worm gears is a specialized and costly operation. 17.5 LAW OF GEARING The fundamental law of gearing states ‘The common normal to the tooth profile at the point of contact should always pass through a fixed point, called the pitch point, in order to obtain a constant velocity ratio’. Referring to Fig. 17.6, O, end O; Fig. 17.6 Law of Gearing are centres of the two gears rotating with angular velocities @, and w, respectively. C is the point of contact between the teeth of the two gears and NN is the common normal at the point of contact. GA is the velocity of the point C, when it is considered on the gear 1, while GB is the velocity of the point C, when it is considered on the gear 2. Also, CAL O,C and CR1LO,C _The projections of the two vectors CA and CB, ie., GB, along the common normal NN must be equal, otherwise the teeth will not remain in contact and there will be a slip. C= 0 « O,C CB= ox 0,C AC, CA ‘ @, OC *CB ® Since AO,CG and ACAD are similar, hence ) Similarly, AO,FC and ACDB are similar, and thus OG OF "CB CD 2) From (b) and (©), CA_ OC OF "ae" ae 0c * From (a) and (d), OF @, OG © Similarly, AO,FP and AQ,GP are similar, therefore, GE OP ao" OP o From (¢) and (f), @ _ OP o, OP () Also, O,P + O,P = 0,0; = constant () Therefore, for 2 constant velocity ratio («@,/0,), P should be a fixed point. This point P is called the pitch point. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Spur Gears 663 (9) Components of tooth force between gears E and F (i) Components of tooth force between gears B and C. Solution Given KW=5 n=250pm a= 20° 2,=65 zp=20 z=80 2¢=35 m=Smm Step Free-body diagrant of forces ‘The centre distance between two pins, which are fixed to the drum, is denoted by a. dy+dy 3254175 a 2 The output torque on the mixing drum is given by, = 250mm 60x10%(kW) _ 60 10°(5) 2nn 2(250) = 190 985.93 N-mm (@) Refer to Fig. 17.27 for the flow of power. B is the input pinion. Power is supplied from the pinion Bto the gear C and then from the gear E to the gear F. Therefore, between gears E and F, the gear £ is the driving gear and the gear F is the driven gear. The construction of a free-body diagram of forces is illustrated in Fig, 17.28. Let us denote F; and F’, as, upper and lower planetary gears F. Refer to Fig. 17.28(a): (i) Itis assumed that the gear £ is rotating in the clockwise direction. Therefore, gears F and F, will rotate in anti-clockwise direction. 4 isa fixed internal gear. (i) During working operation, the point 1 on the gear E and the point 2 on the gear F, will be in contact with cach other. Similarly, points 3 and 4, points 5 and 6, and points 7 and 8 will be in contact with each other. Refer to Fig. 17.28(b): (i) Gear F; is the driven gear as compared to the gear £. It is made to rotate in the anti- clockwise direction. Therefore, at the point 2, the tangential component (P;)gr will act ‘towards the right. For this component, there M, will be an equal and opposite reaction on the gear E at the point 1, Therefore, the tangential component (P,),,Will act towards left at the point 1 on gear E. ZZ “ZA « 8 8 Pick e (Pere? e- "ey ines , i ‘ her " 1 Jews (Pler | \ : : 6) CH i 4 Nemes i 44 4h ip) i 6 a (Phere iL V2(Pier "7 F< Pa 3 (a) Ahir g. (o) Fig. 17.28 Free Body Diagram of Forces (ii) Gear F, is also a driven gear as compared to the gear £. It is made to rotate in anti- clockwise direction. Therefore, at the point 4, the tangential component (P,)ep will act towards the left. For this component, there will be equal and opposite reaction on the gear £ at the point 3. Therefore, the tangential component (P,)-,- will act towards the right at the point 3 on the gear E. (iii) Gear A is fixed: in the housing and will resist the motion of planetary gears F; and F,, Therefore, in relative terms, gears F, and F, are driving gears with respect to the gear A. For the driving gear, the tangential component acts in opposite direction of the motion. Therefore, at the point 5 on the gear F,, (P) qq Will acttowards the right. Similarly, aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Spur Gears 669 (£) Length of hub = length of key or width of gear (maximum value) (g) Width of web = 5, = (0.28) to (0.35) (h) Inner diameter of rim (d,—24,) (i) Outer diameter of rim = dedendum circle diameter = d, (i) Thickness of rim = ¢, = 2m to 3m (k) Diameter of holes in web = dy = (d,—4,)/4 (I) Pitch circle diameter ofholes=d,=(d,+d,)/2 (m) Width of rim = face width Whatever the computed dimensions, care should be taken to make the gear a ‘sound’ forging and modify the dimensions, if required. The guidelines for designing a forging are explained in Section 3.3 ‘on Design considerations of Forgings. These rules related to uniform thickness, minimum section thickness, fillet and comer radii and provision of draft must be applied to final drawing of gear blank. Gil) Gears with Large Diameter There are two varieties of large size gears—solid cast gears and rimmed gears. When the addendum circle diameter is up to 900 mm, a solid cast iron gear with one web is recommended. When the addendum circle diameter is more than 1000 mm, two webs are provided. A solid cast gear with two webs is shown in Fig. 17.35. Solid cast iron gears are extensively used due to low cost. Though cast iron gears are cheaper than steel ‘gears, their torque transmitting capacity is low. The dimensions of cast iron gears are determined by thumb rules and principles of casting design ae he a ‘The main dimensions of cast iron gear, illustrated in Fig. 17.35 are as follows: Fig. 17.35 Cast Iron Web Type Gear (a) Pitch circle diameter = d’ = mz () Addendum circle diameter = d,= m(z + 2) (c) Dedendum circle diameter = d, = m(z -2.5) (4) Shaft diameter =d, (©) Outer diameter of hub =d, = 2.04, (1) Length of hub = (1.25 d,) to (2.0 d,) length of key (g) Width of web = c = 0.5 to 0.6 of circular pitch (h) Inner diameter of rim = d, = (d, ~ 21,) (i) Outer diameter of rim = dedendum circle diameter = d, (Thickness of rim = 1, = 0.56 x circular pitch (k) Width of rim= face width = Whatever the computed values of dimensions, care should be taken to make the gear a ‘sound” casting and modify the dimensions, if required. The guidelines for designing a casting are expiained in Section 3.2 on Design considerations of Casting. ‘These rules related to uniform thickness, minimum section thickness, fillet and comer radii and avoiding concentration of metal at any junction must be applied to the final drawing of gear blank. ‘A rimmed gear consists of a steel rim fitted on the central casting with hub, arms or webs. The rim is forged from alloy steel. There are two varieties of rimmed gears, which are illustrated in Figs 17.36 (a) and (b). In the first case, the rim is press fitted on the casting and setscrews are used to prevent displacement of the rim with respect to casting, In the second type of construction, the rim is bolted to the central casting. Rimmed gears save costly high strength material, but they are more expensive to manufacture, The thickness of the rim from the inside diameter to the root circle diameter of tooth is usually taken as (7m) to (8m). ‘Steel rim Cast iron hub (a) ©) Fig. 17.36 Rimmed Gears aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Spur Gears_673 At the section XX, M,=P,Xh Is (a )ee 12 t yma The bending stresses are given by, t Pxh)| — ayy @(5) Rearranging the terms, . patos (§) Multiplying the numerator and denominator of the right-hand side by m, 2 R= mos | m Defining a factor ¥, ; ref 6hm the equation is rewritten as, P,=mbo,¥ (a) In the above equation, Y is called the Lewis form factor. Equation (a) gives the relationship between ‘the tangential foree (P) and the corresponding stress 6, When the tangential force is increased, the stress also increases. When the stress reaches the permissible magnitude of bending stresses, the corresponding force (P,) is called the beam strength. Therefore, the beam strength (Sy) is the maximum value of the tangential force that the tooth can transmit without bending failure. Replacing (P,) by (S,), Eq. (a) is modified in the following way: Sy=mbo,Y (17.16) O,= where, 5, = beam strength of gear tooth (N) 04 ~ permissible bending stress (Nimm”) Equation 17.16 is known as the Lewis Equation The values of the Lewis form factor Y for 20° full- depth involute system, are given in Table 17.3. In order to avoid the breakage of gear tooth due to bending, the beam strength should be more than the effective force between the meshing teeth. Therefore, S,2 Pee The method of calculating of Pz is discussed in Section 17.19. In the design of gears, it is required to decide the weaker between the pinion and gear. Revriting the Lewis equation, Sy=mbo,Y It is observed that m and b are same for pinion as well as for gear. When different materials are used, the product (o, x ¥) decides the weaker between pinion and gear. The Lewis form factor Y is always less fora pinion compared with gear. When the same ‘material is used for the pinion and gear, the pinion is always weaker than the gear. Table 17.3 Values of the Lewis form factor Y for 20° full-depth involute system z ¥ z ¥ z Y 150289 «27 «034855 OAIS. 16 0295 28 «0352, 600.421 17 0302-29 «0355 650.425 18 0308 30035870 (0.429 19 0314 32-0364 «750.433 20 0320 330367 «800.436 210326 «35037390 O.ad2 220330 «37 «0380 100 0.446 23° 0333. «39 «(0386 «150 0.438 24 0337 «40-0389 200 0.463 25 0340 «45 «0399 300 O.471 26 0344 50 -0.408__—Rack 0.484 | 1718 PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESS The tooth of the gear is subjected to fluctuating bending stress as it comes in contact with the meshing tooth. The stress-time diagrams for gear teeth are illustrated in Fig. 17.41. The following observations are made from the figure: (i) The teeth of the driving and driven gears are subjected to stress in one direction only as aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 678 _Design of Machine Elements Introducing a factor of safety, Sy= Pe (5) @ The recommended factor of safety is from 1.5 to 2. The tangential component is given by, 2M, 2M, 2 \@ wae mz | 2an P d mz mz From Eq. (17.24), Cy p _ 60108 { (KWIC, rrr { mznG, o From Eq. (17.16), b)(S, 5, =miayy =m2( 2)( Sey ©) From (a), (b) and (c), Ws 6 mn =| 010! (W)C) (1730) Oe m3 The above equation is used in the preliminary stages of gear design. 17.21 WEAR STRENGTH OF GEAR TOOTH The failure of the gear tooth due to pitting occurs when the contact stresses between two meshing teeth exceed the surface endurance strength of the material. Pitting is a surface fatigue failure, characterized by small pits on the surface of the gear tooth. In order to avoid this type of failure, the proportions of the gear tooth end surface properties, such as surface hardness, should be selected in such a way that the wear strength of the gear tooth is more than the effective load between the meshing teeth, The analysis of wear strength was done by Earle Buckingham, in his paper “The relation of load to wear of gear teeth’, which was submitted before the American Gear Manufacturing Association (AGMA) in 1926. Buckingham’s equation gives the wear strength of the gear tooth. Buckingham’s equation is based on Hertz theory of contact stresses. When two cylinders are pressed together as shown in Fig. 17.42(a), the contact stress is given by, 2P Tor fa) 2PQ-p? {¢ and + (b) it al| —+— 4 4, where, 0, = maximum value of the compressive stress (N/mm?) P= force pressing the two cylinders together (N) 6 = half width of deformation (mm) 1 = axial length of the cylinder (mm) dy, dy = diameters of the two cylinders (mm) E,, Ey = modulii of elasticity of two cylinder materials (N/mm?) = Poisson's ratio @) (b) ig. 17.42 Contact Stresses Due to deformation under the action of load P, a rectangular surface of width (26) and length () is formed between the two cylinders, The elliptical stress distribution across the width (2h) is shown in Fig. 17.42(b) and (c). Substituting Eq, (b) in Eq. (a) and squaring both sides, (©) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 686 Design of Machine Elements m=4mm =10m 04) = 40 mm Step III Beam strength From Table 17.3, the Lewis form factor for 25 teeth is 0.34. S, = mbo,Y = 440( 32 * oo. 34) = 12693.33N Step IV Dynamic toad by Buckingham’s equation For Grade 6, =8+063 6 For pinion, g=m+028 fd, =4+0.25 100 p= 8 + 0.63 @= 12,095 pm For gear, o=m+028 dz =4+0.25 S400 eg = 8 + 0.63 O= 13.67 pm = 6, + = 12.095 + 13.67 = 25.765 pm or (25.765 x 105) mm From Table 17.7, the value of deformation factor Cis 11400 N/mm’. Also, v=5.236m/s b=40mm P,= 143239N From Eq. (17.26), 2iv (Ceb+P) 2iv4 f(Ceb+ P) = _21(5.236)11 1400(25.765 x 107)(40) + 1432.39] 21(5.236) + yf 1400(25.765x 10°40) + 1432.39} = 6448.30N Step V_ Efective load Paay= (Cy P, + Pj) = 1.5(1432.39) + 6448.30 596.89 N Step VI Actual factor of sofety against bending failure Sp _ 12693.33 = Sh = 26853 148 (= B= 950689 P= The design is satisfactory and the module should be 4mm. Step VIE Surface hardness for gears 2000) 100+25 Pare lf) = bOdK BHN y =16 Pi (f)=S,. oF 8596.89 (1.48) = 40(1.6)(100)(0.16) BHN = 352.49 or 360 Step VII Dimensions of gears (i number of teeth on pinion = 25 ii) number of teeth on gear = 100 Gi) module = 4 mm (iv) face width = 40 mm (v) pitch circle diameter of pinion = 100 mm. (vi) pitch circle diameter of gear = 400 ram (vii) addendum (m) = 4 mm (viii) dedendum (1.25 m) =5 mm (ix) clearance (0.25 m) = | mm (x) tooth thickness (1.5708 m) = 6.2832 mm (xi) fillet radius (0.4 m)= 1.6mm — Example 17.12 it is required to design a 1wo- stage spur gear reduction unit with 20° full-depth involuie teeth. The input shaft rotates at 1440 rpm and receives 10 kW power through a flexible coupling. The speed of the output shaft should he approximately 180 rpin. The gears are made of plain carbon steel 43C8 (Sy = 700 Némni*) and heat- treated to a surface hardness of 340 BHN. The gears are to be machined to the requirement, of Gratle 6. The service factor can be taken as 1.5. (i) Assuming that the dynamic load, to be proportional to the pitch-line veloc estimate the required value of the module. The factor of safety is 1.5. (ii) Select the first preference value of the module and determine the correct value of factor of safety for bending, using Buckingham equation. Gi) Determine the factor of safety against pitling. (iv) Give a list of gear dimensions. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Helical Gears 697 The gear rotates from left to right as indicated by the arrow. For this rotation, the point A, will be the first point to come in contact with its meshing tooth on the other gear. It is called the ‘leading’ edge of the tooth. Also, the point 4, will be the last point to come in contact with its meshing tooth on the other gear. It is called the ‘trailing’ edge of the tooth, In order that the contact on the face of the tooth shall always contain at least one point, the leading edge of the tooth should be advanced ahead of the trailing end by a distance greater than the circular pitch. Or, 2p (a) From the triangle 4d,C, 2 b x=btmy Substituting the above expression in Eq. (a) bran yep P tany or be From Eq. (18.3), p__ am _ mm, tany tany tanwcosw sinw Therefore, by ttn (18.14) siny This is the minimum face width. Example18.1 4 pair of parallel helical gears Consists of a 20 teeth pinion meshing with a 40 teeth gear. The helix angle is 25° and the normal pressure angle is 20°. The normal module is 3 mm. Calculate (i) the transverse module; (ii) the transverse pressure angle: Gi) the axial pitch; (iv) the pitch circle diameters of the pinion and the gear; (v) the centre distance: and (vi) the addendum and dedendwm circle diameters of the pinion. Solution Given z,=20 2,=40 m,=3mm yn 25° a= 20° Step 1 Transverse madule My 3 m= cosy c0s(25) =331 mm @ Step II Transverse pressure angle 2 tance = BRM — 02) ge aigs (ii) cosy cos(25) Step WI Axial pitch p___mm _ 7331) ‘tay tany — tan(25) Step IV Pitch circle diameters of pinion and gear Pa 223mm (iii) a Ze 208). 66.2 mim ? cosy — cos(25) Fatt. 498) 2132.4 mm (iv) cosy” cos(25) Step V_ Contre distance d,+ 2. alte SAM sum 9 Step VI Addendum and dedendum circle diameters of pinion d, =f = = cosy =3|—8_42|=72.2 mm c0x(25) 4, =m Z -25] cos y -25] =58.7mm (vi) 20 [33 185 FORCE ANALYSIS The resultant force P acting on the tooth of a helical gear is resolved into three components, P, P, and P,,as shown in Fig. 18.5(a), where P, = tangential component (N) P,= radial component (N) P,,= axial or thrust component (N) aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. 708 Design of Machine Elements sg, = Bedok cos” = 12674.83N Step V_ Factor of safety 13.04 wo 9172.28 12.674.83 # 9172.28 138 18.10 CROSSED HELICAL GEARS Helical gears, which are mounted on non-parallel shafts, are called crossed helical gears. In these gears, the axes of two shafts are neither parallel nor intersecting like worm gears. The pitch cylinders of a pair of crossed helical gears are illustrated in Fig. 18.12. Theaction of crossed helical gears differs fundamentally from that of parallel helical gears. There is a line contact between meshing teeth of parallel helical gears. it is observed from the figure, that kinematically, there is a point contact between the meshing teeth of crossed helical gears. Since the contact area of a point is very small, the contact Pitch cylinder of 2 Pitch cylinder of 1 Fig. 18.12 Pitch Cylinders of Crossed Helical Gears pressure is high and wear is comparatively rapid. Therefore, crossed helical gears have very low load carrying capacity, They are not recommended for high power transmission. They are particularly useful in light duty applications. They are used in small internal combustion engines to drive the speedometer cable and oil pump and distribution system. Their other applications include feed mechanisms on machine tools, water pumps and instruments. Figure 18.13(a) shows the contact between meshing teeth of crossed helical gears, mounted on two shafts—I and 2, The contact point lies between the lower surface of gear-2 and the upper surface of gear-1. The gears are rotating in the directions shown. At the point of contact, V, = pitch line velocity of contact point when considered on shaft-1. pitch line velocity of contact point when considered on shaft-2. Tooth of gear 1 Point: Teeth of gear 2 (b) Fig. 18.13 Crossed Helical Gears It should be noted that the velocity vector V, shown in the figure is on the lower side of gear~ 2. The vectors ¥; and ¥, act as tangents to their respective pitch cylinders at the point of contact. The velocity of sliding is the vector difference between V; and V;. The line ab indicates the vector aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. aa You have either reached a page that is unavailable for viewing or reached your viewing limit for this book. Bevel Gears _ 717 amy Pinion (chiving) © Fig. 1910 Force Analysis In two-dimensional representation of forces, very often (+) and (x) are used to indicate forces perpendicular to the plane of the paper. (+) indicates a force that is perpendicular to the plane ‘of paper and which is towards the observer. (x) indicates a force that is perpendicular to the plane of the paper and which is away from the observer. In examples of bevel gear tooth forces, it is often required to find out the magnitude and direction of three components acting on the pinion and gear. Force Components on Pinion The magnitudes are determined by using the following five equations: 60x10°(kW) P,= P,tan asin y Note that the notations (P,), (P,) and (P,) are used for components of force on pinion only. The directions of tangential and radial components acting on the pinion and gear are decided by same method that is used for spur gears. ( Tangential Component (P;) (a) The direction of tangential component for the driving gear is opposite to the direction of rotation. (b) The direction of tangential component for the driven gear is same as the direction of rotation. (ii) Radial Component (P,) (a) The radial component on the pinion acts towards the centre of the pinion. (b) The radial component on the gear acts towards the centre of the gear. (i) Thrust Component (P,) The following guidelines can be used to determine the direction of the thrust component: (a) The thrust component on the pinion is equal and opposite of the radial component on the gear. (b) The thrust component on the gear is equal and ‘opposite of the radial component on the pinion. The tendency of thrust components is to separate the meshing teeth, This fact is useful in deciding their directions. Example 19.1 pair of bevel gears transmitting 7.5 KW at 300 rpm is shown in Fig. 19.11(a). The pressure angle is 20°. Determine the components of the resultant gear tooth force and draw a free-body diagram of forces acting on the pinion and the gear: 2000. 7.5 KN | 200 rpm i T (@) 1103.38 Gear (driven) Phnion (driving) 1103.38 (b) Fig. 19.11

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy